TGM - Industrial Estates For Civil

TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUAL
FOR
INDUSTRIAL ESTATES
Prepared for
The Ministry of Environment and Forests

Government of India
by
IL&FS Ecosmart Limited
Hyderabad
October 2009
PROJECT TEAM
Project Coordination Dr. (Mrs.) Nalini Bhat

Ministry of Environment & Forests Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. (Mrs.) T. Chandni
Director, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Core Project Coordination Team Mr. Mahesh Babu

IL&FS Environment CEO
Mr. N. Sateesh Babu
Vice President & Project Director
Ms. Tamil Ezhil. G
Environmental Planner
Ms. Chaitanya Vangeti
GIS Engineer
Ms. Suman Benedicta Thomas
Technical Writer
Resource Person Dr. S.S. Varaprasad
Advisor, Andhra Pradesh Industrial Infrastructure Corporation
Expert Core & Peer Committee
Chairman Dr. V. Rajagopalan, IAS
Principal Secretary, Government of Uttar Pradesh
Core Members Dr. R. K. Garg
Former Chairman, EIA Committee, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Mr. Paritosh C. Tyagi
Former Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board
Prof. S.P. Gautam
Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board
Dr. Tapan Chakraborti
Director, National Environmental Engineering Research Institute
Mr. K. P. Nyati
Former Head, Environmental Policy, Confederation of Indian Industry
Dr. G.K. Pandey
Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. (Mrs.) Nalini Bhat
Dr. G.V. Subramaniam
Dr. B. Sengupta
Former Member Secretary, Central Pollution Control Board
Dr. R. C. Trivedi
Former Scientist, Central Pollution Control Board
Peer Members Dr. Hosabettu
Former Director, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Mr. N. Raghu Babu
Sr. Programme Specialist, GTZ ASEM
Prof. Deepak Kantawala
Former Chairman, Research Council, National Environmental
Engineering Research Institute
Member Convener Mr. N. Sateesh Babu
Project Director
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION TO THE TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT 1-1

1.1 Purpose ................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Project Implementation ....................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Additional Information........................................................................................................ 1-3
2. CONCEPTUAL FACETS OF EIA 2-1
2.1 Environment in EIA Context............................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Pollution Control Strategies ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.3 Tools for Preventive Environmental Management.............................................................. 2-2
2.3.1 Tools for assessment and analysis ......................................................................... 2-2
2.3.2 Tools for action...................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.3 Tools for communication....................................................................................... 2-9
2.4 Objectives of EIA.............................................................................................................. 2-10
2.5 Types of EIA ..................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.6 Basic EIA Principles ......................................................................................................... 2-11
2.7 Project Cycle ..................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.8 Environmental Impacts ..................................................................................................... 2-13
2.8.1 Direct impacts...................................................................................................... 2-14
2.8.2 Indirect impacts ................................................................................................... 2-14
2.8.3 Cumulative impacts ............................................................................................. 2-15
2.8.4 Induced impact .................................................................................................... 2-15
2.9 Significance of Impacts ..................................................................................................... 2-15
2.9.1 Criteria/methodology to determine the significance of the identified impacts.... 2-16
3. INDUSTRIAL ESTATES 3-18
3.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 3-18
3.1.1 IE planning approach in India ............................................................................. 3-18
3.1.2 Concept of managed/serviced work space (Industrial estates/parks/
complexes/areas, EPZs, SEZs, biotech parks, leather complexes) ...................... 3-20
3.1.3 Advantages of IE ................................................................................................. 3-20
3.1.4 The developmental context.................................................................................. 3-21
3.1.5 Types of IE .......................................................................................................... 3-22
3.1.6 Various forms of IE ............................................................................................. 3-23
3.1.7 Characteristics / Components of IEs.................................................................... 3-24
3.2 IE Site Identification, Planning, Development and Management ..................................... 3-26
3.2.1 Steps involved in identification of site ................................................................ 3-27
3.2.2 Site planning and development............................................................................ 3-28
3.2.3 IE management .................................................................................................... 3-34
3.3 Eco-industrial Parks .......................................................................................................... 3-45
3.3.1 Tools to explore for converting existing IEs into EIPs........................................ 3-46
3.3.2 Stage-wise explorable programmes..................................................................... 3-47
Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

i
Table of Contents
3.4 Summary of Applicable National Regulations.................................................................. 3-48

3.4.1 General description of major statutes .................................................................. 3-48
3.4.2 Industry-specific requirements ............................................................................ 3-48
4. OPERATIONAL ASPECTS OF EIA 4-1
4.1 Coverage of Industrial Estates under the Purview of Notification...................................... 4-1
4.2 Screening............................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.1 Applicable conditions for Category B projects ..................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 Criteria for classification of Category B1 and B2 projects.................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Application for prior environmental clearance...................................................... 4-6
4.2.4 Siting guidelines .................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3 Scoping for EIA Studies...................................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 Pre-feasibility report .............................................................................................. 4-8
4.3.2 Guidance for providing information in Form 1 ..................................................... 4-9
4.3.3 Identification of appropriate valued environmental components .......................... 4-9
4.3.4 Methods for identification of impacts.................................................................... 4-9
4.3.5 Testing the significance of impacts ..................................................................... 4-16
4.3.6 Terms of reference for EIA studies ..................................................................... 4-16
4.4 Environmental Impact Assessment ................................................................................... 4-22
4.4.1 EIA team.............................................................................................................. 4-22
4.4.2 Baseline quality of the environment .................................................................... 4-23
4.4.3 Impact prediction tools ........................................................................................ 4-26
4.4.4 Significance of the impacts.................................................................................. 4-26
4.5 Social Impact Assessment ................................................................................................. 4-27
4.6 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan ............................................................. 4-30
4.6.1 Risk assessment ................................................................................................... 4-30
4.6.2 Disaster management plan................................................................................... 4-35
4.7 Mitigation Measures.......................................................................................................... 4-39
4.7.1 Important considerations for mitigation methods................................................ 4-39
4.7.2 Hierarchy of elements of mitigation plan ............................................................ 4-40
4.7.3 Typical mitigation measures................................................................................ 4-41
4.8 Environmental Management Plan ..................................................................................... 4-42
4.9 Reporting........................................................................................................................... 4-43
4.10 Public Consultation ........................................................................................................... 4-45
4.11 Appraisal ........................................................................................................................... 4-48
4.12 Decision Making ............................................................................................................... 4-50
4.13 Post-clearance Monitoring Protocol.................................................................................. 4-51
5. STAKEHOLDERS’ ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES 5-1
5.1 SEIAA ................................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 EAC and SEAC................................................................................................................... 5-6

ii
Table of Contents
LIST OF TABLES
Table 3-1: Risk Levels and Land use Development ......................................................................... 3-33
Table 3-2: Responsibilities of IE Administration ............................................................................. 3-41
Table 3-3: Tools to Explore for Conversion to EIPs......................................................................... 3-47
Table 3-4: Stage-wise Explorable Programmes................................................................................ 3-47
Table 3-5: General Environmental Standards for Effluent Discharge .............................................. 3-48
Table 3-6: General Emission Standards............................................................................................ 3-50
Table 4-1: Advantages and Disadvantages of Impact Identification Methods ................................. 4-10
Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts ............................................................................................................ 4-12
Table 4-3: List of Important Physical Environment Components and Indicators of EBM.............. 4-24
Table 4-4: Choice of Models for Impact Predictions: Risk Assessment.......................................... 4-31
Table 4-5: Mitigation Measures for Construction Phase .................................................................. 4-41
Table 4-6: Mitigation Measures for Operation Phase ....................................................................... 4-41
Table 4-7: Structure of EIA Report................................................................................................... 4-44
Table 5-1: Roles and Responsibilities of Stakeholders Involved in Prior Environmental Clearance 5-1
Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions........................................................................................ 5-2
Table 5-3: SEIAA: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson/ Members/ Secretary ................................... 5-5
Table 5-4: EAC/SEAC: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson / Members / Secretary.......................... 5-9

iii
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1: Inclusive Components of Sustainable Development........................................................ 2-1
Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts ............................................................................................................ 2-14
Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact ......................................................................................................... 2-15
Figure 3-1: IE Planning Approach in India....................................................................................... 3-19
Figure 3-2: Various Types of IE ....................................................................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-3: Stages in IE Establishment and Management ................................................................ 3-26
Figure 3-4: Tools and Techniques for IE Planning........................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3-5: Site Suitability Approach for Candidate Sites................................................................ 3-28
Figure 3-6: Land Uses for Different Risk Levels.............................................................................. 3-33
Figure 3-7: Sustainable Management of Industrial Areas: Cycle of Change.................................... 3-39
Figure 3-8: Sustainable Development within IEs ............................................................................. 3-40
Figure 3-9: Eco- Industrial Development ......................................................................................... 3-46
Figure 3-10: Eco Industrial Networks............................................................................................... 3-46
Figure 4-1: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities Falling Under Category A ......... 4-3
Figure 4-2: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities Falling Under Category B ......... 4-4
Figure 4-3: Approach for EIA Study ................................................................................................ 4-22
Figure 4-4: Risk Assessment – Conceptual Framework ................................................................... 4-31
Figure 4-5: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance ............................................................ 4-32
Figure 4-6: Elements of Mitigation................................................................................................... 4-40

iv
Table of Contents
ANNEXURES
Annexure I
Types of Industrial Estates
Annexure II
Forms of Industrial Estates
Annexure III
Difference between Export Oriented Units and Special Economic Zones
Annexure IV
Common Service Facilities
Annexure V
Identification of Suitable Sites and Industries
Annexure VI
Site Establishment Factors
Annexure VII
A Compilation of Legal Instruments
Annexure VIII
Form 1 (Application Form for Obtaining EIA Clearance)
Annexure IX
Pre-feasibility Report: Additional Points for Possible Coverage
Annexure X
Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations
Annexure XI
Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes
Annexure XII
Sources of Secondary Data Collection

v
Table of Contents
Annexure XIII
Impact Prediction Tools
Annexure XIV
Form through which the State Governments/Administration of the Union Territories

Submit Nominations for SEIAA and SEAC for the Consideration and Notification by the
Central Government

vi
Table of Contents
ACRONYMS
AAQ Ambient Air Quality

ADB Asian Development Bank
APHA American Public Health Association
B/C Benefits Cost Ratio
BIS Bureau of Indian Standards
BOD Biological Oxygen Demand
BOQ Bill of Quantities
BPX By Product Exchange
CCA Conventional Cost Accounting
CEA Central Electricity Authority
CEAA Canadian Environmental Assessment Agency
CER Corporate environmental Reports
CETP Common Effluent Treatment Plant
CFE Consent for Establishment
CIL Coal India Limited
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand
CP Cleaner Production
CPCB Central Pollution Control Board
CRZ Coastal Regulatory Zone
CSR Corporate Social Responsibility
CST Central Sales Tax
DA Development Authorities
DfE Design for Environment
DO Dissolved Oxygen
EAC Expert Appraisal Committee
EBM Environmental Baseline Monitoring
EcE Economic-cum-Environmental
ECI Environmental Condition Indicators
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment
EIP Eco – industrial Parks
EIS Environmental Information system
EOUs Export Oriented Units
EPI Environmental performance indicators
EPR Extended Producers Responsibilities
EPZ Export Processing Zones
EMA Environmental Management Accounting

vii
Table of Contents
EMS Environmental Management System

EMP Environmental Management Plan
ERPC Environment Research and Protection Centre
ETP Effluent Treatment Plant
FCA Full Cost Assessment
GC General Condition
GEMS Global Environmental Monitoring System
HTL High Tide Line
IL&FS Infrastructure Leasing and Financial Services
ILO International Labour Organization
IMD India Meteorological Department
INFOTERRA Global Environmental Information Exchange Network of UNEP
IT Information Technology
IVI Importance Value Index
ISO International Standard Organization
LANDSAT Land Remote Sensing Satellite / Land use Satellite
LDAR Leak Detection and Repair
LCA Life Cycle Assessment
LTL Low Tide Level
MFA Material Flow Accounting
MoEF Ministry of Environment & Forests
MoUD Ministry of Urban Development
MPNG Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas
MRF Material Recovery Facilities
MSES Multi stage evaporator systems
MSW Municipal Solid Waste
NAQM National Air Quality Monitoring
NDIR Non-dispersive Infrared
NGO Non-Government Organizations
NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
NOC No Objection Certificate
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OECD Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PAH Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons
P-CP Programmatic Cleaner Production
P-EIA Programmatic Environmental Impact Assessment
PCC Pollution Control Committee
PCPIR Petroleum, Chemicals & Petrochemical Investment Regions

viii
Table of Contents
POTW Publicly Owned Treatment Works

PPV Peak Particle Velocity
R&D Research and Development
R&R Resettlement and Rehabilitation
RO Reverse Osmosis
RPM Respirable Particulate Matter
RSPM Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter
QA/QC Quality Assurance/Quality Control
QRA Quantitative Risk Assessment
SAR Sodium Absorption Ratio
SEAC State Level Expert Appraisal Committee
SEIAA State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority
SEZ Special Economic Zone
SIDC State Industrial Development Corporations
SME Small and Medium Scale Enterprises
SPCB State Pollution Control Board
SPM Suspended Particulate Matter
SS Suspended Solids
SSI Small-Scale Industries
TA Technology Assessment
TCA Total Cost Assessment
TCLP Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure
TDS Total Dissolved Solids
TEQM Total Environmental Quality Movement
TGM Technical EIA Guidance Manuals
TSDF Treatment Storage Disposal Facility
TSS Total Suspended Solids
UASB Up flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket
UDPFI Urban Development Plan Formulation and Implementation
UNEP United Nations Environmental Programme
USEPA United States Environmental Protection Agency’s
UTEIAA Union Territory Environment Impact Assessment Authority
UTPCC Union Territory Pollution Control Committee
VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
VEC Valued Environmental Components
WB World Bank Group / The World bank
WBCSD World Business Council on Sustainable Development

ix
1.
INTRODUCTION TO THE TECHNICAL EIA
GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is a process of identifying, predicting,

evaluating and mitigating the biophysical, social, and other relevant effects of
development proposals prior to major decisions being taken and commitments made.
These studies integrate the environmental concerns of developmental activities into the
process of decision-making.
EIA has emerged as one of the successful policy innovations of the 20th Century in the
process of ensuring sustained development. Today, EIA is formalized as a regulatory tool
in more than 100 countries for effective integration of environmental concerns in the
economic development process. The EIA process in India was made mandatory and was
also given a legislative status through a Notification issued in January 1994. The
Notification, however, covered only a few selected industrial developmental activities.
While there are subsequent amendments, this Notification issued on September 14, 2006
supersedes all the earlier Notifications, and has brought out structural changes in the
clearance mechanism.
The basic tenets of this EIA Notification could be summarized into the following:
Pollution potential as the basis for prior environmental clearance based on pollution
potential instead of investment criteria; and
Decentralization of clearing powers to the State/Union Territory (UT) level
Authorities for certain developmental activities to make the prior environmental
clearance process quicker, transparent and effective mechanism of clearance.
Devolution of the power to grant clearances at the state level for certain category of the
developmental activities / projects is a step forward to fulfill the basic tenets of the re-
engineering i.e., quicker, transparent and effective process but many issues come on its
way of functional efficiency. These issues could be in technical and operational domains
as listed below:
Technical issues
Ensuring level playing ground to avoid arbitrariness in the decision-making process

Classification of projects which do not require public hearing and detailed EIA
(Category B2)
Variations in drawing Terms of Reference (ToR) of EIA studies for a given
developmental activity across the States/UTs
Varying developmental-activity-specific expertise requirement for conducting EIA
studies and their appraisal
Availability of adequate sectoral experts and variations in competency levels
Inadequate data verification, cross checking tools and supporting institutional
framework

1-1
Introduction
Meeting time targets without compromising with the quality of assessments/ reviews
Varying knowledge and skill levels of regulators, consultants and experts
Newly added developmental activities for prior environmental clearance, etc.
Operational issues
State level /UT level EIA Authorities (SEIAA/UTEIAA) are formulated for the first
time and many are functioning
Varying roles and responsibilities of involved organizations
Varying supporting institutional strengths across the States/UTs
Varying manpower availability, etc.
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of developing the sector-specific technical EIA guidance manuals (TGM) is
to provide clear and concise information on EIA to all the stakeholders i.e., the project
proponent, the consultant, the reviewer, and the public. The TGMs are organized to cover
following:
Conceptual facets of an EIA

Details on the developmental activity including environmental concerns and control
technologies etc.
Operational aspects; and
Roles and responsibilities of various organizations involved in the process of prior
environmental clearance
For any given industry, each topic listed above could alone be the subject of a lengthy
volume. However, in order to produce a manageable document, this project focuses on
providing summary information for each topic. This format provides the reader with a
synopsis of each issue. Text within each section was researched from many sources, and
was usually condensed from more detailed sources pertaining to specific topics.
The contents of the document are designed with a view to facilitate in addressing relevant
technical and operational issues as mentioned in the earlier section. Besides, facilitates
various stakeholders involved in the EIA clearance process i.e.,
Project proponents will be fully aware of the procedures, common ToR for EIA
studies, timelines, monitoring needs, etc., in order to plan the projects/studies
appropriately.
Consultants across India will gain similar understanding about a given sector, and
also the procedure for EIA studies, so that the quality of the EIA reports gets
improved and streamlined
Reviewers across the states/UTs will have the same understanding about an industry
sector and would able to draw a benchmark in establishing the significant impacts for
the purpose of prescribing the ToR for EIA studies and also in the process of review
and appraisal.
Public who are concerned about a new or expansion projects, can have access to this
manual to know the manufacturing/production details, rejects/wastes from the
operations, choice of cleaner/control technologies, regulatory requirements, likely

1-2
Introduction
environmental and social concerns, mitigation measures, etc., in order to seek

clarifications appropriately in the process of public consultation. The procedural
clarity in the document will further strengthen them to understand the stages involved
in clearance and roles and responsibilities of various organizations.
In addition, these manuals would substantially ease the pressure on reviewers at the
scoping stage and would bring in functional efficiency at the central and state levels.
1.2 Project Implementation
The Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF), Government of India took up the task of
developing sector-specific technical EIA guidance manuals for all the developmental
activities listed in the re-engineered EIA Notification. The Infrastructure Leasing and
Financial Services (IL&FS), Ecosmart Limited (Ecosmart), has been entrusted with the
task of developing these manuals for 27 industrial and related sectors. Industrial Estate
(IE) is one of these sectors, for which this manual is prepared.
The ability to design comprehensive EIA studies for specific industries depends on the
knowledge of several interrelated topics. Therefore, it requires expert inputs from
multiple dimensions i.e., administrative, project management, technical, scientific, social,
economic, risk etc., in order to comprehensively analyze the issues of concern and to
draw logical interpretations. Thus, Ecosmart has designed a well-composed
implementation framework to factor inputs of the experts and stakeholders in the process
of finalization of these manuals.
The process of manual preparation involved collection & collation of the secondary
available information, technical review by sectoral resource persons and critical review
and finalization by a competent Expert Committee composed of core and sectoral peer
members.
The MoEF appreciates the efforts of Ecosmart, Expert Core and Peer Committee,
resource persons and all those who have directly and indirectly contributed to this
Manual. .
1.3 Additional Information
This TGM is brought out by the MoEF to provide clarity to all the stakeholders involved
in the ‘Prior Environmental Clearance’ process. As such, the contents and clarifications
given in this document do not withstand in case of a conflict with the statutory provisions
of the Notifications and Executive Orders issued by the MoEF from time-to-time.
TGMs are not regulatory documents. Instead these are the tools designed to assist in
successful completion of an EIA.
For the purpose of this project, the key elements considered under TGMs are: conceptual
aspects of EIA; developmental activity-specific information; operational aspects; and
roles and responsibilities of involved stakeholders.
This manual is prepared considering the Notification issued on September 14, 2006 and
the updates. For recent updates, if any, may please refer the website of the MoEF,
Government of India i.e., www.envfor.nic.in

1-3
2.
CONCEPTUAL FACETS OF EIA
2.1 Environment in EIA Context
“Environment” in EIA context mainly focuses, but is not limited to physical, chemical,
biological, geological, social, economical, and aesthetic dimensions along with their
complex interactions, which affect individuals, communities and ultimately determines
their forms, character, relationship, and survival. In the EIA context, ‘effect’ and
‘impact’ can often be used interchangeably. However, ‘impact’ is considered as a value
judgment of the significance of an effect.
Sustainable development is built on three basic premises i.e., economic growth,

ecological balance and social progress. Economic growth achieved in a way that does not
consider the environmental concerns, will not be sustainable in the long run. Therefore,
sustainable development needs careful integration of environmental, economic, and social
needs in order to achieve both an increased standard of living in short term, and a net gain
or equilibrium among human, natural, and economic resources to support future
generations in the long term.
“It is necessary to understand the links between environment and development in order to
make choices for development that will be economically efficient, socially equitable and
responsible, as well as environmentally sound.” Agenda 21
Figure 2-1: Inclusive Components of Sustainable Development
2.2 Pollution Control Strategies
Pollution control strategies can be broadly categorized in to preventive and reactive. The
reactive strategy refers to the steps that may be applied once the wastes are generated or
contamination of receiving environment takes place. The control technology or a
combination of technologies to minimize the impact due to the process rejects/wastes
varies with the quantity and characteristics, desired control efficiency and economics.

2-1
Conceptual Facets of EIA
Many a number or combination of techniques could be adopted for treatment of a specific

waste or the contaminated receiving environment, but are often judged based on techno-
economic feasibility. Therefore, the best alternative is to take all possible steps to avoid
pollution it self. This preventive approach refer to a hierarchy that involves i) prevention
& reduction; ii) recycling and re-use; iii) treatment; and iv) disposal, respectively.
Therefore, there is a need to shift the emphasis from the reactive to preventive strategy
i.e., to promote preventive environmental management. Preventive environment
management tools may be classified into following three groups:
Management Based Tools Process Based Tools Product Based Tools

Environmental Management Environmental Technology Assessment Industrial Ecology
System (EMS)
Toxic Use Reduction Extended Producers
Environmental Performance Responsibility
Best Operating Practices
Evaluation
Eco-labeling
Environmentally Best Practice
Environmental Audits
Design for
Best Available Technology (BAT)
Environmental Reporting Environment
and Communication Waste Minimization
Life Cycle
Total Cost Accounting Pollution Prevention Assessment (LCA)
Law and Policy Cleaner Production
Trade and Environment Cleaner Technology
Environmental Economics Eco-efficiency
These tools are precisely discussed in next sections.
2.3 Tools for Preventive Environmental Management
The tools for preventive environmental management can be broadly classified into
following three groups.
Tools for assessment and analysis

Tools for action
Tools for communication
Specific tools under each group are discussed precisely in next sections.
2.3.1 Tools for assessment and analysis
2.3.1.1 Risk assessment
Risk is associated with the frequency of failure and consequence effect. Predicting such
situations and evaluation of risk is essential to take appropriate preventive measures. The
major concern of the assessment is to identify the activities falling in a matrix of high &
low frequencies at which the failures occur and the degree of its impact. The high
frequency, low impact activities can be managed by regular maintenance i.e,. LDAR
(Leak detection and repair) programmes. Whereas, the low frequency, high impact
activities are of major concern (accidents) in terms of risk assessment. As the frequency
is low, often the required precautions are not realized or maintained. However, these risk
assessment identify the areas of major concerns, which require additional preventive

2-2
measures; likely consequence distances considering domino effects, which will give the
possible casualties and ecological loss in case of accidents. These magnitudes demand
the attention for preventive and disaster management plans (DMP). Thus is an essential
tool to ensure safety of operations.
2.3.1.2 Life cycle assessment
A broader approach followed to deal with environmental impacts during manufacturing is

called LCA. This approach recognizes that environmental concerns are associated with
every step of the processing w.r.t. the manufacturing of the products and also examines
environmental impacts of the product at all stages of the project life cycle. LCA includes
the product design, development, manufacturing, packaging, distribution, usage and
disposal. LCA is concerned with reducing environmental impacts at all the stages and
considering the total picture rather than just one stage of the production process.
By availing this concept, firms can minimize costs incurred on the environmental
conservation throughout the project life cycle. LCA also provides sufficient scope to
think about cost-effective alternatives.
2.3.1.3 Total cost assessment
Total Cost Assessment (TCA) is an enhanced financial analysis tool that is used to assess
the profitability of alternative courses of action ex. raw material substitution to reduce the
costs of managing the wastes generated by process; an energy retrofit to reduce the costs
of energy consumption. This is particularly relevant for pollution prevention options,
because of their nature, often produce financial savings that are overlooked in
conventional financial analysis, either because they are misallocated, uncertain, hard to
quantify, or occur more than three to five years after the initial investment. TCA involves
all of the relevant costs and savings associated with an option so that it can compete for
scarce capital resources fairly, on a level playing field. The assessments are often
beneficial in respect of the following:
Identification of costly resource inefficiencies

Financial analysis of environmental activities/projects such as investment in cleaner
technologies
Prioritization of environmental activities/projects
Evaluation of product mix and product pricing
Bench marking against the performance of other processes or against the competitors
A comparison of cost assessments is given below:
Conventional cost accounting (CCA): Direct and indirect financial costs+ Recognized
contingent costs
Total Cost Assessment (TCA): A broader range of direct, indirect, contingent and
less quantifiable costs
Full Cost assessment (FCA): TCA + External social costs borne by society
2.3.1.4 Environmental audit/statement
The key objectives of an environmental audit includes compliance verification, problem

identification, environmental impact measurement, environmental performance
measurement, conforming effectiveness of EMS, providing a database for corrective

2-3
actions and future actions, developing companies environmental strategy, communication

and formulating environmental policy.
The MoEF, Government of India issued Notification on ‘Environmental Statements’ (ES)

in April, 1992 and further amended in April 1993 – As per the Notification, the industries
are required to submit environmental statements to the respective State Pollution Control
Boards (SPCBs). ES is a pro-active tool for self-examination of the industry itself to
reduce/minimize pollution by adopting process modifications, recycling and reusing of
the resources. The regular submission of ES will indicate the systematic improvement in
environmental pollution control being achieved by the industry. In other way, the specific
points in ES may be used as environmental performance indicators for relative
comparison, implementation and to promote better practices.
2.3.1.5 Environmental benchmarking
Environmental performance and operational indicators could be used to navigate, manage

and communicate the significant aspects and give enough evidence of good
environmental house keeping. Besides prescribing standards, an insight to identify the
performance indicators and prescribing schedule for systematic improvement in
performance of these indicators will yield better results.
Relative indicators may be identified for different industrial sectors and be integrated in
the companies and organizations to monitor and manage the different environmental
aspects of the company, to benchmark and compare two or more companies from the
same sector. These could cover the water consumption, wastewater generation, energy
consumption, solid/hazardous waste generation, chemical consumption etc., per tonne of
final product. Once these bench marks are developed, the industries which are below
them may be guided and enforced to reach the level and those which are better than the
bench mark may be encouraged further by giving incentives etc.
2.3.1.6 Environmental indicators
Indicators can be classified in to environmental performance indicators (EPI) and

environmental condition indicators (ECI). The EPIs can be further divided into two
categories i.e., operational performance indicators and management performance
indicators.
The operational performance indicators are related to the process and other operational
activities of the organization, these would typically address the issue of raw material
consumption, energy consumption, water consumption in the organization, the quantities
of wastewater generated, other solid wastes generated, emission from the organization
etc.
Management performance indicators are related to the management efforts to influence

the environmental performance of the organizations operations.
The environmental condition indicators provide information about the environment.

These indicators provide information about the local, regional, national or global
condition of the environment. This information helps the organization to understand the
environmental impacts of its activities and thus helps in taking decisions to improve the
environmental performance.

2-4
Indicators basically used to evaluate environmental performance against the set standards
and thus indicate the direction in which to proceed. Selection of type of indicators for a
firm or project depends upon its relevance, clarity and realistic cost of collection and its
development.
2.3.2 Tools for action
2.3.2.1 Environmental policy
An environmental policy is a statement of the organization’s overall aim and principles of

action w.r.t the environment, including compliance with all relevant regulatory
requirements. It is a key tool in communicating the environmental priorities of the
organizations to all its employees. To ensure organization’s commitment towards a
formulated environmental policy, it is essential for the top management to be involved in
the process of formulating the policy and setting priorities. Therefore, the first step is to
get the commitment from the higher levels of management. The organization should then
conduct an initial environmental review and draft an environmental policy. This draft
should be discussed and approved by the board of directors and finally the approved
environmental policy statement must be communicated internally among all its
employees and must also be made available to the public.
2.3.2.2 Market-based economic instruments
Market based instruments are regulations that encourage behavior through market signals
rather than through explicit directives regarding pollution control levels. These policy
instruments such as tradable permits pollution charge are often described as harnessing
market forces. Market based instruments can be categorized into the following four
major categories which are discussed below.
Pollution charge: Charge system will assess a fee or tax on the amount of pollution a
firm or source generates. It is worthwhile for the firm to reduce emissions to the
point, where its marginal abatement costs is equal to the tax rate. Thus firms control
pollution to different degrees i.e. High cost controllers – less; low-cost controllers-
more. The charge system encourages the industries to further reduce the pollutants.
The collected charges can form a fund for restoration of the environment. Another
form of pollution charge is a deposit refund system, where, consumers pay a
surcharge when purchasing a potentially polluting product, and receive a refund on
return of the product after useful life span at appropriate centers. The concept of
extended producers’ responsibility brought in to avoid accumulation of dangerous
products in the environment.
Tradable permits: Under this system, firms that achieve the emission levels below
their allotted level may sell the surplus permits. Similarly, the firms, which are
required to spend more to attain the required degree of treatment/allotted levels, can
purchase permits from others at lower costs and may be benefited.
Market barrier reductions: Three known market barrier reduction types are as
follows:
– Market Creation: Measures that facilitate the voluntary exchange of water rights
and thus promote more efficient allocation of scarce water supplies.
– Liability Concerns: Encourage firms to consider potential environmental damages
of their decisions

2-5
– Information Programmes: Eco-labeling and energy- efficiency product labeling

requirements
Government subsidy reduction: Subsidies are the mirror images of taxes and, in
theory, can provide incentive to address environmental problems. However, it has
been reported that the subsidies encourage economically inefficient and
environmentally unsound practices, and often leads to market distortions due to
differences in the area. However, these are important to sustain the expansion of
production, in the national interests. In such cases, the subsidy may be comparable to
the net social benefit.
2.3.2.3 Innovative funding mechanism
There are many forums under which the fund is made available for the issues which are of
global/regional concern (GEF, OECD, Deutch green fund, etc.) i.e., climate change, Basal
convention and further fund sources are being explored for the Persistent Organic
Pollutants Convention. Besides the global funding mechanism, there needs to be
localized alternative mechanism for boosting the investment in environmental pollution
control. For example, in India the Government has established mechanism to fund the
common effluent treatment plants, which are essential specifically serving the small and
medium scale enterprises i.e., 25% share by the State Government, matching grants from
the Central Government and surety for 25% soft loan. It means that the industries need to
invest only 25% initially, thus encouraging voluntary compliance.
There are some more options i.e., if the pollution tax/charge is imposed on the residual
pollution being caused by the industries, municipalities etc., fund will automatically be
generated, which in turn, can be utilized for funding the environmental improvement
programmes. The emerging concept of build-operate-transfer (BOT) is an encouraging
development, where there is a possibility to generate revenue by application of advanced
technologies. There are many opportunities which can be explored. However, what is
required is the paradigm shift and focused efforts.
2.3.2.4 EMS and ISO certification
EMS is that part of the overall management system which includes the organizational
structure, responsibilities, practices, procedures, process and resources for determining
and implementing the forms of overall aims, principles of action w.r.t the environment. It
encompasses the totality of organizational, administrative and policy provisions to be
taken by a firm to control its environmental influences. Common elements of an EMS are
the identification of the environmental impacts and legal obligations, the development of
a plan for management & improvement the assignment of the responsibilities and
monitoring of the performance.
2.3.2.5 Total environmental quality movement (TEQM)
Quality is regarded as
A product attribute that had to be set at an acceptable level and balanced against the
cost
Something delivered by technical systems engineered by experts rather than the
organization as a whole

2-6
Assured primarily through the findings and correction of mistakes at the end of the
production process
One expression of the total environment quality movement (TEQM) is a system of control
called Kaizen. The principles of Kaizen are
Goal must be continuous improvement of quality instead of acceptable quality

Responsibility of the quality shall be shared by all members of an organization
Efforts should be focused on improving the whole process and design of the products
With some modifications, TEQM approach can be applied in the improvement of
corporate environmental performance in both process and product areas.
2.3.2.6 Eco-labeling
It is known as the practice of supplying information on the environmental characteristics

of a product or service to the general public. These labeling schemes can be grouped in to
three types:
Type I: Multiple criteria base; third party (Govt. or non-commercial private

organizations) programme claims overall environmental preferability.
Type II: Specific attribute of a product; often issued by a company/industrial
association
Type III: Agreed set of indices; provides quantified information; self declaration
Among the above, Type I are more reliable because they are established by a third party
and considers the environmental impacts of a product from cradle to grave. However, the
labeling program will only be effective if linked with complementary program of
consumer education and up on restriction of umbrella claims by the producers.
2.3.2.7 Cleaner production
Cleaner production is one of the tools, which has lot of bearing on environmental
pollution control. It is also seen that the approach is changing with time i.e., dumping-to-
control-to-recycle-to-prevention. Promotion of cleaner production principles involve an
insight into the production process not only to get desired yield but also to optimize on
raw material consumption i.e., resource conservation and implications of the waste
treatment and disposal.
2.3.2.8 4-R concept
The concept endorses utilization of the wastes as a by-product to the extent possible i.e.,
Re-cycle, Recover, Reuse, Recharge. Recycling refers to using the wastes/by-products in
the process again as a raw material to maximize the production. Recovery refers to
engineering means such as solvent extraction, distillation, precipitation etc. to separate the
useful constituents of the wastes, so that these recovered materials can be used. Re-use
refers to the utilization of waste from one process as a raw material to other. Recharging
is an option in which the natural systems are used for renovation of waste for further use.

2-7
2.3.2.9 Eco-efficiency
The World Business Council on sustainable development (WBCSD) defines eco-

efficiency as “the delivery of competitively priced goods and services that satisfy human
needs and bring quality of life, while progressively reducing ecological impacts and
resource intensity throughout the life cycle, to a level at least in line with earth’s carrying
capacity”. The business implements the eco-efficiency on four levels i.e. optimized
processes, recycling of wastes, eco-innovation and new services. Fussler (1995) defined
six dimensions of eco efficiency, which are given below to understand/examine the
system.
Mass: There is an opportunity to significantly reduce mass burdens (raw materials,

fuels, utilities consumed during the life cycle)
Reduce Energy Use: The opportunity is to redesign the product or its use to provide
significant energy savings
Reduce Environmental Toxins: This is concern to the environmental quality and
human health. The opportunity here is to significantly control the dispersion of toxic
elements.
Recycle when Practical: Designing for recyclibility is important
Working with Mother Nature: Materials are borrowed and returned to the nature
without negatively affecting the balance of the ecosystem.
Make it Last Longer: It relates to useful life and functions of products. Increasing
the functionality of products also increase their eco efficiency.
The competitiveness among the companies and long-term survival will continue and the
successful implementation of eco efficiency will contribute to their success. There is a
need to shift towards responsible consumerism equal to the efficiency gains made by
corporations – doing more with less.
2.3.2.10 Industrial ecosystem or metabolism
Eco-industrial development is a new paradigm for achieving excellence in business and

environmental performance. It opens-up innovative new avenues for managing business
and conducting economic development by creating linkages among local ’resources’,
including businesses, non-profit groups, governments, unions, educational institutions,
and communities can creatively foster the dynamic and responsible growth. Antiquated
business strategies based on isolated enterprises are no longer responsive enough to
market, environmental and community requirements.
Sustainable eco-industrial development looks systematically at development, business and

environment attempting to stretch the boundaries of current practice on - one level, it is as
directly practical as making he right connections between the wastes and resources
needed for production and at the other level it is a whole new way of thinking about doing
business and interacting with communities. At a most basic level, it is each organization
seeking higher performance within it self. However, most eco-industrial activity is
moving to a new level by increasing the inter connections between the companies.
Strategic partnership networked manufacturing and performed supplier arrangements are

all the examples of ways used by the businesses to ensure growth, contain costs and to
reach out for new opportunities.

2-8
For most businesses, the two essentials for success are the responsive markets and access
to cost-effective, quality resources for producing products or delivering services. In
absence of these two factors, virtually, every other incentive becomes a minor
consideration.
Transportation issues are important at two levels, the ability to get goods to market in an
expeditious way is essential to success in this day of just in time inventories. The use of
least impact transportation with due consideration of speed and cost supports business
success and addresses concerned in the community.
Eco-industrial development works because it consciously mixes a range of targeted

strategies shaped to the contours of the local community, most importantly, it works
because the communities wants nothing less than the best possible in or near their
neighborhoods. For companies, it provides a path towards significantly higher operating
results and positive market presence. For our environment, it provides great hope that the
waste will be transformed in to valued product and that the stewardship will be a joint
pledge of both businesses and communities.
2.3.2.11 Voluntary agreements
Voluntary environmental agreements among the industries, government, public

representatives, NGOs and other concerned towards attaining certain future demands of
the environment are reported to be successful. Such agreements may be used as a tool
where Government would like to make the standards stringent in future (phase-wise-
stringent). These may be used when conditions are temporary and requires replacing
timely. Also these may be used as supplementary/ complimentary in implementation of
the regulation. The agreements may include:
Target objectives (emission limit values/standards)

Performance objectives (operating procedures)
R&D activities – Government and industry may have agreement to establish better
control technologies.
Monitoring & reporting of the agreement conditions by other agents (NGOs, public
participants, civil Authority etc.)
In India, the MoEF, has organized such programme, popularly known as the corporate
responsibility for environment protection (CREP) considering identified 17 categories of
high potential industrial sectors. Publication in this regard is available with Central
Pollution Control Board (CPCB).
2.3.3 Tools for communication
2.3.3.1 State of environment
The Government of India brought out the state of environment report for entire country
and similar reports available for many of the states. These reports are published at regular
intervals to record trends and to identify the required interventions at various levels.
These reports consider the internationally accepted DPSIR framework for the presentation
of the information. DPSIR refers to
¾ D – Driving forces – causes of concern i.e. industries, transportation etc.

¾ P – Pressures – pollutants emanating from driving forces i.e. emission

2-9
¾ S – State – quality of environment i.e. air, water & soil quality

¾ I – Impact – Impact on health, eco-system, materials, biodiversity, economic damage
etc.
¾ R – Responses – action for cleaner production, policies (including
standards/guidelines), targets etc.
Environment reports including the above elements gives a comprehensive picture of

specific target area in order to take appropriate measures for improvement. Such reports
capture the concerns, which could be considered in EIAs.
2.3.3.2 Corporate environmental reporting
Corporate environmental reports (CER) are only one form of environmental reporting
defined as publicly available, stand alone reports, issued voluntarily by the industries on
their environmental activities (Borphy and Starkey-1996). CER is a means to
environmental improvement and greater accountability, not an end in itself.
Three categories of environmental disclosure are:
Involuntary Disclosure: Without its permission and against it will (env. Campaign,
press etc.)
Mandatory Disclosure: As required by law
Voluntary Disclosure: The disclosure of information on a voluntary basis
2.4 Objectives of EIA
Objectives of EIA include the following:
¾ To ensure environmental considerations are explicitly addressed and incorporated

into the development decision-making process;
¾ To anticipate and avoid, minimize or offset the adverse significant biophysical, social
and other relevant effects of development proposals;
¾ To protect the productivity and capacity of natural systems and the ecological
processes which maintain their functions; and
¾ To promote development that is sustainable and optimizes resource use and
management opportunities.
2.5 Types of EIA
Environmental assessments could be classified into four types i.e. strategic environmental
assessment, regional EIA, sectoral EIA and project level EIA. These are precisely
discussed below:
Strategic environmental assessment
Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) refers to systematic analysis of the

environmental effects of development policies, plans, programmes and other proposed
strategic actions. SEA represents a proactive approach to integrate environmental
considerations into the higher levels of decision-making – beyond the project level, when
major alternatives are still open.

2-10
Regional EIA
EIA in the context of regional planning integrates environmental concerns into

development planning for a geographic region, normally at the sub-country level. Such
an approach is referred to as the economic-cum-environmental (EcE) development
planning (Asian Development Bank, 1993a). This approach facilitates adequate
integration of economic development with management of renewable natural resources
within the carrying capacity limitation to achieve sustainable development. It fulfils the
need for macro-level environmental integration, which the project-oriented EIA is unable
to address effectively. Regional EIA addresses the environmental impacts of regional
development plans and thus, the context for project-level EIA of the subsequent projects,
within the region. In addition, if environmental effects are considered at regional level,
then cumulative environmental effects of all the projects within the region can be
accounted.
Sectoral EIA
Instead of project-level-EIA, an EIA should take place in the context of regional and
sectoral level planning. Once sectoral level development plans have the integrated
sectoral environmental concerns addressed, the scope of project-level EIA will be quite
minimal. Sectoral EIA will helps in addressing specific environmental problems that may
be encountered in planning and implementing sectoral development projects.
Project level EIA
Project level EIA refers to the developmental activity in isolation and the impacts that it
exerts on the receiving environment. Thus, it may not effectively integrate the cumulative
effects of the development in a region.
From the above discussion, it is clear that EIA shall be integrated at all the levels i.e.
strategic, regional, sectoral and the project level. Whereas, the strategic EIA is a
structural change in the way the things are evaluated for decision-making, the regional
EIA refers to substantial information processing and drawing complex inferences. The
project-level EIA is relatively simple and reaches to meaningful conclusions. Therefore
in India, largely, the project-level EIA studies are taking place and are being considered.
However, in the re-engineered Notification, provisions have been incorporated for giving
a single clearance for the entire IE for e.g., Leather parks, pharma cities etc., which is a
step towards the regional approach.
As we progress and the resource planning concepts emerge in our decision-making

process, the integration of overall regional issues will become part of the impact
assessment studies.
2.6 Basic EIA Principles
By integrating the environmental impacts of the development activities and their

mitigation early in the project planning cycle, the benefits of EIA could be realized in all
stages of a project, from exploration and planning, through construction, operations,
decommissioning, and beyond site closure.
A properly-conducted-EIA also lessens conflicts by promoting community participation,

informing decision makers, and also helps in laying the base for environmentally sound

2-11
projects. An EIA should meet at least three core values (EIA Training Resource Manual,
UNEP 2002):
Integrity: The EIA process should be fair, objective, unbiased and balanced
Utility: The EIA process should provide balanced, credible information for decision-
making
Sustainability: The EIA process should result in environmental safeguards
Ideally an EIA process should be:
Purposive- should inform decision makers and result in appropriate levels of

environmental protection and community well-being.
Rigorous- should apply ‘best practicable’ science, employing methodologies and
techniques appropriate to address the problems being investigated.
Practical- should result in providing information and acceptable and implementable
solutions for problems faced by proponents.
Relevant- should provide sufficient, reliable and usable information for development
planning and decision making.
Cost-effective- should impose the minimum cost burdens in terms of time and finance
on proponents and participants consistent with meeting accepted requirements and
objectives of EIA.
Efficient-. should achieve the objectives of EIA within the limits of available
information, time, resources and methodology.
Focused- should concentrate on significant environmental effects and key issues; i.e.,
the matters that need to be taken into account in making decisions.
Adaptive- should be adjusted to the realities, issues and circumstances of the
proposals under review without compromising the integrity of the process, and be
iterative, incorporating lessons learned throughout the project life cycle.
Participative- should provide appropriate opportunities to inform and involve the
interested and affected publics, and their inputs and concerns should be addressed
explicitly in the documentation and decision making.
Inter-disciplinary- should ensure that the appropriate techniques and experts in the
relevant bio-physical and socio-economic disciplines are employed, including use of
traditional knowledge as relevant.
Credible- should be carried out with professionalism, rigor, fairness, objectivity,
impartiality and balance, and be subject to independent checks and verification.
Integrated- should address the interrelationships of social, economic and biophysical
aspects.
Transparent- should have clear, easily understood requirements for EIA content;
ensure public access to information; identify the factors that are to be taken into
account in decision making; and acknowledge limitations and difficulties.
Systematic- should result in full consideration of all relevant information on the
affected environment, of proposed alternatives and their impacts, and of the measures
necessary to monitor and investigate residual effects.

2-12
2.7 Project Cycle
The generic project cycle including that of the IEs has six main stages:
1. Project concept
2. Pre-feasibility
3. Feasibility
4. Design and engineering
5. Implementation
6. Monitoring and evaluation
It is important to consider the environmental factors on an equal basis with technical and
economic factors throughout the project planning, assessment and implementation phases.
EIA should be introduced at the earliest in the project cycle and must be an integral part
of the project pre-feasibility and feasibility stage. If the EIA considerations are given due
respect in the site selection process by the project proponent, the subsequent stages of the
clearance process would get simplified and would also facilitate easy compliance to the
mitigation measures throughout the project life cycle.
A project’s feasibility study should include a detailed assessment of significant impacts,

the prediction and quantification of impacts and delineation of Environmental
Management Plan (EMP). Findings of the EIA study should preferably be incorporated in
the project design stage so that the project as well as the site alternatives is studied and
necessary changes, if required, are incorporated in the project design stage. This practice
will also help the management in assessing the negative impacts and in designing cost-
effective remedial measures. In general, EIA enhances the project quality and improves
the project planning process.
2.8 Environmental Impacts
Environmental impacts resulting from proposed actions can be grouped into following
categories:
Beneficial or detrimental
Naturally reversible or irreversible
Repairable via management practices or irreparable
Short term or long term
Temporary or continuous
Occurring during construction phase or operational phase
Local, regional, national or global
Accidental or planned (recognized before hand)
Direct (primary) or Indirect (secondary)
Cumulative or single
The category of impact as stated above, and the significance will facilitate the Expert
Appraisal Committee (EAC)/State Level EAC (SEAC) to take a look at the ToR for EIA
studies, as well as, in decision making process about the developmental activity.

2-13
Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts

The nature of impacts could fall within three broad classifications namely direct, indirect
and cumulative, based on the characteristics of impacts. The assessment of direct, indirect
and cumulative impacts should not be considered in isolation or considered as separate
stages in the EIA. Ideally, the assessment of such impacts should form an integral part of
all stages of the EIA. The TGM does not recommend a single method to assess the types
of impacts, but suggests a practical framework/ approach that can be adapted and
combined to suit a particular project and the nature of impacts.
2.8.1 Direct impacts
Direct impacts occur through direct interaction of an activity with an environmental,

social, or economic component. For example, a discharge of any industry or an effluent
from the Effluent Treatment Plant (ETP) into a river may lead to a decline in water
quality in terms of high biological oxygen demand (BOD) or dissolved oxygen (DO) or
rise of water toxins.
2.8.2 Indirect impacts
Indirect impacts on the environment are those which are not a direct result of the project,
often produced away from or as a result of a complex impact pathway. The indirect
impacts are also known as secondary or even tertiary level impacts. For example,
secondary indirect impacts may also affect on aquatic flora in that water body and may
further cause reduction in fish population. Reduction in fishing harvests, affecting the
incomes of fishermen is a third level impact. Such impacts are characterized as socio-
economic (third level) impacts. The indirect impacts may also include growth-inducing
impacts and other effects related to induced changes to the pattern of land use or
additional road network, population density or growth rate. In the process, air, water and
other natural systems including the ecosystem may also be affected.

2-14
2.8.3 Cumulative impacts
Cumulative impact consists of an impact that is created as a result of the combination of

the project evaluated in the EIA together with other projects in the same vicinity, causing
related impacts. These impacts occur when the incremental impact of the project is
combined with the cumulative effects of other past, present and reasonably foreseeable
future projects. Figure 2-3 depicts the same. Respective EAC may exercise their
discretion on a case-by-case basis for considering the cumulative impacts.
Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact
2.8.4 Induced impact
The cumulative impacts can be due to induced actions of projects and activities that may
occur if the action under assessment is implemented such as growth-inducing impacts and
other effects related to induced changes to the pattern of future land use or additional road
network, population density or growth rate (e.g., excess growth may be induced in the
zone of influence around the project site, and in the process causing additional effects on
air, water and other natural ecosystems). Induced actions may not be officially
announced or be part of any official plan. Increase in workforce and nearby communities
contributes to this effect.
They usually have no direct relationship with the action under assessment, and represent
the growth-inducing potential of an action. New roads leading from those constructed for
a project, increased recreational activities (e.g., hunting, fishing), and construction of new
service facilities are examples of induced actions.
However, the cumulative impacts due to induced development or third level or even
secondary indirect impacts are difficult to be quantified. Because of higher levels of
uncertainties, these impacts cannot normally be assessed over a long time horizon. An
EIA practitioner usually can only guess as to what such induced impacts may be and the
possible extent of their implications on the environmental factors. Respective EAC may
exercise their discretion on a case-by-case basis for considering the induced impacts.
2.9 Significance of Impacts
This TGM establishes the significance of impacts first and proceeds to delineate the
associated mitigations and measures. So the significance here reflects the “worst-case
scenario” before mitigation is applied, and therefore provides an understanding of what
may happen if mitigation fails or is not as effective as predicted. For establishing
significance of different impacts, understanding the responses and interaction of the
environmental system is essential. Hence, the impact interactions and pathways are to be

2-15
understood and established first. Such an understanding will help in the assessment
process to quantify the impact as accurately as possible. Complex interactions,
particularly in the case of certain indirect or cumulative impacts, may give rise to non-
linear responses which are often difficult to understand and therefore their significance
difficult to assess. It is hence understood that indirect or cumulative impacts are more
complex than the direct impacts and most often currently the impact assessments are
limited to direct impacts. In case mitigation measures are delineated before determining
significance of the effect, the significance represents the residual effects.
However, the ultimate objective of an EIA is to achieve sustainable development. The

development process shall invariably cause some residual impacts even after
implementing an EMP effectively. Environmentalists today are faced with a vital, not-
easy-to-answer question—“What is the tolerable level of environmental impact within the
sustainable development framework?”. As such, it has been recognized that every
ecosystem has a threshold for absorbing deterioration and a certain capacity for self-
regeneration. These thresholds based on concept of carrying capacity are as follows:
Waste emissions from a project should be within the assimilative capacity of the local
environment to absorb without unacceptable degradation of its future waste
absorptive capacity or other important services.
Harvest rates of renewable resource inputs should be within the regenerative capacity
of the natural system that generates them; depletion rates of non-renewable inputs
should be equal to the rate at which renewable substitutes are developed by human
invention and investment.
The aim of this model is to curb over-consumption and unacceptable environmental
degradation. But because of limitation in available scientific basis, this definition
provides only general guidelines for determining the sustainable use of inputs and
outputs. To establish, the level of significance for each identified impact, a three-stage
analysis may be referred:
First, an impact is qualified as being either negative or positive.

Second, the nature of impacts such as direct, indirect, or cumulative is determined
using the impact network
Third, a scale is used to determine the severity of the effect; for example, an impact is
of low, medium, or high significance.
It is not sufficient to simply state the significance of the effect. This determination must
be justified, coherent and documented, notably by a determination methodology, which
must be described in the methodology section of the report. There are many recognized
methodologies to determine the significance of effects.
2.9.1 Criteria/methodology to determine the significance of the identified

impacts
The criteria can be determined by answering some questions regarding the factors
affecting the significance. This will help the EIA stake-holders, the practitioner in
particular, to determine the significance of the identified impacts eventually. Typical
examples of such factors (one approach reported by Duval and Vonk 1994) include the
following:

2-16
Exceedance of a Threshold: Significance may increase if a threshold is exceeded. e.g.,

Emissions of PM10 exceed the permissible threshold.
Effectiveness of Mitigation: Significance may increase as the effectiveness of
mitigation measures decreases. e.g., control technologies, which may not assure
consistent compliance to the requirements.
Size of Study Area: Significance may increase as the zone of effects increases.
Incremental Contribution of Effects from Action Under Review: Significance may
increase as the relative contribution of an action increases.
Relative Contribution of Effects of Other Actions: Significance may decrease as the
significance of nearby larger actions increase.
Relative Rarity of Species: Significance may increase as a species becomes
increasingly rare or threatened.
Significance of Local Effects: Significance may increase as the significance of local
effects is high.
Magnitude of Change Relative to Natural Background Variability: Significance may
decrease if effects are within natural assimilative capacity or variability.
Creation of Induced Actions: Significance may increase as a induced activities also
highly significant and
Degree of Existing Disturbance: Significance may increase if the surrounding
environment is pristine:
For determining significance of impacts, it is important to remember that secondary and
higher order effects can also occur as a result of a primary interaction between a project
activity and the local environment. Wherever a primary effect is identified, the
practitioner should always think if secondary or tertiary effects on other aspects of the
environment could also arise.
The EIA should also consider the effects that could arise from the project due to induced
developments, which take place as a consequence of the project. Ex. Population density
and associated infrastructure and jobs for people attracted to the area by the project. It
also requires consideration of cumulative effects that could arise from a combination of
the effects due to other projects with those of other existing or planned developments in
the surrounding area. So the necessity to formulate a qualitative checklist is suggested to
test significance, in general.

2-17
3.
INDUSTRIAL ESTATES
3.1 Introduction
Industrial Estate (IE) Programme in India started in 1952 with the establishment of first
estate at Hadapsar in Maharashtra. The main objective of the programme is to encourage
and support the creation, expansion and modernization of small-scale industries (SSI)
through the provision of factory accommodation, common service facilities and assistance
and servicing through all stages of establishment and operation as well as developing sub-
contracting relationships within the small-scale and large-scale industries and specialized
manufacturing activities.
Subsequently, the programme has also assumed the role of regional development through
provision of built-in factory accommodation with the requisite facilities and services in
semi-urban, rural and backward areas.
For the purpose of EIA Notification, all the industrial estates/parks/complexes/area,

export processing Zones (EPZs), Special Economic Zones (SEZs), Biotech Parks, Leather
Complexes will be treated at par as ‘Industrial Estates’.
3.1.1 IE planning approach in India
The Ministry of Industry at both central and state level is responsible for industrial
planning and development. The role of the Central Government in the establishment of
IEs in India has been mainly that of laying down the guidelines for the State
Governments, coordination, review and monitoring of the IE development programmes.
In addition, sector-specific ministries for steel, petroleum, chemicals, textiles, mines, etc.,
were established in order to diversify and relegate policy and planning processes. The
Commerce & Industries department at the State government level is responsible for
establishment of industrial growth centers, IE and EPZs. The department also makes
decisions regarding the license grants, land, power, finance and all related concessions.
For the establishment of IEs the selection of sites for their location, development of the
industrial areas, and provision of requisite infrastructural facilities lie within the
jurisdiction of the State Government. In addition, states also have State Industrial
Development Corporations (SIDCs), which create quality infrastructure, modernize
existing infrastructure and develop partnerships with industry. It offers attractive fiscal
incentives and invites private investments in infrastructure thrust sectors. The main
purposes of developing these SIDCs are:
to check the scattered growth of the industrial activity.

to encourage the industrial growth within geographical locations centrally linked by
transport, communication, water and power supply.
to confine the industrial activities in restricted areas in order to ensure the industrial
growth in an environmental-friendly manner.
to provide help to delimit social hazards caused by the industrial groups.

3-18
Industrial Estates
The existing linkages between various agencies for planning and establishment of IE are
highlighted in the following Figure 3-1.
Figure 3-1: IE Planning Approach in India
Central pollution control board (CPCB)
CPCB’s Zoning Atlas for siting of industries program aims to support and simplify
decision-making process on siting of industries based on environmental considerations.
This is an attempt to identify suitable areas district-wise for planned industrial
development in various states. Using the Zoning Atlas, can identify environmentally
sound sites for setting up an IE. These sites can be reviewed from economic
considerations such as the availability of raw materials, transportation network, water
supply, electricity, waste disposal facilities, etc., to identify the probable sites for which
detailed micro-level investigations can be carried out to select the final sites (GIS
Institute, 2002).
State industrial development corporation (SIDC)
SIDC identifies the potential sites for industrial development. The industrial sites are
selected mainly on the basis of socio-economic considerations in accordance with the
regional/state master plan. SIDCs approach the development authorities for Notification
of the proposed sites for land use conversion. SIDC also monitors the development of IEs
within the stipulated timeframe in order to prevent artificial escalation in land prices.
Development authorities (DA)
The DA plans the physical and infrastructural development of an IE. In many regions
instead of the SIDCs, DA identifies the sites as well. The DA also notifies the land use
conversion once the site is selected. There are other institutions and government agencies
that have started addressing various aspects of IE planning but the attempts are in
isolation.
The initiatives to be taken by the concerned agencies at each stage are elaborated below:

3-19
Industrial Estates
Identification of Site: In addition to assessment of availability of raw materials,

infrastructure and the market potential, SlDCs and DA with inputs from the pollution
control boards (PCBs) assess the environmental risks to the exposed population and
the natural surroundings in terms of impacts on air, water and land. EIA studies will
identify the potential impacts associated with the site, in order to choose the most
appropriate site.
Planning and Establishment: The SIDCs and DA will identify the alternative sites
and control the land use in the region and within industrial complexes. Detailed
master plan for the IE may be prepared indicating the phases of development and also
in defining the land use pattern for the surrounding buffer zone. This would ensure
controlled development in future.
Operation and Maintenance (O&M): In order to ensure efficient and environment-
friendly O&M of the IE, the Industry Associations may take the overall responsibility
for the management of IE. The Industry Associations may accordingly be
empowered to take action against individual erring facilities. By virtue of this, these
associations would be in a position to promote adoption of cleaner technologies more
effectively.
3.1.2 Concept of managed/serviced work space (Industrial estates/parks/

complexes/areas, EPZs, SEZs, biotech parks, leather complexes)
An IE can be defined as a tract of land developed and sub-divided into plots according to
a comprehensive plan with provision for roads, transport and public utilities with or
without built-up (advance) factories, sometimes with common facilities and sometimes
without them, for the use of a group of industrialists.
The comprehensive plan here refers not only to the physical planning of the estate, but
also to its immediate economic and social environment, and the role assigned to it in the
regional or urban development plan. The common facilities mentioned may be needed to
improve the productivity of tenant enterprises, to provide technical and non-technical
services to clients, or to upgrade the social infrastructure and amenities in the area. While
selecting and developing an IE, state/regional/urban/local level requirements are to be
considered.
3.1.3 Advantages of IE
The following are some of the identified advantages of an IE.
Firms benefit from economies of scale in terms of land development, construction,

and common facilities.
IEs offer managed/serviced workspace: workshops (or plots on which to build these)
with collective access to utilities, roads and telecommunications. Other common
facilities which may be available include waste collection and effluent treatment; tool
rooms; testing, quality control and heat treatment; and security services.
Some IEs have technical libraries, recreation areas and housing for workers. Such
facilities are particularly effective if firms are engaged in similar activities; IEs,
however, usually have a mixture of industries.
Close proximity may encourage cooperation among firms in an IE.
IEs may not be necessarily used on a permanent basis. They may also serve as an
incubator or nursery, a temporary start-up facility for new firms.

3-20
Industrial Estates
The provision of common facilities, including centralized/common effluent treatment,

pollution prevention and energy conservation measures, can be of particular value to
small and medium scale enterprises (SMEs), which often cannot afford these on an
individual basis. This is one way in which the IEs can make a contribution to
equitable and sustainable development.
Well-planned and equipped IEs stimulate the relocation of industries to peri-urban or
rural areas, helping to relieve congestion and pollution in metropolitan areas,
strengthen the industrial base of small and medium-size towns and arrest rural-urban
migration.
Well-planned IE helps in reduction of commuter traffic, increased efficiency of urban
land use, and reduced costs of land development and the provision of utilities, etc.
3.1.4 The developmental context
The issue of regional and local development has become increasingly important in recent
years. With the administrative decentralization, the focus of public-sector efforts to
stimulate development has shifted to the local level and competition among localities has
acquired a global character. As the traditional rural occupations no longer provide an
adequate living, the better-educated rural youth is moving out to the urban areas leading
to social disarray and congestion in metropolitan areas. IEs can be instrumental for the
local authorities and business associations to tackle the above mentioned issues and
stimulate local development, if they are part of an overall development strategy.
However, the local regulations and legislations that have a specific impact on the IEs
(planning, environmental protection, land ownership) need to be transparent and
consistent in order to support the development.
Contributions of IEs to economic and industrial development
IEs serve:
To accelerate industrialization of the country

To increase national and local employment
To achieve a more balanced regional distribution of employment and production and
consequent balanced regional growth
To attract private investment both national and international
To promote the development of small domestic-owned industries
To bring industries and industrial employment to rural areas
To induce structural changes in production and employment; especially
diversification
To encourage more effective use of resources through the development of large-scale
industrial complexes, including diversified industries of all sizes, centered on major
projects such as ports, airports, railroad and highway junctions, power plants, oil
refineries. steel mills and chemical plants
To improve product quality and increase productivity
To train labour and increase its productivity
To achieve economies in investment in public infrastructure
To reduce the cost of capital investment to the industrialist

3-21
Industrial Estates
To eliminate delays for the industrialist in obtaining a suitable site utilities and
buildings
Contributions of IEs to urban and regional development
As part of urban and regional planning IEs serve:
To promote decentralization by preventing or checking excessive concentration in or

growth of single urban area especially large metropolitan areas.
To increase the economic productive and employment base of urban communities.
To regulate the inflow of industry and to guide its orderly location on the most
suitable land within the metropolitan area.
To strengthen the economic base of small and medium-sized towns
To provide a healthier and more attractive urban environment by separating non-
industrial and industrial areas
To minimize distance to work and to reduce load on the transport system
To maximize efficient land usage and reduce the cost of land and land development
To integrate urban marginal population into the productive industrial system
To provide sites to relocate industries displaced by urban renewal projects
To achieve economies in the provision of urban services and utilities
3.1.5 Types of IE
An IE may be classified according to the sponsorship, the location, or the function it

performs. The sub-divisions of the category are not mutually exclusive and estate may be
intended to fulfill more than one function. The broad classification basis include:
Location
Industrial activity
Motivation
Sponsorship or ownership
Promotional aspects
Various types of IEs are illustrated in Figure 3-2 and are discussed in Annexure I. This
classification may also help the proponent in selecting the IE type during the pre-project
surveys.

3-22
Industrial Estates
Figure 3-2: Various Types of IE
3.1.6 Various forms of IE
IE are referred in various forms in India, and include the following:
Industrial areas
Industrial zones
Growth centers
Export processing zones (EPZs)
Special economic zones (SEZs)
Science & Technology Parks (Biotechnology and Leather Parks)
Petroleum, chemical & petrochemical investment regions
Each form of IE is discussed with reference to its functions and intended purposes in
Annexure II.
India’s first EPZ was established in Kandla in 1965. As EPZs did not succeed as
expected, it was envisaged to convert the existing EPZs to SEZs. Various forms of EPZ
explaining the parameters such as physical characteristics, economic objectives, duty free
goods allowed, typical activities, incentives offered, etc are provided in Annexure II.
The difference between the Export Oriented Units and SEZs are explained in Annexure
III.
SEZs are governed exclusively by SEZ Acts and Notifications (SEZ Act 2005 and SEZ
Rules 2006).
Petroleum, Chemical and Petrochemical Investment Regions, a type of Homogeneous IE,

are the recently developed context of IEs, mainly concentrating on petroleum-based
industries.

3-23
Industrial Estates
3.1.7 Characteristics / Components of IEs
Types of IE accommodation
The accommodation, if any, provided by the IE sponsors depend to a great extent on what
they hope to achieve. There are five variations:
Custom-built factories are provided throughout, usually for a selected range of

industries based on locally arising materials
Standard and custom-built factories are erected, the latter to attract some special
industries
Standard factories of various sizes are provided throughout. This is the usual pattern
adopted for IEs intended to stimulate small-scale industry
The IE provides fully developed plots and a number of standard factories. IEs
intended to accommodate large and small-scale establishments are of this type
Only fully developed plots are provided. The lessee of a plot builds his own premises
in accordance with the IE building regulations. This has the great advantage of
minimizing the sponsors' investment and of allowing the development to be most
accurately phased to meet the demand for accommodation.
Common production facilities
Common production facilities may be considered as falling into two categories:
Separate units to provide special services to estate tenants

Equipment provided for use by estate tenants
The reasons for providing these facilities are:
To improve the quantity, or reduce the cost, of the production of a group of

entrepreneurs by making available the equipment that would be too expensive for the
resources, and be underutilized by, anyone of them
To conserve the capital of the small-scale industrialist
The first category might include a foundry, tool-and-dye, electroplating, machine or
carpentry shop, or a quality-control laboratory. They should be available if the facilities
they can provide are required in economic quantities and are not available from
commercial undertakings in or near the IE. Often, the number of IE tenants is not
sufficient for the service to be economical, and therefore they usually undertake work for
outside customers as well. Common facilities may also be used to train or to upgrade the
skill of workers. In such a case a loss on the operations may be acceptable, but it should
not be charged to the IE administration.
As with other services, common facilities should not be provided in absence of accurate
information on the tenants' needs.
The second category consists of machines and machine tools to enable the entrepreneur to
improve the quality and quantity of output, or to eliminate operations previously carried
out by hand. They should not be tools or machines that are a basic prerequisite to the
industrial activity in question. The tools may be fixed or portable. For example, every
joinery shop, except perhaps one at handicraft level, has an overhand planner, but very

3-24
Industrial Estates
few of the small-scale units have the equipment to sharpen the cutters. Blunt tools result
in lower production and unsatisfactory work, but a cutter grinder is expensive, and only in
a large establishment could it be used to full capacity. Arrangements sometimes are made
for tenants to hire portable tools - electric drills, compressors, pneumatic tools, lifting
gear and the like - from the IE administration. Small-scale entrepreneurs find this facility
particularly valuable.
Common service facilities
Common service facilities and the amenities found in an IE are listed below. Each is
discussed in Annexure IV.
Fire protection
Security
Collection and disposal of waste
Medical care
Common temporary storage for hazardous waste
Bank, post office, etc
Weigh bridge
Exhibition halls
Repair workshops
Green belt/cover
Stormwater, etc.
Some are essential in all IEs while others may be desirable. Few others in the list are
necessary only in special circumstances. Sometimes training, technical, managerial and
advisory services are included under this category.
Amenities
A communal canteen is a common feature in an IE. The premises are provided by the
IE administration and the catering by a contractor. There is no need to provide shops
on an IE; very few, if any, IEs have them.
A crèche is necessary if a large number of women with small children are employed.
A children's playground should not be built within an IE. The place for it is in the
housing area, if any, near the IE.
A bus terminal in the usual sense of the term is not necessary. All that may be
required is a paved area for four or five buses in a position that does not obstruct the
IE traffic. Whether even that is necessary depends on the public transport
arrangements. If a service passes the entrance to the IE, the matter can be left to the
transport Authority.
A meeting hall may be desirable, but it is hardly a necessity for very small estates.
A few IEs have technical libraries. Probably their most important function is to make
available the trade journals. Even if a formal library is not envisaged, space should
be reserved in the administration building for the filing, display and perusal of
technical periodicals.
The most important amenity that can be provided by an estate administration is the
workers' housing. Unless an IE is within six or seven km of an urban or dormitory
area, it may be necessary to build accommodation for the labour. If a housing scheme
for IE workers is envisaged, it is not sufficient to provide just the dwellings. Stores,

3-25
Industrial Estates
schools, recreational and religious facilities are also required. It is important that the
accommodation is made available within the affordable price range for the workers,
and that if the premises are not let in for rent, there should be hire-purchase
arrangements. Above all, the housing must be reserved for IE workers.
3.2 IE Site Identification, Planning, Development and Management
Economic development in developing countries is essentially taking place through IE,

where many of these SMEs are gathered together. The regional agglomeration of SMEs
in IE facilitates in providing a good opportunity for Eco-Industrial Networks. The
objective of integrated approach towards development of ecologically sustainable IE
should be to minimize the risks during the following critical stages of establishment and
management:
Site identification,
Planning,
Development and
Management
Each stage-specific activities are illustrated in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3: Stages in IE Establishment and Management

3-26
Industrial Estates
The various tools and techniques that can be used for the IE Planning are illustrated in
Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4: Tools and Techniques for IE Planning
3.2.1 Steps involved in identification of site
The overall objective of IE planning is to identify sites for IEs and plan industrial
development in compatibility with the surrounding land uses in a sustainable manner.
The various steps involved in the identification of a suitable site for IE include:
Identification of a search area where suitable sites for developing IEs for polluting
industries might be found
Detailing environmental sensitivity of the search area and its surroundings;
Avoiding areas which are attached with the sensitivity (please refer Annexure V)
Assessing the siting potential of the search areas by identifying suitable sties for IEs
(so called "candidate sites")
Identification of types of industries that can be allowed in these IEs after assessing the
pollution risks from those industries and the environmental impact risks by predicting
the amount and spatial extent of adverse impacts
Recommending necessary effluent treatment and waste disposal facilities and other
needed abatement infrastructure needed to be commonly used by all industries of the
IE
Providing appropriate buffer zones around the IEs
Recommending landuse controls around the IEs for controlling and minimizing
adverse environmental impacts; and

3-27
Industrial Estates
Identifying the social impacts of developing an IE at an identified site and

recommend methods of mitigation or compensation, if needed
3.2.1.1 Site analysis
Identification of suitable site for IE is based on various considerations. Approach for

assessment of site suitability of identified Candidate sites is shown in Figure 3-5 below.
Figure 3-5: Site Suitability Approach for Candidate Sites

The guidance for identification of suitable sites and industries are given in Annexure V.
3.2.2 Site planning and development
Site planning within the IE demands a holistic approach for its sustainability which
includes the effective components of spatial planning, infrastructure planning, risk based
planning and environmental management tools, resource utilization and management,
social infrastructure planning, etc. The master site plan for the IEs shall include the
following important aspects.
Long term vision with focus on international competitiveness

3-28
Industrial Estates
Focus on integrated infrastructure with emphasis on environmental management

utilities
Optimal utilization of available land
Conservation of important natural features
Optimal use of natural resources
Explore synergies of co-existence
Use of renewable energy sources
Energy conservation measures
Traffic management including public transport
Disaster management
Inclusion of social infrastructure like housing and allied requirements
Integration of operation and management aspects
3.2.2.1 Site Master Planning
The development costs and the construction of an IE are heavily influenced by:
The size of the site

The shape of the site
Its load-bearing capacity
The location of the site in relation to physical services
Another very important consideration is the potential demand for space over time,
together with details of the type of demand, the type of industry which may be expected,
the plot sizes likely to be demanded, the standard of design and layout, factory density,
and an estimate of the required support facilities. Are investors likely to seek pre-built
factory buildings or plots on which they can build their own? Should the estate cater for
different types of industry? Demand for water, sewerage, electricity and
telecommunications varies considerably with activities, and some estimate of the need for
these services is required for the physical planning process.
Proper phasing of development in line with demand is a very important consideration in

an IE programme. Changing economic conditions may require that the IE be expanded
beyond the site originally reserved for development. Holding extra land in reserve is one
solution, but will involve additional expenditure unless the land can be used for
agricultural purposes.
A. Size of the site
Large sites can create congestion and transportation problems, and may be an obstacle to
decentralized development, if this is a policy priority. Smaller sites can be
disproportionally expensive to develop, although there are some very successful public
and private sector IEs specifically due to the presence of comparatively high value-added
activities requiring limited amounts of space.

3-29
Industrial Estates
B. Site specifications
The ideal site for an IE for light and medium industry should have:
A gentle slope for drainage

Good ground bearing conditions for foundations
Good access by main road to the city, port, and airport
An adequate water supply
Reliable electricity supply and telecommunications facilities
Adequate storm water drainage network
Facilities for treating industrial effluent and a means of disposing of the effluent after
treatment. A satisfactory method of disposing of solid waste is also needed.
C. Site design and layout
Industrial sites should be designed and laid out to suit the requirements of industry.
Industries in an IE differ among regions, and each industry has particular design and
layout requirements. The type of industry likely to be attracted to a certain IE is therefore
an important factor in determining design and layout.
As a general rule, about one-third of the site is devoted to public areas including roads,
administration buildings and green areas. The remaining two-thirds are available for
industrial buildings. Normally about half the site is built over, thus one-third of the estate
when fully developed is covered with commercial or industrial buildings.
The Physical concept of planning within the IEs consists of the processing areas and the
non-processing areas with proper linkages between them. The processing area will be
well demarcated from the non processing areas by definite constructed boundary wall
with barbed wire fencing. The processing area shall be managed with restricted entry and
exit options with proper security management.
The Non-processing areas include residential areas, business complexes, hospitals, hotels,
educational institutions, recreation and entertainment areas, etc.
The processing areas shall include the common facilities supporting the industrial
processes like waste management plants, temporary storage units, etc.
Within the processing areas, grouping of industries based on their pollution potential
(reference CPCB classification) will enable fair understanding to the order of magnitude
of impacts. The ecological aspects such as protection of recharge zones, greening, use of
non-conventional energy, etc. will determine the suitable location for siting within the IE.
Similarly, size of blocks/plots, entries/exits, are designed considering disaster
management requirements, traffic and transportation aspects, utility networks, common
facilities, etc.
If the IE is designed for terraced buildings rather than industrial plots, a higher percentage
may be covered over with buildings.
If the potential investors are what might be termed as ‘prestige investors’ , such as
transnational electronics or medical equipment manufacturers, a low-density layout with
very high standards of landscaping and appearance may be necessary. For small

3-30
Industrial Estates
manufacturers who are very cost conscious, a higher-density building design, possibly
using terraced factories or even simple sheds, would be more suitable.
Roadways
Roadways must be designed in outline at the preliminary stage, as their widths will
determine the site layout and, together with their carrying capacity, the costs. Obviously,
the roads should be adequate for the estimated traffic flow and provide against congestion
between the main road and any point in the estate where goods or personnel will be
loaded and unloaded. At the same time they should not occupy more area, say higher
than 15% of the total area. Road design should allow for the installation and easy
maintenance of the utilities. Roads should not be congested by vehicle loading, unloading
or parking. Such activities should be either completely separated from the roadway or in
separate docks with limited access to the traffic carrying roads.
During the first phase of development some roadways may be paved only in part. It is
necessary, however, to allow sufficient width from the beginning, with utilities so sited
that they will not be covered by road widening. These considerations generally indicate a
rectangular road pattern if the shape of the site and natural drainage permits. Dead ends
restrict movement and are undesirable where communications between factories and
access to central services are important, but they may be necessary to open up isolated
sites and have the advantage of eliminating through traffic and reducing road and utility
costs.
Common services and utilities
The extent to which common services, should be supplied by the developer will depend
on the purpose of the IE and the availability and quality of services from commercial
firms, municipal authorities and the government.
In an ideal situation, the IE is planned in relation to the development of a wider area. If a

proportionate share of the cost of utilities is carried by those responsible for that
development, then utilities can be made available very economically in the IE. An estate
can not be commercially viable if it must shoulder large off-site infrastructure costs; nor
should it provide free or subsidized infrastructural services to neighbours in need. In
many cases the most practical solution for estate developers is to locate the estate close to
existing utilities. If water and sewerage mains, electric power cables, gas and steam
supply pipes are provided, these should run alongside roads, preferably under grass or
hard, unmade ground for easy maintenance.
Water
The water requirement varies with the combination of industries and their processes. A
storage tank with adequate capacity, say for meeting two days' water supply requirement
may be needed to cater for interruptions and breakdowns in water supply. Water is
normally piped to each plot or site. Investors may be advised or obliged to provide on-site
storage for a minimum of one day's supply to ensure continuity in case of supply
interruptions. The water storage system does not have to be located on the estate.
Where economically feasible, a ring system of mains should be used to reduce the danger
of supply interruptions; enable sections of mains to be shut off for maintenance; and

3-31
Industrial Estates
prevent pressure drops when users at different positions on the line are drawing water at
the same time.
Power
It costs more to bury power cables than to run them on overhead poles, but this may be
justified by the estate's improved appearance, safety and security. Power supply
companies often guarantee an uninterrupted supply, or at least high priority for estate
users. This is an important attraction for investors.
Normally the individual client/investor will deal directly with the company supplying the
electricity. Occasionally, the estate developer may generate his own electricity, or take
on the responsibility for supplying electricity to individual investors.
Sewage and dry waste disposal
Pump houses and treatment plants should be planned to minimize pipe runs while
avoiding nuisance and odours, and have a capacity equivalent to the water supply for the
area. Usually the system will be designed to accept normal domestic sewerage. Trade
effluents which do not conform to acceptable standards must be treated by the factory
before entering the system or shall be rated to the common treated facility.
Therefore, provision for adequate place to accommodate these facilities need to be

considered. MSW must be stored safely and collected regularly. It is usually deposited in
authorized MSW landfills, after required processing. This is often unavoidable, but may
lead to air pollution, formation of greenhouse gases and groundwater pollution.
Alternatives (greater production efficiency, recycling of waste, composting of organic
waste - also a source of biogas) should be encouraged.
While these represent essential steps for controlling pollution, an integrated approach to
the estate's environmental sustainability is recommended.
D. Risk based landuse planning
Land use choices for new industrial activities should take into account the different levels
of risk associated with various categories of industrial uses. Where municipalities use
conventional planning and zoning techniques to identify land uses permitted or prohibited
by zone, it may be useful to separate higher risk industries from both other industries and
other land uses. The creation of industrial parks for these uses may contribute to adequate
site planning and more effective emergency planning.
Care must be taken, however, to avoid creating potentially more hazardous situations as a
result of the domino effect of "knock-on" events involving multiple high-risk industries
within the same area. The use of adequate buffer zones within such industrial parks is
particularly important and the use of site specific risk assessments is desirable.
To assist planning authorities in improving their industrial land use classification within
plans the following typology of industry is suggested, based on the chemicals produced.
Type 1: industries presenting no major risks;

Type 2: industries presenting some risk (e.g. producers or users of benzene, ammonia,
vinyl chloride);

3-32
Industrial Estates
Type 3: industries presenting moderate risk (e.g. producers or users of hydrogen

chloride, liquefied petroleum gas, or gasoline);
Type 4: industries presenting high risk (e.g. producers or users of chlorine or ethylene
oxide).
For planning purposes, this typology based on risk should be included in the definition of
industry classes. This classification must be based not only on safety considerations but
also on concerns with environmental impacts and nuisances (noise, glare, odour, traffic
and visual impact).
Table 3-1: Risk Levels and Land use Development
RISK LEVEL LAND USE
> 10 –4 no other land use

10 –4 to 10 –5 manufacturing, ware house, open space
10-5 to 10 -6 Commercial, offices, low density residential
< 10 –6 all other uses.
Note:
Source: Risk based land use planning guidelines, Major Industrial Accidents Council of Canada
Figure 3-6: Land Uses for Different Risk Levels
3.2.2.2 Site development
Phasing of development
The cost of developing land (drainage, roads and utilities) is high. Therefore,
development is normally carried out in stages related to the rate of growth. A successful
industry operating in a pleasant environment and supplied with all the necessary utilities
and services of an IE is good publicity. Therefore the first phase must be finished quickly
and be reasonably complete in itself. The first phase should be restricted to an area which
can be completely developed and occupied within two or three years. This means a
realistic (or conservative) appraisal of the likely initial demand for space. Many IE

3-33
Industrial Estates
developers, particularly public sector developers, have overestimated the demand for
space during the first phase. As a result, they were left with expensive unused capacity
for many years, leading to financial difficulties, lack of money for maintenance, and a
gradual, steady deterioration in the general infrastructure. In some cases, transformers
and wastewater treatment plants had such excess capacity that they were unusable. If
demand exceeds expectations, the second phase of the development can always be
accelerated
Site establishment factors
Establishment of IE is determined by various factors based on entrepreneurship,

technology involved, facilities that are to be provided, etc. the major factors that are
considered in the establishment of IE are
Selection of enterprises
Selection of entrepreneurs
Control of investor activities
Limitation on investor activities
Building restrictions
Parking
Storage
Safety
Pollution
Each of the above factors are discussed in Annexure VI of this guidance manual.
3.2.3 IE management
3.2.3.1 Operation and maintenance
Basics of environmental management
Ecologically sensitive estate planning, construction and management will be based on

EIAs of the estate project as such and of individual enterprises and will
Maintain or restore parts of the original natural area where possible (this will also
contribute to the site’s attractiveness) and preserve natural drainage systems
Use environmentally sensitive construction methods and all locally viable methods to
design energy-efficient sites (passive solar heating, tree shade, etc)
Arrange buildings as compactly as possible from a technical and economic point of
view to save on infrastructure and transport:
Develop a transport management system for factory staff and goods.
Establish a comprehensive system for wastewater treatment, solid waste management
and prevention of air pollution.
Use water resources as efficiently as possible (recycle wastewater where possible).
Encourage environmentally sustainable production methods.

3-34
Industrial Estates
Air quality management
Determination of ventilation coefficient, as a measure of assimilative potential

Listing of all air polluting industries
Studying the industries for the pollutant control system including its efficiency &
reliability
Establishment of pollution load from each point source
Inventory of vehicles (line sources) and establishing pollution load contribution by
considering emission factors
Inventory of grid-wise aerial sources, through the consumption figures of kerosene,
LPG, use of firewood, etc.
Determination of areas for locating monitoring stations, where maximum ground
level concentrations are likely to occur.
Determination of relative share of the industries at sensitive locations for arriving at
the degree of control efficiency/ control technologies
Constant persuasion for improvement
Wastewater management
In an IE, wastewater will be generated from various industries. The main advantage of
industries to be located within the IE is the common treatment facility. The wastewater
generated from various industries can be managed by a CETP within the IE. The CETP
becomes one of the basic amenities that are offered to the industries by an IE. The
feasible approaches in the wastewater management through a CETP are listed below:
Preliminary treatment at individual level to meet influent limits of a common

treatment facility
Common/combined treatment facility for further treatment
Re-cycling of treated waters for beneficial uses or disposal through marine outfall.
Advantages of common treatment facility
Homogenization of wastewaters
Relatively better hydraulic stability
Advantage through scale of operation.
Professional control over treatment can be affordable
Offers great relief to small units, which are of main concern in terms of treatment
Eliminates multiple discharges in the area, provides opportunity for better
management of wastewater, i.e., proper treatment, disposal
Please refer TGM for CETP for further details.
Municipal solid waste and sludge
The activities associated with the management of solid wastes from the start of waste
generation to final disposal can be grouped into the six functional elements:

3-35
Industrial Estates
Waste generation;
Waste handling and sorting, storage, and processing at the source;
Waste collection;
Sorting, processing and transformation;
Transfer and transport; and
Disposal
Waste generation encompasses activities in which materials are identified as no longer
being of value (in their present form) and are either thrown away or gathered together for
disposal. Reduction of waste at source, although not controlled by solid waste managers,
is now included in system evaluations as a method of limiting the quantity of waste
generated.
Waste handling and sorting involves the activities associated with management of wastes
until they are placed in storage containers for collection. Handling also encompasses the
movement of loaded containers to the point of collection. Sorting of waste components is
an important step in the handling and storage of solid waste at the source. For example,
the best place to separate waste materials for reuse and recycling is at the source of
generation. On-site storage is of primary importance because of public health concerns
and aesthetic consideration. Unsightly makeshift containers and even open ground
storage, both of which are undesirable. The cost of providing storage for solid wastes at
the source is normally borne by the management of industrial properties.
The functional element of collection includes not only the gathering of solid wastes and
recyclable materials, but also the transport of these materials, after collection, to the
location where the collection vehicle is emptied. This location may be materials
processing facility, a transfer station, or a landfill disposal site.
The sorting, processing and transformation of solid waste materials includes the recovery
of sorted materials, processing of solid waste and transformation of solid waste that
occurs primarily in locations away from the source of waste generation. Sorting of
commingled (mixed) wastes usually occurs at a materials recovery facility, transfer
stations, combustion facilities, and disposal sites. Sorting often includes the separation of
bulky items, separation of waste components by size using screens, manual separation of
waste components, and separation of ferrous and non-ferrous metals.
Waste processing is undertaken to recover conversion products and energy. The organic
fraction of Municipal Solid Waste (MSW) can be transformed by a variety of biological
and thermal processes like aerobic composting and incineration.
Waste transformation is undertaken to reduce the volume, weight, size or toxicity of

waste without resource recovery. Transformation may be done by a variety of
mechanical (e.g. shredding), thermal (e.g. incineration without energy recovery) or
chemical (e.g. encapsulation) techniques.
The functional element of transfer and transport involves two steps: (i) the transfer of
wastes from the smaller collection vehicle to the larger transport equipment and (ii) the
subsequent transport of the wastes, usually over long distances, to a processing or
disposal site. The transfer usually takes place at a transfer station.

3-36
Industrial Estates
All the residual materials from material recovery facilities (MRFs), residue from the
combustion of solid waste, rejects of composting, or other substances from various solid
waste processing facilities are disposed by landfilling.
Wherever possible, generation of sludge should be minimized. Sludge must be treated,

and if toxic metals are present, the sludge must be stabilized.
For various types of solid waste management techniques and other related details, please
refer TGM for common municipal solid waste management.
Hazardous waste management
In case of IEs comprising of industries that generate hazardous waste, management of the
same becomes mandatory. The principle steps that are to be followed in the effective
management of hazardous waste are:
Segregation of waste into hazardous / non-hazardous

Exploring recovery, re-use, renovation and re-cycle
Categorization of waste in to:
– Incinerable waste
– Non-incinerable waste
Incinerable waste to hazardous waste incineration facility, in accordance to the
guidelines, disposal of slag into TSDF based on TCLP.
Non-incinerable waste – pre-treatment, secured landfill site, collection of leachate and
its treatment, regular monitoring to check integrity of the liners.
For various techniques on hazardous waste management please refer TGM for treatment,
storage and disposal facilities (TSDFs).
Good environmental practices
Encourage the use of vapor recovery systems to reduce VOC emissions

Encourage the use of sulphur recovery systems where considered feasible
Encourage the use of low NOx burners
Encourage the recovery and recycle of oily wastes
Encourage the regeneration and reuse of spent catalysts and solvents
Encourage the recycling of cooling water and the reuse of wastewaters
Institute segregation of stormwater from process wastewater
– Encourage the use of non-chrome additives to cooling water
– Institute spill prevention and control measures
– Include properly designed storage facilities for hazardous chemicals and wastes,
including provision for containment of contaminated water in case of fire
H. Emergency management
The four core elements of emergency management are:

3-37
Industrial Estates
Prevention/mitigation - land-use planning, dangerous goods corridors, buffer zones

and process safety management for industry
Preparedness - emergency planning, emergency equipment, training, exercises, public
awareness and education
Response - Liaison, advice, assistance and resources such as personal/
equipment/materials, emergency information and coordination of emergency response
Recovery - returning to normal, which is often longer than response phase, recovery
plans and programmes, return of evacuees/migrants, infrastructure restoration,
funding assistance, critical incident stress management
3.2.3.2 Environmental management systems for IEs
EMS provides an action framework that brings together the main elements of a practical
environmental plan. The framework should define explicit environmental policy,
performance objectives and targets, and mechanisms for their enforcement and
implementation. In addition, the EMS framework should clearly define the roles and
responsibilities of various stakeholders as individual companies and regulatory agencies
within and outside the IE.
Environmental performance goals broadly target resource efficiency (energy, water and
material use), reduction in emission load (atmospheric release, liquid waste and solid
waste) and sound management of surrounding environment and natural resources (habitat
and wildlife, neighbouring facilities and units). Some of the specific management
elements, which contribute to improving environmental performance, are
Well-defined operating standards and realistic targets set internally

Regular review of environmental performance and monitoring. e.g., audits
Programmes on training and awareness on environmental risks
Effective incident reporting and investigation
Effective contingency planning for accidents, spills and fibres
Reporting systems within the estate, and with the public
In order to avoid the conflict of responsibilities of IE managers as developers, promoters,
regulators and providers of essential services, it is essential to establish ‘Environment
Management Cell’ (EMC) in each IE. The role of such EMC would be to conduct
environmental monitoring, track performance targets, monitor and check the growth of
industries within the estate, correlating it with the carrying capacity limits, conduct R&D
for developing clean technologies and information dissemination to different
stakeholders. Such activities of EMC could be undertaken in technical guidance from
PCBs
The end objective of EMS implementation in IE is to boost industrial growth without

putting additional burden on the environment. The complexities of sustainable industrial
development require new types of partnerships within industry, between industry and the
public sector, and with its wider group of stakeholders.

3-38
Industrial Estates
Monitoring and reporting
Frequent sampling should be recommended to plants during start-up and upset conditions.
Once a record of consistent performance has been established, sampling for the
parameters listed in this document can be eased.
IEs should encourage units to analyze monitoring data, review it at regular intervals, and
compare it with the operating standards so that any necessary corrective actions can be
taken. Records of monitoring results should be kept in an acceptable format. The results
should be reported to the responsible authorities and relevant parties, as required. IEs
should maintain a record of accidental releases of pollutants to the environment and
should take appropriate corrective action to be better prepared for future occurrences.
Where feasible, IEs should educate the industrial units on ways to mitigate environmental
problems
Sustainable management of industrial areas
The efficient management of IEs starts with identifying the facts in terms of problems and
impacts, analyzing the cause, development and assessment of measures that can be
implemented and evaluation of integration of these measures. Based on a clear collective
approach, it aims at the development of solutions which are beneficial at all levels, for the
enterprise as much as for the general optimization of infrastructure and services in the
industrial zone. The cycle of change allows the progressive and systematic
implementation of sustainable development in industrial areas with economic,
environmental, organizational, and social benefits (including risks) for industrial areas
which usually integrate commerce and services (Figure 3-7).
Figure 3-7: Sustainable Management of Industrial Areas: Cycle of Change

Environmental Protection, Economic Development and Social Progress are the three main
dimensions that are considered to have a Sustainable Development within IEs. Each
dimension has specific key issues that are to be addressed and these are identified by

3-39
Industrial Estates
various performance indicators. The challenges that are to be addressed and the
contributions to achieve a Sustainable development are illustrated in the following Figure
3-8.
Figure 3-8: Sustainable Development within IEs
3.2.3.3 Organizational considerations and administration
Good management is vital for the success of an estate. The agency responsible for the
estate management should not limit itself to maintenance of the facilities and supervision
of activities, but play a dynamic role, promoting the services offered by the estate among
local entrepreneurs. Depending on the development objectives, an estate's services may
also be marketed elsewhere in the country, and possibly abroad. If an estate is run by a
public-sector agency, it is essential that staff with private sector experience is employed
for this purpose.
The estate developer and/or the environmental agency should monitor the adherence of
each plant to environmental regulations on a regular basis. This means that the developer
or its appointed environmental officer would have the right to enter premises at all
reasonable times to take samples and do all that is necessary to ensure that environmental
standards are complied with.
When a country launches a programme of estate development, it is advisable to set up a

body responsible for the programme. The main tasks of the IE Authority would be to
evaluate the demand for and supply of IEs and to encourage private developers to
undertake the construction and management of IEs.

3-40
Industrial Estates
Administration
The size and duties of the administration will depend on the services to be provided. The
administration may have three divisions - managerial, technical and financial. An
overview of the responsibilities of the divisions is given in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2: Responsibilities of IE Administration
DIVISION RESPONSIBILITIES
MANAGERIAL DIVISION To implement the admission of the sponsors

To enforce the restrictive covenants in lease agreements
To maintain the buildings and services on the estate
To arrange the payment of taxes and all charges that may
be levied on the estate and the wages of estate employees
To collect rents and other dues from tenants
To be responsible for the general good order of the estate
TECHNICAL DIVISION This division of the administration is responsible for the
common facilities, technical and training services that are
provided
Operation of the central workshop and other common
facilities
Operation of plant hire scheme
Preparation of feasibility studies and project reports for
tenant enterprises
Provision of marketing information
Organization of training schemes
Organization of exhibitions
FINANCIAL DIVISION The functions of the division are
Either to provide direct loans to estate tenants or to
guarantee loans extended to tenants by commercial banks
To arrange bulk purchasing of materials
To allocate scarce materials to estate enterprises
On all IEs, irrespective of size, there must be arrangements for carrying out the
responsibilities of the managerial division.
Size of IE administrative staff
The cost of administering an estate must be borne by the tenants, by the sponsors or
jointly. Normally it should fall on the tenants; otherwise they receive, in effect, a
continuing subsidy. It is essential, therefore, that the cost of administration be kept as low
as possible, consistent with the maintenance of the services needed. The largest single
component of the cost usually consists of salaries.
It is sometimes argued that the administration should be carried out by an association of

entrepreneurs occupying premises on the estate. So far as is known, the only instances of
occupier administration occur in cooperative IEs (private and government-assisted). It is
however, desirable for an association/IE local Authority of tenants and/or owners to
cooperate in the administration.

3-41
Industrial Estates
Technical and financial functions
An estate administration does not always carry out all functions that are technical and
financial. Certainly in the absence of any other organization, the operation of central
workshops, common service facilities and plant-hire schemes would come under its aegis,
if they are provided at all. All the duties listed can be carried out more conveniently by a
separate organization - an extension service, small industries institute or the like - catering
to the whole small-scale industrial sector. Common technical services are probably best
managed by a private-sector entity.
It is not the duty of an estate administration to interfere in the running of individual

enterprises on an estate. The manager of a small estate may be called upon to advise
tenant entrepreneurs on almost any aspect of their business. The manager should be in a
position to do so. He should not be expected to provide all advice on the basis of his own
experience, but he should be able to put a client in touch with the person or organization
that can supply it.
Dues other than rent
Apart from rent, enterprises pay dues for water, electricity, medical services and,
sometimes, conservancy. A perennial question is whether the estate should buy electricity
in bulk for distribution to the tenants or whether the supply company should provide the
service directly. There can be a considerable saving to the tenants if the estate undertakes
the distribution. However, the estate may be faced with the cost of providing the
necessary appliances, along with reading the meters, preparing the bills and collecting the
amounts due. The system can be of great help to small consumers. The matter should be
decided on an actuarial basis allowing for the extra costs involved to be borne by the
estate administration.
Financing the project
To implement an IE programme, or even to construct a single estate, involves a large

investment. The funds raised, or allocated, for the establishment of an IE have to meet the
costs of physically creating the estate and of providing and maintaining the various
services; the latter, at least, until such time as they become self-financing. There are thus
capital and recurring expenditures.
Capital, whether supplied by the government or raised by the sponsors of a private

organization, is used to acquire and improve the site and to install the utilities - roads,
water, electric power and drainage. In exceptional circumstances it may go so far as to
cover the cost of buildings and services. Usually, however, funds are borrowed on the
security of the improved land for the items mentioned in the preceding sentence.
Working capital is used to meet all the charges incurred in the running of the estate -
salaries, street lighting, taxes, conservancy, maintenance and operation of services. In
general, all of these will be recouped, with the possible exception of services of a
promotional character, by the inclusion of a component in the rent of the structure to
cover them, but they may not be recovered in full in a partially occupied estate. If it is
necessary to increase the working capital, funds are usually borrowed from a commercial
bank.

3-42
Industrial Estates
The different types of IEs from the point of view of financial sponsorship - government,
government-assisted and private IEs are explained in Annexure I, under various types of
IEs.
IE authority – property issues
An estate may provide advance standard and custom-built work-places or only serviced
plots. Some IEs make all three available. There is a trend away from the erection of work-
places in advance of demand; such construction was at one time considered to be the main
function of an IE. Current opinion favours the provision of serviced plots and long-term
loans to enable industrialists to build their own premises. This arrangement has much to
recommend it in the case of the medium-scale and upper range of the small-scale sectors.
It reduces the sponsors' original investment in the estate because the loan funds are likely
to come from another source. But the arrangement may not be appropriate for nursery and
rural IEs, for the first estate in a semi-urban region, or any estate that is required to have a
demonstration effect. A good arrangement for a first estate is a combination of advance
standard work-places and serviced plots on which work-sheds may be erected by the
industrialists or the estate administration, if the need for them is seen.
Accommodation can be leased or sold. From the point of view of the sponsors of the
estate, the main advantage of selling is that it allows them to recover their investment
more rapidly. This means, however, that they will not benefit from increases in property
values by progressively increasing rents. To the entrepreneur a leased work-place releases
capital that otherwise would be immobilized. The advantage to him of an owned work-
place is its value as collateral for any loan he may wish to raise. Probably the best method
is to provide work-places on lease or for sale. An option to acquire the premises, by hire-
purchase or other arrangement, can be written into the lease.
In many cases, irrespective of the ownership of the premises, the plot is leased, and the
title to the land on which the estate is built remains with the government or the local
Authority.
External support institutions - need for effective external support
An IE is only one element in an industrial promotion programme. Its enterprises need

qualified managers, a trained labour force and sources of technical advice and finance. An
estate can be the means of delivering them, but only if it is supported by the appropriate
institutions. These will normally cater for other enterprises in the area as well.
Where market forces do not (or cannot) provide a "natural selection" of such services on
the basis of effective demand, there is the danger of a wide gap between the need for and
the supply of services. Lack of developmental efficiency is one reason for the increasing
emphasis (also among donor agencies) on involving the private sector in the provision of
support services. Another reason is that staff of public-sector support agencies, unless
recruited from the private sector, will not really understand the problems of enterprises or
have the expertise to solve them.
Support agencies must be close to their clients, also in a geographic sense. In the case of
public sector agencies, this implies delegation to lower administrative levels. Local
capacities must be strengthened accordingly. To use limited human and financial
resources effectively, support should focus on areas where a sufficient number of
(potential) clients are found, and on the most promising activities. It is now generally

3-43
Industrial Estates
agreed that services should at least be partly funded by charging fees. This will reduce
demands on government budgets and will increase cost-consciousness among clients.
Financial institutions
No matter what type of institution is formed or selected to finance small-scale industry it

is essential that it be suitably staffed to evaluate technically and commercially the projects
put before it, or that it be able to draw on the services of some other organization for this
purpose. The experience with financial schemes which particularly target the small-scale
sector has been mixed. Inadequate customer orientation (complex procedures, unhelpful
staff) is an often-quoted problem. Revolving schemes suffer from low repayment rates.
With regard to the latter, loan schemes relying on "peer pressure" have preformed better.
While special financial facilities and programmes can and do contribute to industrial
development, they can only help a minority of enterprises. The crucial question therefore
is how conditions can be created which will stimulate the development of private
banking, and how competition among banks can be increased to lower the cost of credit
Training
Most countries have a vocational training system. It may take the form of a trade school
for those who have left school, or a special school within the normal educational system.
The success of either of the above methods depends on how well the school is equipped
and how near it reproduces working conditions in industry. Few of the developing
countries have a formal apprenticeship system for on-the-job learning. A combination of
vocational training with a formal apprenticeship is-usually best. One of the problems in
providing training courses for persons in employment is that few employers are prepared
to continue paying the trainees' wages; hence the need for stipends.
Little information is available on the training of supervisors. That there is a need to

improve the standards of supervision in industry is widely recognized. There are,
however, two aspects to this problem: upgrading of technical skills and maintenance of
good personal relationships. The latter generally comes under the heading of management
techniques. While the most highly skilled worker does not necessarily make the best
foreman, it is true that one of indifferent skill never can possess the necessary Authority
to be a satisfactory supervisor.
Extension services
An extension service is essentially a multidisciplinary organization created to solve the

technical, managerial and financial problems of small-scale enterprises through advice,
diagnostic services and direct support. The extent and content of an extension service
depends on the predominant type(s) of industry, the levels of technology and
entrepreneurship of the small-scale industrial sector, and the number and density of
enterprises.
The necessity for links between purely technical counseling and managerial advice is
evident. What may not be so obvious is the linkage of extension services and sources of
finance. It is pointless to make a recommendation to an entrepreneur unless, at the same
time, he can be provided with information on how to obtain the funds to follow it up. Nor
can the availability of finance be effective if the borrower lacks the knowledge or the
ability to make the best use of the proceeds of the loan.

3-44
Industrial Estates
The provision of services to clusters of related small enterprises in a particular area may
be cheaper and more effective. It is also likely to intensify linkages among them,
accelerating their development. Once firms have understood the advantages of finding
common solutions to common problems, clusters are assisted in identifying and analyzing
their specific problems, determining common development objectives and generating a
joint project to attain them. Experts then help to upgrade the capabilities of the clustered
enterprises. The clusters are also assisted in building links with institutions such as banks
and research centres, and lobbying for the improvement of policies and regulations
affecting small enterprises with the relevant authorities.
3.3 Eco-industrial Parks
‘An EIP is a community of manufacturing and service businesses seeking enhanced

environmental and economic performance through collaboration in managing
environmental and resource issues including energy, water, and materials. By working
together, the community of businesses seeks a collective benefit that is greater than the
sum of industrial benefits and company would realize if it optimized its individual
performance only. The goal of an EIP is to improve economic performance of the
participating companies while minimizing their environmental impact.
The above definition and many other such concepts of industrial zones, business park,
Industrial district, IE focus mainly on the performance optimization and environmental
management of the industries within the defined boundaries only. The social benefits that
should usually follow from EIP development include fostering a sense of community
among businesses and surrounding neighborhoods (Klee and Williams, 1999).
The EIP approach offers a wide variety of measures and tools to improve the
environmental performance of individual industries and IEs / parks. However each IE /
park no matter whether an already existing one or a newly planned, requires an individual
mix of measures and tools. The overlapping steps of Eco-industrial development are
depicted in the following Figure 3-9.

3-45
Industrial Estates
Figure 3-9: Eco- Industrial Development
Figure 3-10: Eco Industrial Networks
3.3.1 Tools to explore for converting existing IEs into EIPs
To convert the existing IEs into EIPs the parameters mentioned in the Table 3-3 can be
explored.

3-46
Industrial Estates
Table 3-3: Tools to Explore for Conversion to EIPs
Quality of Life Marketing Materials

Integrating Work and Green Labeling Common Buying
Recreation Accessing Green Markets Customer/Supplier
Cooperative education Joint Promotions (e.g. Relations
Opportunities advertising, trade shows) By-Product Connections
Volunteer and Joint Ventures Creating New Material
Community programs Recruiting Value Added Markets
Involvement in Regional Companies
planning etc.
Information / Transportation Environment, Health and
Communication Systems Safety
Internal Communications Shared Commuting Accident Prevention
External Information Shared Shipping Emergency Response
Exchange Common Vehicle Waste Minimization
Monitoring Systems Maintenance Multi-media Planning
Computer Compatibility Alternative Packaging Design for Environment
Joint Management Intra-Park Transportation Shared Environmental
Information System for Integrated Logistics Information Systems, etc.
Park Management etc.
Production Process Human Resources Energy
Pollution Prevention Human Resources Green Buildings
Scrap Reduction and Re- Recruiting Joint Benefit Energy Auditing
use Packages Cogeneration
Production Design Wellness Programs Spin-off Energy Firms
Common Subcontractors Common Needs (payroll, Alternative Fuels etc.
Common Equipment maintenance, security)
Technology Sharing Training
Integration etc. Integrated Logistics etc.
3.3.2 Stage-wise explorable programmes
The stage wise explorable programmes to convert the existing IEs to an Eco-IE are
explained in the Table 3-4.
Table 3-4: Stage-wise Explorable Programmes
Internally neutral Internally supportive Externally neutral Externally supportive

Cleaner Greening the Supply Extended Producers Integrated Resource
Production (CP) Chain Responsibilities (EPR) Recovery System
Environmental Green Procurement Material and Water Regional Resource
Management Eco-labeling Recycling Management
System (EMS) Programmatic Cleaner Energy Cascading Life Cycle
Life Cycle Production (P-CP) Collective Utility Assessment (LCA)
Assessment Programmatic Sharing of Material Flow
(LCA) Environmental Impact transportation, Accounting (MFA)
Environmental Assessment (P-EIA) warehousing logistics, Intra- and Inter-estate
Management By Product Exchange training, recruitment, Collaboration
Accounting (BPX) marketing,
(EMA) Packaging material procurement

3-47
Industrial Estates
Internally neutral Internally supportive Externally neutral Externally supportive

Environmental take back Green architecture
Performance Design for Landscape Ecology
Indicator (EPI) Environment (DfE) Centralized WWTF
Corporate Social Reverse Emergency Response
Responsibility Manufacturing / End System
(CSR) of life Disassembly Estate
Env.Management
3.4 Summary of Applicable National Regulations
3.4.1 General description of major statutes
A comprehensive list of all the laws, rules, regulations, decrees and other legal
instruments relevant to IEs is given in Annexure VII. It includes all the statues related to
different forms of IEs viz. EPZs, SEZs, STPs, Petroleum, Chemical and petrochemical
regions.
3.4.2 Industry-specific requirements
All the individual industries are required to comply with industry-specific minimal
national standards. However, when a homogenous IE/complex proposes to take a single
clearance for all the industries which come up in their IE/complex, the Notification
provides an opportunity for taking single clearance, in such case entire IE/complex will
be treated as a single entity to comply with the standards prescribed by the regulatory
authorities.
When the industries send their effluents to CETPs, then CETP effluent standards will
apply.
If sector-specific standards are not notified, the general standards for all the relevant
pollutants will be applicable. The general standards for the effluent discharge and
emissions are given in the Table 3-5 and 3-6 respectively.
Table 3-5: General Environmental Standards for Effluent Discharge
S.No Parameter Inland Public Land for Marine /

Surface Sewers Irrigation Coastal
Water Areas
(A) (B) (C) (D)

1 Colour & odour
2 Suspended Solids mg/l, 100 600 200 For Process
max. Wastewater
For cooling
water effluent
10 % above
total
suspended

3-48
Industrial Estates
matter of
influent
3 Particle size of suspended Shall pass 850 - - Floatable
solids micron IS solids, solids
Sieve max 3 mm
Settleable
solids, max
856 microns
4 pH value 5.5 – 9.0 5.5 – 9.0 5.5 – 9.0 5.5 – 9.0
5 Temperature Shall not Shall not
exceed above exceed 5oC
the receiving above the
water receiving
temperature water
temperature
6 Oil and Grease, mg/l max. 10 20 10 20
7 Total residual chlorine, mg/l 1.0 - - 1.0
max
8 Ammonical Nitrogen (as N), 50 50 - 50
mg/l, max.
9 Total Kjeldhal Nitrogen (as 100 - - 100
N); mg/l, max.
10 Free ammonia (as 5.0 - - 5.0
NH3);mg/l max
11 Biochemical Oxygen 30 350 100 100
Demand (3 days at 27oC);
mg/l max.
12 Chemical Oxygen Demand, 250 - - 250
mg/l, max
13 Arsenic (as As) 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
14 Mercury (as Hg); mg/l, max. 0.01 0.01 - 0.01
15 Lead (as Pb); mg/l, max 0.1 1.0 - 2.0
16 Cadmium (as Cd); mg/l.max 2.0 1.0 - 2.0
17 Hexavalent Chromium (as 0.1 2.0 - 1.0
Cr+6);mg/l, max
18 Total Chromium (as 2.0 2.0 - 2.0
Cr);mg/l, max
19 Copper (as Cu); mg/l, max 3.0 3.0 - 3.0
20 Zinc (as Zn); mg/l, max 5.0 15 - 15
21 Selenium (as Se) 0.05 0.05 - 0.05
22 Nickel (as Ni);mg/l, max 3.0 3.0 - 5.0
23 Cyanide (as Cn);mg/l, max 0.2 2.0 0.2 0.2
24 Fluoride (as F);mg/l, max 2.0 15 - 15
25 Dissolved phosphates (as 5.0 - - -

3-49
Industrial Estates
P);mg/l, max
26 Sulphides (as S);mg/l, max 2.0 - - 5.0
27 Phenolic Compounds (as 1.0 5.0 - 5.0
C6H5OH);mg/l, max
28 Radioactive materials:
(a) Alpha emitters 10-7 10-7 10-8 10-7
microcurie mg/l, max.
(b) Beta emitters microcurie 10-6 10-6 10-7 10-6
mg/l
29 Bio-assay test 90% survival 90% survival of 90% survival 90% survival
of fish after 96 fish after 96 hrs of fish after 96 of fish after 96
hrs in 100% in 100% hrs in 100% hrs in 100%
effluent effluent effluent effluent
30 Manganese mg/l 2 2 - 2
31 Iron (as Fe) mg/l 3 3 - 3
32 Vanadium (as V) mg/l 0.2 0.2 - 0.2
33 Nitrate Nitrogen 10 mg/l - - 20 mg/l
* These standards shall be applicable for industries, operations or processes other than those industries,
operations or process for which standards have been specified in Schedule of the Environment protection Rules,
1989.
Source: CPCB
Table 3-6: General Emission Standards
S.NO PARAMETER CONCENTRATION NOT TO EXCEED

(MG/NM3)
1 Particulate matter 150

2 Total Fluoride 25
3 Asbestos 4 fibres/cc ad dust should not be more than
2mg/Nm3
4 Mercury 0.2
5 Chlorine 15
6 Hydrochloric acid vapour and 35
mist
7 Sulphuric acid mist 50
8 Carbon monoxide 1%
9 Lead 10
Source: CPCB

3-50
4.
OPERATIONAL ASPECTS OF EIA
Prior environmental clearance process has been revised in the Notification issued on 14th
September, 2006, into following four major stages i.e., screening, scoping, public
consultation and appraisal. Each stage has certain procedures to be followed. This
section deals with all the procedural and technical guidance, for conducting objective-
oriented EIA studies, their review and decision-making. Besides, the Notification
classified projects into Category A, which requires prior environmental clearance from
MoEF and Category B from SEIAA/UTEIAA.
Consistency with other requirements
Clearance from other regulatory bodies is not a pre-requisite for obtaining the prior
environmental clearance and all such clearances will be treated as parallel statutory
requirements.
Consent for Establishment (CFE) and prior environmental clearance are two different
legal requirements, a project proponent is required to be taken. Therefore, these two
activities can be initiated and proceeded with simultaneously.
If a project is covered by the provisions of CRZ and EIA Notifications, then the
project proponent is required to take separate clearances from the concerned
Authorities.
Rehabilitation and Resettlement issues need not be dealt under the EIA Notification
as other statutory bodies deal with these issues. However, socio-economic studies be
considered while taking environmental decisions.
4.1 Coverage of Industrial Estates under the Purview of Notification
All the new IEs including expansion and modernization require prior environmental
clearance. Based on pollution potential, these projects are classified into Category A and
Category B i.e.
Category A:
– If at least one industry in the proposed IE falls under the Category A, entire
industrial area shall be treated as Category A, irrespective of the area.
– IEs with area greater than 500 ha and housing at least one Category B industry.
Category B:
– IEs housing at least one Category B industry and area < 500ha.
– IEs of area > 500 ha and not housing any industry belonging to Category A or B.
Besides there is specific condition, when it applies, a Category B project will be treated as
Category A project. These conditions are discussed in subsequent sections.

4-1
Operational Aspects of an EIA
Note:
i. IE of area below 500 ha and not housing any industry of Category A or B does not
require clearance.
ii. An IE with known composition of industries applies for a prior environmental

clearance, then single clearance for IE with those clearly listed industries with
specified products, capacities can be considered.
iii. The individual industries and IEs may parallely can apply for Environmental
Clearance.
iv. For common effluent treatment plants and other services, parallel environmental
clearance can be considered.
v. If an industry comes up at a later stage after obtaining environmental clearance for IE

and the details of which are not included in environmental clearance cleared for the
IE, then such industry may apply for Environmental Clearance, in individual capacity,
if falls under the purview of EIA Notification.
vi. If individual new industries do not fall under the purview of EIA Notification, but the
total capacity/area cleared for IE is complete, in such case IE may approach for
Environmental Clearance, as an modernization/expansion case
vii. Any developmental activity, which was issued EIA clearance (existing industrial
area), when undergoes expansion or modernization (change in process or technology)
with increase in production capacity or any change in product mix beyond the list of
products cleared in the issued clearance is required to submit new application for EIA
clearance (either individual industry or IE).
viii. Any developmental activity, which is listed in Schedule of the EIA Notification and
after expansion due to its total capacity, if falls under the purview of either Category
B or Category A, then such developmental activities requires clearance from
respective authorities (either individual industry or IE).
ix. The choice of going IE or industrial industry is up to the project proponents.
The sequence of steps in the process of prior environmental clearance for Category A
projects and the Category B projects are shown in Figure 4.1 and Figure 4.2 respectively.
Each stage in the process of prior environmental clearance for the IEs are discussed in
subsequent sections.
Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates 4-2 October 2009
Figure 4-1: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities

Falling Under Category A
Figure 4-2: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities

Falling Under Category B
4.2 Screening
Screening of the project shall be performed at the initial stage of the project development
so that proponents are aware of their obligations before deciding on the budget, project
design and execution plan.
This stage is applicable only for Category ‘B’ developmental activity i.e. if general
conditions are applicable for a Category B project, then it will be treated as Category A
project. Besides, screening also refers to the classification of Category B projects into
either Category B1 or Category B2. Category B1 projects require to follow all the stages,
that are applicable for a Category A project, but are processed at the SEIAAs/UTEIAAs.
Whereas, Category B2 projects do not require either EIA or public consultation.
As per the Notification, classification of the Category B projects falls under the purview
of the SEAC.
4.2.1 Applicable conditions for Category B projects
Specific condition
Any IE (usually falling under Category B) will be treated as Category A, if:

– If any Industrial Estate / Complex / Export Processing Zones / Special Economic
Zones / Biotech parks / Leather Complex with homogeneous type of industries
such leather / skin / hide / processing industry or those industrial estates with pre-
defined set of activities (not necessarily homogeneous obtains prior
environmental clearance, individual industries including proposed industrial
housing within such estates / complexes will not be required to take prior
environmental clearance, so long as the terms and conditions for the industrial
estate / complex are complied with (such estates/ complexes must have a clearly
identified management with the legal responsibility of ensuring adherence to the
terms and conditions of prior environmental clearance, who may be held
responsible for violation of the same throughout the life of the complex / estate.)
The SEIAA shall base its decision on the recommendations of a State/UT level EAC
for the purpose of Environmental Clearance.
In absence of a duly constituted SEIAA or SEAC, a Category B project shall be
treated as a Category ‘A’ project.
The EAC at the State/UT level shall screen the projects or activities in Category B.
SEAC shall meet at least once every month.
If any Category B IE, after proposed expansion of capacity/production or fuel change,
falls under the purview of Category A in terms of production capacity, then clearance
is required from the Central Government.
4.2.2 Criteria for classification of Category B1 and B2 projects
The classification of Category B projects or activities into B1 or B2 (except the project or

activities listed in item 8(b) in the schedule to the EIA Notification, 2006) will be
determined based on whether or not the project or activity requires further environmental
studies for preparation of an EIA for its appraisal prior to the grant of Environmental
Clearance. The necessity of which will be decided, depending upon the nature and
location specificity of the project, by SEAC after scrutiny of the applications seeking
environmental clearance for Category B projects or activities.
The projects requiring an EIA report shall be included in Category B1 and remaining
projects will fall under Category B2 and will not require an EIA report and public
consultation.
4.2.3 Application for prior environmental clearance
The project proponent, after identifying the site and carrying out a pre-feasibility
study, is required to apply for the prior environmental clearance using Form 1 given
in Annexure VIII. The proponent has to submit the filled in Form 1 along with the
pre-feasibility report and draft ToR for EIA studies to the concerned Authority i.e.
MoEF, Government of India for Category A projects and the SEIAA in case of
Category B projects. Please refer subsequent sections for the information on how to
fill the Form 1, contents of pre-feasibility report and sector-specific ToRs.
Prior environmental clearance is required before any construction work, or
preparation of land is started on the identified site / project or activity by the project
management, except for securing the land.
If the application is made for a specific developmental activity, which has an inherent
area development component as a part of its project proposal and the same project
also attracts the construction and area development provisions under 8a and 8b of the
Schedule, then the project will be seen as a developmental activity other than 8a and
8b of the Schedule.
4.2.4 Siting guidelines
Economic, Environmental and social factors are recognized and assessed while siting an
industry. Proximity of water sources, highway, major settlements, markets for products
and raw material resources is desired for economy of production. Industries are also
required to be sited, striking a balance between economic and environmental
considerations.
Specific siting guidelines as described in Section 3.3 of Chapter 3, may be referred for
site suitability in respect of environmental pollution control.
4.3 Scoping for EIA Studies
Scoping exercise is taken-up soon after the project contours are defined. The primary
purpose of scoping is to identify the concerns and issues which may affect the project
decisions. Besides, scoping defines EIA study requirements and boundaries of the EIA
study.
Scoping refers to the process by which the EAC, in case of Category ‘A’ projects or
activities, and SEAC in the case of Category ‘B1’ projects, including applications for
expansion and/or modernization of existing projects, determine ToR for EIA studies
addressing all relevant environmental concerns for the preparation of an EIA Report for a
particular project.
Project proponent shall submit the application to the concerned Authority. The
application (Form 1 as given in Annexure VIII) shall be attached with pre-feasibility
report and proposed ToR for EIA Studies. The proposed sequence to arrive at the
draft ToR is discussed below:
– Precisely, the pre-feasibility report summarizes the project details and also the
likely environmental concerns based on the secondary information, which will be
availed for filling the Form 1.
– From the pre-feasibility report and the Form 1, valued environmental components
(VECs) may be identified for a given project (the receiving environment/social
components, which are likely to get effected due to the project
operations/activities).
– Once the project details from the pre-feasibility report & Form 1; and VECs are
identified, a matrix establishing the interactions which can lead to the
effects/impacts could be developed (Qualitative analysis).
– For each identified possible effect in the matrix, significance analysis could be
conducted to identify the impacts, which needs to be further studied (quantitative
analysis) in the subsequent EIA studies. All such points will become the part of
the draft ToR to be proposed by the project proponent along with the application
form.
– The information to be provided in pre-feasibility report, guidelines for filling
Form 1 and guidelines for developing draft ToR is summarized in the subsequent
sections.
– Authority consults the respective EAC/SEAC to reply to the proponent. The
EAC/SEAC concerned reviews the application form, pre-feasibility report and
proposed draft ToR by the proponent and make necessary additions/deletions to
make it a comprehensive ToR that suits the statutory requirements for conducting
the EIA studies.
A site visit by sub-committees of EAC/SEAC concerned will be planned, only if
considered necessary by the EAC/SEAC concerned with the written approval of the
chairperson of EAC/SEAC concerned. Project proponent will facilitate such site visits
of the sub-committees.
EAC/SEAC shall provide an opportunity to the project proponent for presentation and
discussions on the proposed project and related issues as well as the proposed ToR for
EIA studies. If the State Government desires to present its views on any specific
project in the scoping stage, it can depute an officer for the same at the scoping stage
to EAC, as an invitee but not as a member of EAC. However, non-appearance of the
project proponent before EAC/SEAC at any stage will not be a ground for rejection of
the application for the prior environmental clearance.
In case of a new or expansion project in an identified problem area by the CPCB, then
the Ministry may invite representative of SEIAA to present their views, if any at the
stage of scoping, to the EAC.
The final set of ToRs for EIA Studies shall be conveyed to the proponent by the EAC/
SEAC within sixty days of the receipt of Form 1 and pre-feasibility report. If the
finalized ToR for EIA studies are not conveyed to the proponent within sixty days of
the receipt of Form 1, the ToR for EIA studies suggested by the proponent shall be
deemed as the final and will be approved for the EIA studies.
The final ToR for EIA Studies shall be displayed on the websites of the
MoEF/SEIAA.
Applications for prior environmental clearance may be rejected by the concerned

Authority based on the recommendations by the concerned EAC or SEAC at the
scoping stage itself. In case of such rejection, the decision together with reasons for
the same shall be communicated to the proponent in writing within sixty days of the
receipt of the application.
The final EIA report and the other relevant documents submitted by the applicant
shall be scrutinized by the concerned Authority strictly with reference to the approved
ToR for EIA studies.
4.3.1 Pre-feasibility report
The pre-feasibility report should include, but not limited to highlight the proposed project
information, keeping in view the environmental sensitivities of the selected site, raw
material, technology options and its availability. The information required in pre-
feasibility report varies from case to case even in the same sector depending upon the
local environmental setting within which the plant is located. However, the
environmental information which may be furnished in the pre-feasibility report may
include as under:
Description of the project, including in particular:

− a description of the physical characteristics of the whole project and the land-use
requirements during the construction and operational phases,
− a description of the main characteristics of the production processes, for instance,
nature and quantity of the materials used,
− an estimate, by type and quantity, of expected residues and emissions (water, air
and soil pollution, noise, vibration, light, heat, radiation, etc.) resulting from the
operation of the proposed project.
An outline of the main alternatives studied by the developer and an indication of the
main reasons for this choice, taking into account the environmental effects.
A description of the aspects of the environment likely to be significantly affected by
the proposed project, including, in particular, population, fauna, flora, soil, water, air,
climatic factors, material assets, including the architectural and archaeological
heritage, landscape and the inter-relationship between the above factors.
A description of the likely significant effects of the proposed project on the
environment resulting from:
− the existence of the project,
− the use of natural resources – specific consumptions,
− the emission of pollutants, the creation of nuisances and the elimination of waste,
and the description by the developer of the forecasting methods used to assess the
effects on the environment.
A description of the measures envisaged to prevent, reduce and where possible offset
any significant adverse effects on the environment
A non-technical summary of the information provided under the above headings.
An indication of any difficulties (technical deficiencies or lack of know-how)
encountered by the developer in compiling the required information.
Besides, depending on the scope defined in the pre-feasibility report some pre-feasibility
reports are based on various studies and data collection and addresses in detail the
concern as technical & economical analysis and detailed feasibility level design of
equipment, power optimization, transmission, economic, financial, social and
environmental investigations, cost estimates with detailed bill of quantities (BOQ). The
components identified here focuses on the requirements of Scoping for EIA study in order
to define the ToR for EIA studies. Additional points which may be covered in pre-
feasibility report besides the points discussed above are listed in Annexure IX.
4.3.2 Guidance for providing information in Form 1
The information given in specifically designed pre-feasibility report for this

developmental activity may also be availed for filling Form 1.
Form 1 is designed to help users identify the likely significant environmental effects of
proposed projects during scoping. There are two stages for providing information under
two columns:
First - identifying the relevant project activities from the list given in column 2 of
Form 1. Start with the checklist of questions set out below and complete Column 3
by answering:
− Yes - if the activity is likely to occur during implementation of the project;
− No - if it is not expected to occur;
− May be - if it is uncertain at this stage whether it will occur or not.

Second - For each activity for which the answer in Column 3 is “Yes” the next step is
to refer to the fourth column which quantifies the volume of activity which could be
judged as significant impact on the local environmental characteristics, and identify
the areas that could be affected by that activity during construction /operation /
decommissioning of the project. The Form 1 requires information within 15 km
around the project, whereas actual study area for EIA studies will be as prescribed by
respective EAC/SEAC. Information will be needed about the surrounding VECs in
order to complete this Form 1.
4.3.3 Identification of appropriate valued environmental components
VECs are components of the natural resources and human world that are considered
valuable and are likely to be affected by the project activities. Value may be attributed
for economic, social, environmental, aesthetic or ethical reasons. VECs represent the
investigative focal point for further EIA process. The indirect and/or cumulative effects
can be concerned with indirect, additive or even synergistic effects due to other projects
or activities or even induced developments on the same environmental components as
would be considered direct effects. But such impacts tend to involve larger scale VECs
such as within entire region, river basins or watersheds; and, broad social and economic
VECs such as quality of life and the provincial economy. Once VECs are identified then
appropriate indicators are selected for impact assessments on the respective VECs.
4.3.4 Methods for identification of impacts
There are number of factors which will influence the approach adopted for the assessment
of direct, indirect, cumulative impacts, etc. for a particular project. The method should be
practical and suitable for the project given the data, time and financial resources available.
However, the method adopted should be able to provide a meaningful conclusion from
which it would be possible to develop, where necessary, mitigation measures and
monitoring. Key points to consider when choosing the method(s) include:
Nature of the impact(s)

Availability and quality of data
Availability of resources (time, finance and staff)
The method chosen should not be complex, but should aim at presenting the results in a
way that can be easily understood by the developer, decision maker and the public. A
comparative analysis of major impact identification methods is given in the following
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1: Advantages and Disadvantages of Impact Identification Methods
Description Advantages Disadvantages

Checklists Annotate the Simple to Do not
environmental features understand and use distinguish
that need to be addressed Good for site between direct
when identifying the selection and and indirect
impacts of activities in the priority setting impacts
project Simple ranking and Do not link action
weighting and impact
The process of
incorporating
values can be
controversial
Matrices Grid like table that Link action to Difficult to
identify the interaction impact distinguish direct
between project activities Good method for and indirect
(along one axis) and displaying EIA impacts
environmental results Significant
characteristics (along potential for
other axis) double-counting
Entries are made in the of impacts
cells which highlights
impact severity in the
form of symbols or
numbers or descriptive
comments
Networks Illustrate cause effect Link action to Can become very
relationship of project impact complex if used
activities and Useful in beyond simplified
environmental simplified form for version
characteristics checking for
Useful in identifying second order
secondary impacts impacts
Useful for establishing Handles direct and
impact hypothesis and indirect impacts
other structured science
based approaches to EIA
Overlays Maps the impacts Easy to understand Address only
spatially and display them Good to display direct impacts
pictorially method Do not address
Useful for comparing site Good siting tool impact duration
and planning alternatives or probability
for routing linear
developments
Can address cumulative
Description Advantages Disadvantages

effects
Information incentive
GIS Maps the impacts Easy to understand Do not address
spatially and display them Good to display impact duration
pictorially method or probability
Useful for comparing site Good siting tool Heavy reliance on
and planning alternatives Excellent for knowledge and
for routing linear impact data
developments identification and Often complex
Can address cumulative analysis and expensive
effects
Information incentive
Expert Assist diagnosis, problem Excellent for Heavy reliance on
System solving and decision impact knowledge and
making identification and data
Needs inputs from user by analysis Often complex
answering systematically Good for and expensive
developed questions to experimenting
identify impacts and
determine their
mitigability and
significance
Information intensive,
high investment methods
of analysis
The project team made an attempt to construct an impact matrix considering major project
activities (generic operations) and stage-specific likely impacts which is given in Table 4-
2.
While the impact matrix is each project-specific, Table 4-2 may facilitate the stakeholders
in identifying a set of components and phase-specific project activities for determination
of likely impacts. However, the location-specific concerns may vary from case to case,
therefore, the components even without likely impacts are also retained in the matrix for
the location-specific reference.
1
Physical ENVIRONMENT
Soil
Components
Resources
land
3
Land especially
Fuels/ Electricity
stone, aggregates
Erosion Prevention
Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates

Construction material-
undeveloped or agricultural
Soil Quality/ Contamination
4
Land Acquirement
*
*
*
Site Preparation / Levelling including development of
5
plots, parking lots, site zoning

Phase I
Pre- Construction
Burning of wastes, refuse and cleared vegetation
*
Construction of Boundary Wall / Sepertion between
7
zones within Industrial Estates
*
8
Laying of Roads
9
Water Supply & Pipelines, Overhead tanks,etc.
4-12
10
Drainage Network
11
Laying of treated water disposal Pipe Lines

*
*
12
Power connection and laying of transmission lines

Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts
in addition
13
Laying of Telecom lines

14
Laying of Gas Distribution lines

*
Phase II
Civil works such as earth moving and building of

15
structures including temporary structures and

common facilities
16
Heavy Equipment operations

Infrastructure Development And Operation
17
Disposal of construction wastes

18
Influx of construction workers

*
*
19
Transportation of material and traffic movements

*
*
20
Greenbelt Development
21
Operation of Generator facilities

*
October 2009
22
Storage of chemicals/ flamables

In-case of individual Industries and common facilities, the matrix for significance of Impacts of the respective Guidance Manuals may please be referred
Phase I Phase II
Pre- Construction Infrastructure Development And Operation
in addition
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Water Interception or Alteration of

River Beds
Alteration of Hydraulic * *
Regime
Alteration of surface run-off
and interflow
Alteration of aquifers
Water quality * * * *
Temperature
Air Air quality * * * * * * * * * * *
Noise * * * * * * * * *
Climate * *
Terrestrial Effect on grass & flowers * * * * * * *

Flora
Effect on trees & shrubs * * * * *
Effect on farmland * * *
Endangered species *
Biological
Aquatic Habitat removal *

Biota
Contamination of habitats *
Reduction of aquatic biota *
Terrestrial Fragmentation of terrestrial * * *

Fauna habitats

4-13
Phase I Phase II
in addition
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Disturbance of habitats by * *
noise or vibration
Reduction of Biodiversity * *
Economy Creation of new economic * * * * * *

activities
Commercial value of * * * * * *
properties
Conflict due to negotiation * * * * * *
and/ compensation
payments
Generation of temporary and * * * * * * * * * *
permanent jobs
Effect on crops * *
Social
Reduction of farmland *
productivity
Income for the state and * * * * *
private sector
Electricity tariffs * *
Savings for consumers & * * * * *

private consumers
Savings in foreign currency *

for the state
Education Training in new *
technologies

4-14
Phase I Phase II
in addition
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Training in new skills to * *

workers
Public Political Conflicts * * * * *
Order
Unrest, Demonstrations & * * * * * * * * * *
Social conflicts
Infrastructu Conflicts with projects of * * * * * * * *

re and urban, commercial or
Services Industrial development
Security Increase in Crime *
and Safety
Accidents caused by * * * * * *
Health Temporary * * * * * *
Chronic *
Acute * *
Cultural Land use * * * * * * * * *
Recreation * * * * *
Aesthetics and human * * * * * * * * * * * *

interest
Cultural status *

4-15
Note:
1. The above table represents a model for likely impacts, which will have to be arrived case-to-
case basis considering VECs and significance analysis (Ref Section 2.9).
2. Project activities are shown as indicative. However, in Form 1 (application for EIA Clearance),
for any question for which answer is ‘Yes’, then the corresponding activity shall reflect in project
activities. Similarly ‘parameters’/’factors’ will also be changed within a component in order to
reflect the target species of prime concern in the receiving local environment.
4.3.5 Testing the significance of impacts
The following set of conditions may be used as the checklist for testing the significance of
the impacts and also to provide information in Column IV of Form 1.
Will there be a large change in environmental conditions?

Will new features be out-of-scale with the existing environment?
Will the effect be unusual in the area or particularly complex?
Will the effect extend over a large area?
Will there be any potential for trans-frontier impact?
Will many people be affected?
Will many receptors of other types (fauna and flora, businesses, facilities) be
affected?
Will valuable or scarce features or resources be affected?
Is there a risk that environmental standards will be breached?
Is there a risk that protected sites, areas, features will be affected?
Is there a high probability of the effect occurring?
Will the effect continue for a long time?
Will the effect be permanent rather than temporary?
Will the impact be continuous rather than intermittent?
If it is intermittent will it be frequent rather than rare?
Will the impact be irreversible?
Will it be difficult to avoid, or reduce or repair or compensate for the effect?
For each “Yes” answer in column 3, the nature of effects and reasons for it should be
recorded in the column 4. The questions are designed so that an “Yes” answer in column
3, will generally point towards the need for analyzing for the significance and
requirement for conducting impact assessment for the effect.
4.3.6 Terms of reference for EIA studies
For any common facilities such as CETPs, municipal solid waste management, common
incinerators, TSDFs, coming-up as a part of the IEs, then respective developmental
activity-specific guidance points may be considered. Besides, the ToR for EIA studies for
IEs may include, but may not be limited to the following:
1. Executive summary of the project – giving a prima facie idea of the objectives of the
proposal, use of resources, justification, etc. In addition, it should provide a
compilation of EIA report, EMP and the post-project monitoring plan in brief.

4-16
Operational Aspects of EIA
Project description
2. Details of the industries, for which the estate is being planned and their proposed
capacities of installation, if available. In the absence of complete details, indicate the
type of industries and capacity being considered.
3. Land requirement for the project including the peripheral greenbelt inside the
boundary.
4. Justification for selecting the proposed size of the IEs.
5. Details on strategy being followed for development of IE.
6. Layout map of estate indicating processing zones, admin area, roads, plots, green belt,
common utilities area, etc., shall be shown along with contour map. Landscape plan
including open spaces may be described.
7. All the coordinates of the IE site to be demarcated on the topographical sheet.
8. Classify the proposed industries based on their pollution potential to the extent
possible i.e., A1 to A4 categories for air pollution and W1 to W4 categories for water
pollution - CPCB Guidance may be referred for classification
9. Backward and forward linkages of the IEs (availability of input resources and markets
for the products / by-products and anticipated benefits for the regional development).
10. Details of Infrastructure Development within the IE and in the region.
11. Details on known industrial activity-specific proposed processes, resource
consumption and rejects assessment.
12. Details on estimated quantity of fuel required, fuel type, nature, source and
transportation.
13. Details on estimated water balance taking into account conservation measures, reuse
and recycling of treated effluents.
14. Individual and/or common facilities for waste collection, treatment, recycling and
disposal (all effluent, emission and refuse including MSW, and hazardous wastes)
15. Commitment from the concerned authorities regarding availability of power, water
and sewerage network.
16. Details of Solid Waste management including arrangements for hazardous waste
management and e-waste.
17. Details on provisions made for safety in storage of materials, products and wastes.
18. Details on use of local building materials. The provisions of fly ash Notification
should be kept in view.
19. Detailed plan of treated water disposal, reuse and utilization/management.
20. In case of site leveling involving quarrying, details thereof.
21. Any litigation pending against the project and /or any direction /order passed by any
Court of Law against the project/site, if so, details thereof.
Description of the environment
22. The project study area for EIA studies include 10 km radius from the boundary of the
proposed IE.

4-17
23. Land use of study area should include data about the residential/ institutional/nearest
village/ township/ locality/ housing society, etc., based on the satellite imagery.
24. Topography of the area clearly indicating the presence of pits deeper than one meter,
if any. If these pits require to be filled in, details of filling material to be used,
quantity required, its source, mode of transport, etc., shall be provided.
25. Anticipated pollution loads from each of the known composition of industrial units.
Cumulative wastewater quantity and pollution load, point source–specific details for
air pollutants and their loads, total solid/hazardous waste generation etc.
26. Details of rainwater harvesting and how it will be used in the IE & outfall.
27. Baseline data of the project area and the area within a 10 km radius with respect to
different components of environment viz. air, noise, water, land, and biology and
socio-economic may be collected as per the guidance provided in Section 4.4.2 of the
Manual.
28. Identification of existing potential sources of pollution in the study area.
29. Present and projected population; present and proposed land use; planned
development activities, issues relating to squatting and relocation, community
structure, employment, distribution of income, goods and services; recreation; public
health and safety; cultural peculiarities, aspirations and attitudes shall be explored in
study.
30. Details regarding availability of social infrastructure and future projections, details of
facilities such as sanitation, fuel, restroom etc. to be provided to the labour force
during construction as well as to the casual workers including truck drivers during
operation phase.
31. Detailed Study of the hydrological and geo-hydrological conditions of the project
area including a contour plan indicating slopes and showing drainage pattern and
outfall.
32. Information regarding surface hydrology and water regime and impact of the same, if
any due to the project.
33. Site-specific meteorological data of one season and secondary data for future
predictions.
34. Examine soil characteristics, topography, rainfall pattern and soil erosion.
35. Water quality of nearby River, if any, Source of water supply and nearby water ponds
shall be analyzed.
36. Climatic conditions of the study area shall be monitored for hourly wind speed, wind
direction, relative humidity, ambient dry and wet bulb temperatures and precipitation.
37. Ambient Air Quality (AAQ) data (except monsoon) of one complete season along
with the monitoring dates. The parameters to be covered shall include SPM, RSPM,
SO2, NOx (ground level). The location of the monitoring stations should be decided
in such a way that the pre-dominant downwind direction, population zone and
sensitive receptors including reserved forests are considered. There should be at least
one monitoring station in the upwind direction and one in down-wind direction where
maximum GLC falls.
38. Fuel analysis to be provided (sulphur, ash content and mercury). Details of auxiliary
fuel, if any including its quantity, quality, storage, etc., should also be given.
39. Noise level monitoring data from at least 15 locations within the study area.

4-18
40. Details of groundwater quality in and around the IE.

41. Examine entry/exit of the project including the crossings from the highway and
provision of service roads on the basis of traffic density studies and analysis.
42. Examine water quality with reference to Persistent Organic Pollutants, if relevant.
43. If ecologically sensitive attributes fall with in a 10 km radius of the project boundary,
proponent shall describe the sensitivity (distance, area and significance) and propose
the additional points based on significance for review and acceptance by the EAC/
SEAC. Ecological sensitive attributes include:
−National parks
−Wild life sanctuaries Game reserve
−Tiger reserve/elephant reserve/turtle nesting ground
−Breeding grounds
−Core zone of biosphere reserve
−Habitat for migratory birds
−Mangrove area
−Areas with threatened (rare, vulnerable, endangered) flora/fauna
−Protected corals
−Wetlands
−Zoological gardens
−Gene Banks
−Reserved forests
−Protected forests
−Any other closed/protected area under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, any
other area locally applicable
44. If any incompatible land use attributes fall within a 10 km radius of the project
boundary, proponent shall describe the sensitivity (distance, area and significance)
and propose the additional points based on significance for review and acceptance by
the EAC/SEAC. Incompatible land use attributes include:
−Public water supply areas from rivers/surface water bodies, from ground water
−Scenic areas/tourism areas/hill resorts
−Religious places, pilgrim centers that attract over 10 lakh pilgrims a year
−Protected tribal settlements (notified tribal areas where industrial activity is not
permitted)
− Monuments of national significance, World Heritage Sites
− Cyclone, Tsunami prone areas (based on last 25 years);
− Airport areas
− Any other feature as specified by the State or local government and other features
as locally applicable, including prime agricultural lands, pastures, migratory
corridors, etc.
45. If the location falls in Valley, specific issues connected to the natural resources
management shall be studied and presented.
46. If the location falls in CRZ area: A CRZ map duly authenticated by one of the
authorized agencies demarcating LTL, HTL, CRZ area, location of the project and
associate facilities w.r.t. CRZ, coastal features such as mangroves, if any. The route
of the pipeline, conveyor system etc., passing through CRZ, if any, should also be
demarcated. The recommendations of the State Coastal Management Authority for
the activities to be taken up in the CRZ should also be provided.

4-19
– Provide the CRZ map in 1:10000 scale in general cases and in 1:5000 scale for
specific observations.
– Impact of the activities to be taken up in the CRZ area including jetty and
desalination plant, etc., should be integrated into the EIA report; however, action
should be taken to obtain separate clearance from the competent Authority as
may be applicable to such activities.
– Capital quantity of dredging material, disposal and its impact on aquatic life.
– Fisheries study should be done w.r.t. Benthos and Marine organic material and
coastal fisheries.
Anticipated environmental impacts and mitigation measures
47. Anticipated environmental impacts that require specific studies for significance are
given in impact matrix (Table 4-2 may be referred). Tools as given in Section 4.4.3
of the Manual may be used for the assessment of environmental impacts.
48. Examine in detail the proposed site with reference to possible impact of infrastructure
covering water supply, pipelines, roads, storm water drainage, sewerage, power,
temporary waste storage facilities, treated wastewater disposal (land/sewer/surface
water bodies), common facilities, etc.
49. Environmental condition scenarios shall be developed based on industrial activities
and pollution potentials.
50. In case of any scheduled fauna, conservation plan should be provided.
51. Details of traffic density vis-à-vis impact on the ambient air.
52. Impact of the developmental activity on drainage of the area and the surroundings.
53. Impact of the project on the AAQ of the area. Details of the model used and the input
data used for modeling should also be provided. The air quality contours may be
plotted on a location map showing the location of project site, habitation nearby,
sensitive receptors, if any. The wind roses should also be shown on this map.
54. Mathematical modeling for calculating the dispersion of air pollutants and ground
level concentration along with emissions from boilers
55. Cumulative impact on regional supportive capacity shall be studied in terms of
population density, water supply, sewerage, storm water drainage, power supply,
educational facilities, medical facilities, public transport, traffic, housing for EWS,
and community facilities, etc.
56. Details on positive and negative impacts, direct and indirect impacts, induced
impacts.
57. Project activities and impacts shall be represented in matrix form with separate
matrices for pre and post mitigation scenarios.
58. Traffic management plan including parking and loading/unloading areas may be
described. Traffic survey should be carried out on week days and weekends and also
analyze the anticipated traffic increase.
59. Odour mitigation plan may be described. Also make provision of green cover as a
measure for mitigation of dust and noise and buffer between habitation and industry.
60. Rain water harvesting proposals should be made with due safeguards for groundwater
quality. Maximize recycling of water and utilization of rain water.

4-20
61. Temporary plans for the housing of construction labour within the site with all
necessary infrastructure and facilities such as fuel for cooking, mobile toilets, mobile
Sewage Treatment Plant (STP), safe drinking water, medical health care, crèche, etc.
62. Proposed measures for occupational safety and health of the workers.
63. Impact of the project on local infrastructure of the area such as road network and
whether any additional infrastructure would need to be constructed and the agency
responsible for the same with time frame.
64. Details of greenbelt including details of species, width of plantation, planning
schedule, etc. within the boundary around the IE.
Analysis of alternative resources and technologies
65. Comparison of alternate sites considered and the reasons for selecting the proposed
site. Conformity of the site with the prescribed guidelines in terms of CRZ, river,
highways, railways, etc.
66. Evaluate alternative disposal modes of effluent and solid wastes, from the point of
view of disposal points and associated impacts.
67. All kind of resources both renewable and non-renewable shall be taken into account.
68. Details on improved technologies.
Environmental monitoring program
69. Proposed post-project monitoring programme to ensure compliance to the approved

Management Plan including administrative and technical organizational structure.
70. Appropriate monitoring network has to be designed and proposed for regulatory
compliance and to assess the residual impacts, if any.
Additional studies
71. The historical importance of the area shall also be examined in the study. While this
analysis is being conducted, it is expected that an assessment of public perception of
the proposed development be conducted.
72. Describe the application of industrial ecology concept for planning of IEs. Explore
possibility of utilizing waste of one unit as raw material for the other units.
73. Public hearing should be conducted as per the prescribed procedure.
74. Points identified in the Public hearing (if applicable) and commitment of the project
proponent to the same. Detailed action plan addressing the issues raised, and the
details of necessary allocation of funds shall be provided.
75. Details on social impact assessment.
76. Risk assessment and corresponding on-site and off-site emergency management
plans.
77. Specific chemical emergency response and proposed rescue system.
78. Details on corporate social responsibility proposal.

4-21
Environmental management plan
79. EMP devised to mitigate the adverse impacts of the project should be provided along
with item-wise cost of its implementation (Capital and recurring costs).
Note:
Above points shall be adequately addressed in the EIA report at corresponding chapters, in
addition to the contents given in the reporting structure (Table: 4-7).
4.4 Environmental Impact Assessment
The generic approach for accomplishing EIA studies is shown in Figure 4.3. Each stage is
discussed, in detail in subsequent sections.
Figure 4-3: Approach for EIA Study
4.4.1 EIA team
The success of a multi-functional activity like an EIA primarily depends on constitution

of a right team at the right time (preferable at the initial stages of an EIA) in order to
assess the significant impacts (direct, indirect as well as cumulative impacts).
The professional Team identified for a specific EIA study should consist of qualified and
experienced professionals from various disciplines in order to address the critical aspects
identified for the specific project. Based on the nature and the environmental setting,
following professionals may be identified for EIA studies:

4-22
Environmental management specialist/Environmental regulator/Environmental

planner
Air & Noise quality expert
Occupational Health expert
Geology / Geo – hydrology specialist
Ecologist
Transportation specialist
Safety & Health specialist
Social scientist
Organic Chemistry specialist
Agronomy specialist
Irrigation & flood control expert
Mineral Exploration & beneficiation expert
Chemical Engineer
Marine Engineer
Metallurgical Engineer
Civil Engineer, etc.
4.4.2 Baseline quality of the environment
EIA Notification 2006 specifies that an EIA Report should contain a description of the
existing environment that would be or might be affected directly or indirectly by the
proposed project. Environmental Baseline Monitoring (EBM) is a very important stage of
EIA. On one hand EBM plays a very vital role in EIA and on the other hand it provides
feedback about the actual environmental impacts of a project. EBM, during the
operational phase, helps in judging the success of mitigation measures in protecting the
environment. Mitigation measures, in turn are used to ensure compliance with
environmental standards, and to facilitate the needed project design or operational
changes.
The description of the existing environment should include the natural, cultural, socio-
economic systems and their interrelationships. The intention is not to describe all baseline
conditions, but to focus the collection and description of baseline data on those VECs that
are important and are likely to be affected by the proposed industrial activity.
4.4.2.1 Objective of EBM in the EIA context
The term ‘baseline’ refers to conditions existing before development. EBM studies are
carried out to:
identify environmental conditions which might influence project design decisions

(e.g., site layout, structural or operational characteristics);
identify sensitive issues or areas requiring mitigation or compensation;
provide input data to analytical models used for predicting effects;
provide baseline data against which the results of future monitoring programs can be
compared.
At this stage of EIA process, the EBM is primarily discussed in the context of first
purpose wherein the feedback from EBM programs may be used to:

4-23
determine the available assimilative capacity of different environmental components

within the designated impact zone and whether more or less stringent mitigation
measures are needed; and
improve the predictive capability of EIAs.
There are many institutional, scientific, quality control, and fiscal issues that must be
addressed in the implementation of an environmental monitoring program. Careful
consideration of these issues in the design and planning stages will help avoid many of
the pitfalls associated with environmental monitoring programs. Such major issues are as
under:
4.4.2.2 Environmental monitoring network design
Monitoring refers to the collection of data through a series of repetitive measurements of

environmental parameters (or, more generally, to a process of systematic observation).
The environmental quality monitoring programme design will be dependent upon the
monitoring objectives specified for the selected area of interest. Types of monitoring and
network design considerations are discussed in Annexure X.
4.4.2.3 Baseline data generation
List of important physical environmental components and indicators of EBM are given in
Table 4-3.
Table 4-3: List of Important Physical Environment Components

and Indicators of EBM
Environmental Component Environmental Indicators

Climatic variables Rainfall patterns – mean, mode, seasonality
Temperature patterns
Extreme events
Climate change projections
Prevailing wind - direction, speed, anomalies
Stability conditions and mixing height
Geology Underlying rock type
Surgical material
Geologic structures (faults etc.)
Geologic resources (minerals, etc.)
Topography Slope form
Landform and terrain analysis
Specific landform types
Coastal dynamics and Wave patterns
morphology Currents
Shoreline morphology – near shore, foreshore
Sediment – characteristics and transport
Soil Type and characteristics
Porosity and permeability
Sub-soil permeability
Run-off rate
Effective depth (inches/centimeters)
Inherent fertility
Suitability for method of sewage disposal

4-24
Environmental Component Environmental Indicators

Drainage Surface hydrology
Drainage network
Rainfall runoff relationships
Hydrogeology
Groundwater characteristics – springs, etc.
Water quality Terrestrial - rivers, lakes, ponds, gullies
Coastal
Air quality Ambient
Respirable
Airshed importance
Odour levels
Noise
Hazardous waste
Guidance for assessment of baseline components and attributes describing sampling

network, sampling frequency, method of measurement is given in Annexure XI.
Infrastructure requirements for EBM
In addition to devising a monitoring network design and monitoring plans/program, it is

also necessary to ensure adequate resources in terms of staffing and skills, equipment,
training, budget, etc., for its implementation. Besides assigning institutional
responsibility, reporting requirements, QA/QC plans and its enforcement capability are
essential. A monitoring program that does not have an infrastructural support and QA/QC
component will have little chance of success.
Defining data statistics/analyses requirements
The data analyses to be conducted are dictated by the objectives of the environmental
monitoring program. The statistical methods used to analyze the data should be described
in detail prior to data collection. This is important because repetitive observations are
recorded in time and space. Besides, the statistical methods could also be chosen so that
uncertainty or error estimates in the data can be quantified. For e.g., statistical methods
useful in an environmental monitoring program include: 1) frequency distribution
analysis; 2) analysis of variance; 3) analysis of covariance; 4) cluster analysis; 5) multiple
regression analysis; 6) time series analysis; 7) the application of statistical models (ADB-
Green, 1979).
Use of secondary data
The EBM program for EIA can at best address temporal and/or spatial variations limited
to a limited extent because of cost implications and time limitations. Therefore analysis
of all available information or data is essential to establish the regional profiles. So all the
relevant secondary data available for different environmental components should be
collated and analyzed.

4-25
To facilitate stakeholders, IL&FS Ecosmart Ltd. made an attempt to compile the list of
information required for EIA studies and the sources of secondary data, which are given
in Annexure XIIA and Annexure XIIB.
4.4.3 Impact prediction tools
The scientific and technical credibility of an EIA relies on the ability of the EIA
practitioners to estimate the nature, extent, and magnitude of change in environmental
components that may result from project activities. Information about predicted changes
is needed for assigning impact significance, prescribing mitigation measures, and
designing and developing EMPs and monitoring programs. The more accurate the
predictions, the more confident the EIA practitioner will be in prescribing specific
measures to eliminate or minimize the adverse impacts of development project.
Choice of models/methods for impact predictions in respect of each of air, noise, water,
land, biological environment and socio-economic aspects are precisely tabulated in
Annexure XIII.
4.4.4 Significance of the impacts
Evaluating the significance of environmental effects is perhaps the most critical

component of impact analysis. More than other components, however, the interpretation
of significance is also a contentious process. The interpretation of significance bears
directly on the subsequent EIA process and also during environmental clearance on
project approvals and condition setting. At an early stage, it also enters into screening and
scoping decisions on what level of assessment is required and which impacts and issues
will be addressed.
Impact significance is also a key to choosing among alternatives. In sum, the attribution
of significance continues throughout the EIA process, from scoping to EIS review, in a
gradually narrowing “cone of resolution” in which one stage sets up the next. But at this
stage it is the most important as better understanding and quantification of impact
significance is required.
One common approach is based on determination of the significance of predicted changes

in the baseline environmental characteristics and compares these with reference to
regulatory standards, objective criteria and similar ‘thresholds’ as eco-sensitivity, cultural
/religious values. Often, these are outlined in guidance. A better test proposed by the
CEAA (1995) is to determine if ‘residual’ environmental effects are adverse, significant,
and likely (given under). But at this stage, the practice of formally evaluating significance
of residual impacts, i.e., after predicting the nature and magnitude of impacts based on
before-versus-after-project comparisons, and identifying measures to mitigate these
effects is not being followed in a systematic way.
i. Step 1: Are the environmental effects adverse?
Criteria for determining if effects are “adverse” include:
effects on biota health

effects on rare or endangered species
reductions in species diversity
habitat loss

4-26
transformation of natural landscapes

effects on human health
effects on current use of lands and resources for traditional purposes by aboriginal
persons; and
foreclosure of future resource use or production
ii. Step 2: Are the adverse environmental effects significant?
Criteria for determining ‘significance’ is to judge that the impacts:
are extensive over space or time

are intensive in concentration or proportion to assimilative capacity
exceed environmental standards or thresholds
do not comply with environmental policies, land use plans, sustainability strategy
adversely and seriously affect ecologically sensitive areas
adversely and seriously affect heritage resources, other land uses, community lifestyle
and/or indigenous peoples traditions and values
iii. Step 3: Are the significant adverse environmental effects likely?
Criteria for determining ‘likelihood’ include:
probability of occurrence, and

scientific uncertainty
4.5 Social Impact Assessment
Social Impact Assessment (SIA) is an instrument used to analyze social issues and solicit
stakeholder views for the design of projects. SIA helps in making the project responsive
to social development concerns, including the options that enhance benefits for poor and
vulnerable people while mitigating risk and adverse impacts. It analyzes distributional
impacts of intended project benefits on different stakeholder groups, and identifies
differences in assets and capabilities to access the project benefits.
The scope and depth of the SIA should be determined by the complexity and importance
of the issues studied, taking into account the skills and resources available. However,
SIA may include following:
Description of the socio-economic, cultural and institutional profile
Conduct a rapid review of available sources of information to describe the socio-

economic, cultural and institutional interface in which the project operates.
Socio-economic and cultural profile: Describe the most significant social, economic and
cultural features that differentiate social groups in the project area. Describe their
different interests in the project, and their levels of influence. In particular, explain any
particular effects the project may have on the poor and underprivileged. Identify any
known conflicts among groups that may affect project implementation.
Institutional profile: Describe the institutional environment; consider both the presence
and function of public, private and civil society institutions relevant to the operation. Are
there important constraints within existing institutions e.g. disconnect between

4-27
institutional responsibilities and the interests and behaviors of personnel within those
institutions? Or are there opportunities to utilize the potential of existing institutions, e.g.
private or civil society institutions, to strengthen implementation capacity.
Legislative and regulatory considerations
To review laws and regulations governing the project’s implementation and the access of
poor and excluded groups to goods, services and opportunities provided by the project. In
addition, review the enabling environment for public participation and development
planning. SIA should build on strong aspects of the legal and regulatory systems to
facilitate program implementation and identify weak aspects while recommending
alternative arrangements.
Key social issues
SIA provides the baseline information for designing the social development strategy. The
analysis should determine what the key social and Institutional issues are in relation to
project objectives; identify the key stakeholder groups in this context and determine how
relationships between stakeholder groups will affect or be affected by the project; and
identify expected social development outcomes and actions proposed to achieve those
outcomes.
Data collection and methodology
Describe the design and methodology for the social analysis. In this regard:
Build on existing data;

Clarify the units of analysis for the social assessment: intra-household, household
level, as well as communities/settlements and other relevant social aggregations on
which data is available or will be collected for analysis;
Choose appropriate data collection and analytical tools and methods, employing
mixed methods wherever possible; mixed methods include a mix of quantitative and
qualitative methods.
Strategy to achieve social development outcomes
Identify the likely social development outcomes of the project and propose a Social
development strategy, including recommendations for institutional arrangements to
achieve them, based on the findings of the social assessment. The social development
strategy could include measures:
that strengthen social inclusion by ensuring that both poor and excluded groups and
intended beneficiaries are included in the benefit stream and in access to opportunities
created by the project
that empower stakeholders through their participation in the design and
implementation of the project, their access to information, and their increased voice
and accountability (i.e. a participation framework); and
that enhance security by minimizing and managing likely social risks and increasing
the resilience of intended beneficiaries and affected persons to socioeconomic shocks

4-28
Implications for analysis of alternatives
Review the proposed approaches for the project, and compare them in terms of their
relative impacts and social development outcomes. Consider what implications the
findings of the social assessment might have on those approaches. Should some new
components be added to the approach, or other components reconsidered or modified?
If the SIA and consultation process indicate that alternative approaches are likely to have
better development outcomes, such alternatives should be described and considered,
along with the likely budgetary and administrative effects these changes might have.
Recommendations for project design and implementation arrangements
Provide guidance to project management and other stakeholders on how to integrate

social development issues into project design and implementation arrangements. As much
as possible, suggest specific action plans or implementation mechanisms to address
relevant social issues and potential impacts. These can be developed as integrated or
separate action plans, for example, as Resettlement Action Plans, Indigenous Peoples
Development Plans, Community Development Plans, etc.
Developing a monitoring plan
Through the SIA process, a framework for monitoring and evaluation should be
developed. To the extent possible, this should be done in consultation with key
stakeholders, especially beneficiaries and affected people.
The framework shall identify expected social development indicators, establish

benchmarks, and design systems and mechanisms for measuring progress and results
related to social development objectives. The framework shall identify organizational
responsibilities in terms of monitoring, supervision, and evaluation procedures. Wherever
possible, participatory monitoring mechanisms shall be incorporated. The framework
should establish:
a set of monitoring indicators to track the progress achieved. The benchmarks and
indicators should be limited in number, and should combine both quantitative and
qualitative types of data. The indicators should include outputs to be achieved by the
social development strategy; indicators to monitor the process of stakeholder
participation, implementation and institutional reform;
indicators to monitor social risk and social development outcomes; and indicators to
monitor impacts of the project’s social development strategy. It is important to
suggest mechanisms through which lessons learned from monitoring and stakeholder
feedback can result in changes to improve the operation of the project. Indicators
should be of such a nature that results and impacts can be disaggregated by gender
and other relevant social groups;
Define transparent evaluation procedures. Depending on context, these may include a
combination of methods, such as participant observation, key informant interviews,
focus group discussions, census and socio-economic surveys, gender analysis,
Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA), Participatory Poverty Assessment (PPA)
methodologies, and other tools. Such procedures should be tailored to the special
conditions of the project and to the different groups living in the project area;
Estimate resource and budget requirements for monitoring and evaluation activities,

4-29
and a description of other inputs (such as institutional strengthening and capacity

building) needed to carry it out.
4.6 Risk Assessment and Disaster Management Plan
4.6.1 Risk assessment
Industrial accidents results in great personal and financial loss. Managing these
accidental risks in today’s environment is the concern of every industry including IEs,
because either real or perceived incidents can quickly jeopardize the financial viability of
a business. Many facilities involve various manufacturing processes that have the
potential for accidents which may be catastrophic to the plant, work force, environment,
or public.
The main objective of the risk assessment study is to propose a comprehensive but simple
approach to carry out risk analysis and conducting feasibility studies for industries and
planning and management of industrial prototype hazard analysis study in Indian context.
Risk analysis and risk assessment should provide details on Quantitative Risk
Assessment (QRA) techniques used world-over to determine risk posed to people who
work inside or live near hazardous facilities, and to aid in preparing effective emergency
response plans by delineating a Disaster Management Plan (DMP) to handle onsite and
offsite emergencies. Hence, QRA is an invaluable method for making informed risk-
based process safety and environmental impact planning decisions, as well as being
fundamental to any facility-siting decision-making. QRA whether, site-specific or risk-
specific for any plant is complex and needs extensive study that involves process
understanding, hazard identification, consequence modeling, probability data,
vulnerability models/data, local weather and terrain conditions and local population data.
QRA may be carried out to serve the following objectives.
Identification of safety areas

Identification of hazard sources
Generation of accidental release scenarios for escape of hazardous materials from the
facility
Identification of vulnerable units with recourse to hazard indices
Estimation of damage distances for the accidental release scenarios with recourse to
Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) analysis
Hazard and Operability studies (HAZOP) in order to identify potential failure cases of
significant consequences
Estimation of probability of occurrences of hazardous event through fault tree
analysis and computation of reliability of various control paths
Assessment of risk on the basis of above evaluation against the risk acceptability
criteria relevant to the situation
Suggest risk mitigation measures based on engineering judgement, reliability and risk
analysis approaches
Delineation / up-gradation of Disaster Management Plan (DMP).
Safety Reports: with external safety report/ occupational safety report.
The risk assessment report may cover the following in terms of the extent of damage with
resource to MCA analysis and delineation of risk mitigations measures with an approach
to DMP.

4-30
Hazard identification – identification of hazardous activities, hazardous materials,

past accident records, etc.
Hazard quantification – consequence analysis to assess the impacts
Risk Presentation
Risk Mitigation Measures
Disaster Management Plans
Figure 4-4: Risk Assessment – Conceptual Framework

Predictive methods for estimating risk should cover all the design intentions and
operating parameters to quantify risk in terms of probability of occurrence of hazardous
events and magnitude of its consequence. Table 4-4 shows the predictive models for risk
assessment.
Table 4-4: Choice of Models for Impact Predictions: Risk Assessment
Name Application Remarks
EFFECT Consequence Analysis for Heat load, press wave &

Visualization of accidental chemical toxic release exposure
release scenarios & its consequence neutral gas dispersion
Consequence Analysis for
WHAZAN Visualization of accidental chemical
release scenarios & its consequence
EGADIS Consequence Analysis for Dense gas dispersion
Visualization of accidental chemical
release scenarios & its consequence
HAZOP and Fault Tree For estimating top event probability Failure frequency data is
Assessment required
Pathways reliability and For estimating reliability of Markov models
protective system hazard equipments and protective systems
analysis
Vulnerability Exposure Estimation of population exposure Uses probit equation for
models population exposure
F-X and F-N curves Individual / Societal risks Graphical Representation

4-31
Figure 4-5: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance

4-32
A. Storage and handling of hazardous materials
Both the hazardous and non-hazardous material generated within the IEs shall be
temporarily accommodated in necessary units placed within the IE in line with the safety,
health and environmental standards.
The size of these temporary units would depend on the quantity and type of waste
Hazardous materials like asbestos, PCB, oils, fuels, etc. with appropriate storage
capacities are placed in the Estate following Hazardous Waste Management and Handling
Rules. In case of Radioactive wastes, the wastes shall be handled based on Rules for
Management of Radioactive Waste under AERB. Also, if gas cylinders must be stored in
the Estate, the Gas cylinders Rules under Explosives Act shall be followed. Later, these
materials must be disposed off at a centralized disposal facility with utmost care
following safety norms. Each Unit in the IEs should be facilitated with fire hydrant
system to handle fire hazards.
B. Hazard identification
Hazard is the characteristic of any system or process which has the potential for accident.
Identification of hazards, in the presence of any hazardous waste generating industries
within the IEs is of primary significance in the analysis, quantification and cost effective
control of accidents involving chemicals and process.
Hence, all the components of a system need to be thoroughly examined to assess their
potential for initiating or propagating an unplanned event/sequence of events, which can
be termed as an accident.
The typical methods for hazard identification employed are:
Identification of major hazardous units based on Manufacture, Storage and Import of

Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 of Government of India (as amended in 2000); and
Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and storage units based on
relative ranking technique, viz. Fire-Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI).
Hazardous substances may be classified into three main classes namely Flammable
substances, unstable substances and Toxic substances. Flammable substances require
interaction with air for their hazard to be realized. Under certain circumstances the
vapours arising from flammable substances when mixed with air may be explosive,
especially in confined spaces. However, if present in sufficient quantity such clouds may
explode in open air also. Unstable substances are liquids or solids, which may
decompose with such violence so as to give rise to blast waves. Besides, toxic substances
are dangerous and cause substantial damage to life when released into the atmosphere.
The ratings for a large number of chemicals based on flammability, reactivity and toxicity
have been given in NFPA Codes 49 and 345 M.
C. Hazard assessment and evaluation
A preliminary hazard analysis shall be carried out to identify the major hazards associated
with storages in the facility. This is followed by consequence analysis to quantify these
hazards. Finally the vulnerable zones are plotted for which risk reducing measures are
deduced and implemented.

4-33
Frequent causes of accidents
Fire and explosion: explosives, flammable materials

Being struck by falling objects
Caught in or compressed
Snapping of cables, ropes, chains, slings
Handling heavy objects
Electricity (electrocution)
Poor illumination
Falls from height inside industrial units or on the ground
Struck by moving objects
Slipping on wet surfaces
Sharp objects
Oxygen deficiency in confined spaces
Lack of PPEs, housekeeping practices, safety signs,
Hackles, hooks, chains
Cranes, winches, hoisting and hauling equipment;
Hazardous substances and wastes
Heavy and toxic metals (lead, mercury, cadmium, copper, zinc, etc.)
Organometallic substances (tributyltin, etc.)
Lack of hazard communication (storage, labelling, material safety data sheets)
Batteries, fire-fighting liquids
PCBs and PVC (combustion products)
Welding fumes
Volatile organic compounds (solvents)
Inhalation in confined and enclosed spaces
Physical hazards
Noise
Extreme temperatures
Vibration
Radiation (UV, radioactive materials)
Physical hazards
Noise
Extreme temperatures
Vibration
Radiation (UV, radioactive materials)
Mechanical Hazards
Trucks and transport vehicles

Scaffolding, fixed and portable ladders
Impact by tools, sharp-edged tools
Power-driven hand tools, saws, grinders and abrasive cutting wheels
Failure of machinery and equipment
Poor maintenance of machinery and equipment
Lack of safety guards in machines
Structural failure

4-34
Biological hazards
Toxic marine organisms (In case if the IEs are in Coastal Regions)
Risk of communicable diseases transmitted by pests, vermin, rodents, insects and
other animals that may infest in the IEs.
Animal bites
Vectors of infectious diseases (TB, malaria, dengue fever, hepatitis, respiratory
infections, others)
Ergonomic and psychosocial hazards
Repetitive strain injuries, awkward postures, repetitive and monotonous work,

excessive workload
Long working hours, shift work, night work, temporary employment
Mental stress, human relations (aggressive behaviour, alcohol and drug abuse,
violence)
Poverty, low wages, minimum age, lack of education and social environment
General concerns
Lack of safety and health training

Poor work organization
Inadequate housing and sanitation
Inadequate accident prevention and inspection
Inadequate emergency, first-aid and rescue facilities
Lack of medical facilities and social protection
4.6.2 Disaster management plan
A disaster is a catastrophic situation in which suddenly, people are plunged into

helplessness and suffering and, as a result, need protection, clothing, shelter, medical and
social care and other necessities of life.
The Disaster Management Plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of

environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage operations
in this same order of priorities. For effective implementation of the Disaster Management
Plan, it should be widely circulated and a personnel training is to be provided through
rehearsals/drills.
To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the plant or immediate vicinity
of the plant, a Disaster Management Plan has to be formulated and this planned
emergency document is called "Disaster Management Plan".
The objective of the Industrial Disaster Management Plan is to make use of the combined
resources of the plant and the outside services to achieve the following:
Effect the rescue and medical treatment of casualties;

Safeguard other people;

4-35
Minimize damage to property and the environment;

Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control;
Identify any dead;
Provide for the needs of relatives;
Provide authoritative information to the news media;
Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area;
Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent inquiry into the cause and
circumstances of the Emergency.
In effect, it is to optimize operational efficiency to rescue rehabilitation and render
medical help and to restore normalcy.
Disaster Management Plan should include Emergency Preparedness Plan, Emergency

Response Team, Emergency Communication, Emergency Responsibilities, Emergency
Facilities, and Emergency Actions
Emergency preparedness plan
Incidents, accidents and contingency preparedness should be accounted during ship

recycling process. This shall be a part of EMS. Emergency Preparedness Plan (EPP)
should be prepared following the national environmental Emergency plan and OSHA
guidelines. According to these guidelines, an environmental emergency plan would
essentially provide the following information:
Assignment of the duties and responsibilities among the authorities, participating

agencies, the response team and coordinators and/or those responsible for the
pollution incident;
Relationship with other emergency plans;
A reporting system that ensures rapid notification in the event of a pollution incident;
The establishment of a focal point for co-ordination and directions connected to the
implementation of the plan;
Response operations; should always cover these four phases:
– Discovery and alarm
– Evaluation, notification and plan invocation
– Containment and countermeasures
– Cleanup and disposal
Identification of expertise and response resources available for assistance for the
implementation of the plan;
Directions on the necessary emergency provisions applicable to the handling,
treatment or disposal of certain pollutants;
Link to the local community for assistance, if necessary;
Support measures, such as procedures for providing public information, carrying out
surveillance, issuing post incident reports, review and updating of the plan, and
periodic exercising of the plan.

4-36
Emergency response
Various industrial activities within the IE are always subjected to accidents and incidents
of many a kind. Therefore, a survey of potential incidents and accidents is to be carried
out. Based on this, a plan for response to incidents, injuries and emergencies should be
prepared. Response to emergencies should ensure that:
The exposure of workers should be limited as much as possible during the operation
Contaminated areas should be cleaned and if necessary disinfected
Limited impact on the environment at the extent possible.
Written procedures for different types of emergencies should be prepared and the entire
workforce should be trained in emergency response. All relevant emergency response
equipment should also be readily available.
With regard to dangerous spills, associated clean-up and fire-fighting operations should
be carried out by specially allocated and trained personnel.
Response team
It is important to setup an Emergency Organization. A senior executive who has control

over the affairs of the plant would be heading the Emergency Organization. He would be
designated at Site Controller. Manager (Safety) would be designated as the Incident
Controller. In the case of stores, utilities, open areas, which are not under the control of
the Production Heads, Senior Executive responsible for maintenance of utilities would be
designated as Incident Controller. All the Incident Controllers would be reporting to the
Site Controller.
Each Incident Controller organizes a team responsible for controlling the incidence with
the personnel under his control. Shift In-charge would be the reporting officer, who would
bring the incidence to the notice of the Incidence Controller and Site Controller.
Emergency Coordinators would be appointed who would undertake the responsibilities

like fire fighting, rescue, rehabilitation, transport and provide essential and support
services. For this purposes, Security In-charge, Personnel Department, Essential services
personnel would be engaged. All these personnel would be designated as Key personnel.
In each shift, electrical supervisor, electrical fitters, pump house in-charge, and other
maintenance staff would be drafted for emergency operations. In the event of power or
communication system failure, some of staff members in the office/facility would be
drafted and their services would be utilized as messengers for quick passing of
communications. All these personnel would be declared as essential personnel.
Response to injuries
Based on a survey of possible injuries, a procedure for response to injuries or exposure to

hazardous substances should be established. All staff should have a minimum of training
to such response and the procedure ought to include the following:
Immediate first aid, such as eye splashing, cleansing of wounds and skin, and
bandaging
Immediate reporting to a responsible designated person

4-37
If possible, retention of the item and details of its source for identification of possible
hazards
Rapid additional medical care from medical personnel
Medical surveillance
Recording of the incident
Investigation, determination and implementation of remedial action
It is vital that incident reporting should be straightforward so that reporting is actually
carried out.
Emergency communication
Whoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire, leakage etc. would
inform his immediate superior and Emergency Control Center. The person on duty in the
Emergency Control Center, would appraise the Site Controller. Site Controller verifies the
situation from the Incident Controller of that area or the Shift In-charge and takes a
decision about an impending On Site Emergency. This would be communicated to all the
Incident Controllers, Emergency Coordinators. Simultaneously, the emergency warning
system would be activated on the instructions of the Site Controller.
Emergency responsibilities
The responsibilities of the key personnel should be defined for the following:
Site controller
Incident controller
Emergency coordinator - rescue, fire fighting
Emergency coordinator-medical, mutual aid, rehabilitation, transport and
communication
Emergency coordinator - essential services
Employers responsibility
Emergency facilities
Emergency Control Center – with access to important personnel, telephone, fax, telex
facility, safe contained breathing apparatus, hand tools, emergency shut down
procedures, duties and contact details of key personnel and government agencies,
emergency equipments, etc.
Assembly Point – with minimum facilities for safety and rescue
Emergency Power Supply – connected with diesel generator, flame proof emergency
lamps, etc.
Fire Fighting Facilities – first aid fire fighting equipments, fire alarms, etc.
Location of wind Stock – located at appropriate location to indicate the direction of
wind for emergency escape
Emergency Medical Facilities – Stretchers, gas masks, general first aid, emergency
control room, breathing apparatus, other emergency medical equipment, ambulance
Emergency actions
Emergency Warning
Evacuation of Personnel

4-38
All Clear Signal

Public information and warning
Coordination with local authorities
Mutual aid
Mock drills
4.7 Mitigation Measures
The purpose of mitigation is to identify measures that safeguard the environment and the
community affected by the proposal. Mitigation is both a creative and practical phase of
the EIA process. It seeks to find the best ways and means of avoiding, minimizing and
remedying impacts. Mitigation measures must be translated into action in the correct way
and at the right time, if they are to be successful. This process is referred to as impact
management and takes place during project implementation. A written plan should be
prepared for this purpose, and includes a schedule of agreed actions. Opportunities for
impact mitigation will occur throughout the project cycle.
4.7.1 Important considerations for mitigation methods
The responsibility of project proponents to ‘internalize’ the full environmental costs of

development proposals is now widely accepted under “Polluter Pay” principle. In
addition, many proponents have found that good design and impact management can
result in significant savings applying the principles of cleaner production to improve their
environmental performance.
The predicted adverse environmental as well as social impacts for which mitigation
measures are required should be identified and briefly summarized along with cross
referencing them to the significance, prediction components of the EIA report or
other documentation.
Each mitigation measure should be briefly described with reference to the impact of
significances to which it relates and the conditions under which it is required (for
example, continuously or in the event of contingencies). These should also be cross-
referenced to the project design and operating procedures which elaborate on the
technical aspects of implementing the various measures.
Cost and responsibilities for mitigation and monitoring should be clearly defined,
including arrangements for co-ordination between the various authorities responsible
for mitigation.
The proponent can use the EMP to develop environmental performance standards and
requirements for the project site as well as supply chain. An EMP can be
implemented through EMS for the operational phase of the project.
Prior to selecting mitigation plans it is appropriate to study the mitigation alternatives for
cost-effectiveness, technical and socio-political feasibility. Such mitigation measures
could include:
avoiding sensitive areas such as eco-sensitive area e.g. fish spawning areas, dense
mangrove areas or areas known to contain rare or endangered species
adjusting work schedules to minimize disturbance
engineered structures such as berms and noise attenuation barriers
pollution control devices, such as scrubbers and electrostatic precipitators

4-39
changes in fuel feed, manufacturing, process, technology use, or waste management

practices, etc.
4.7.2 Hierarchy of elements of mitigation plan
Figure 4-6: Elements of Mitigation

Good EIA practice requires a relevant technical understanding of the issues and the
measures that work in the circumstances: The priority of selection of mitigation measures
should be in the order:
Step One: Impact avoidance
This step is most effective when applied at an early stage of project planning. It can be
achieved by:
not undertaking certain projects or elements that could result in adverse impacts
avoiding areas that are environmentally sensitive; and
putting in place the preventative measures to stop adverse impacts from occurring, for
example, release of water from a reservoir to maintain a fisheries regime.
Step Two: Impact minimization
This step is usually taken during impact identification and prediction to limit or reduce
the degree, extent, magnitude, or duration of adverse impacts. It can be achieved by:
scaling down or relocating the proposal;

redesigning elements of the project; and
taking supplementary measures to manage the impacts.
Step Three: Impact compensation
This step is usually applied to remedy unavoidable residual adverse impacts. It can be
achieved by:
rehabilitation of the affected site or environment, for example, by habitat

enhancement and restocking fish;
restoration of the affected site or environment to its previous state or better, as
typically required for mine sites, forestry roads and seismic lines; and

4-40
replacement of the same resource values at another location, for example, by wetland
engineering to provide an equivalent area to that lost to drainage or infill.
Important compensation elements
Resettlement Plans: Special considerations apply to mitigation of proposals that displace

or disrupt people. Certain types of projects, such as reservoirs and irrigation schemes and
public works, are known to cause involuntary resettlement. This is a contentious issue
because it involves far more than re-housing people; in addition, income sources and
access to common property resources are likely to be lost. Almost certainly, a
resettlement plan will be required to ensure that no one is worse off than before, which
may not be possible for indigenous people whose culture and lifestyle is tied to a locality.
This plan must include the means for those displaced to reconstruct their economies and
communities and should include an EIA of the receiving areas. Particular attention should
be given to indigenous, minority and vulnerable groups who are at higher risk from
resettlement.
In-kind compensation
When significant or net residual loss or damage to the environment is likely, in kind
compensation is appropriate. As noted earlier, environmental rehabilitation, restoration or
replacement have become standard practices for many proponents. Now, increasing
emphasis is given to a broader range of compensation measures to offset impacts and
assure the sustainability of development proposals. These include impact compensation
‘trading’, such as offsetting CO2 emissions by planting forests to sequester carbon.
4.7.3 Typical mitigation measures
For each identified significant impact, mitigation measures are required to be drawn, in
consultation with the project proponent and with due commitment, considered. Measures
need to be mentioned in order to ensure the impacts are within the acceptable range. Few
indicative mitigation measures are listed below, which needs to be developed for all the
possible impacts based on location specificity.
Table 4-5: Mitigation Measures for Construction Phase
Impacts Mitigation Steps
Erosion Windscreens, maintenance, and installation of ground cover

Installation of drainage ditches
Runoff and retention ponds
Minimize disturbances and scarification of the surface.
Deforestation Plant or create similar areas
Initiate a tree planning program in other areas
Donate land to conservationalist groups
Table 4-6: Mitigation Measures for Operation Phase
Impacts Mitigation steps
Dust pollution Wetting of roadways to reduce traffic dust and reentrained

particles
Installation of windscreens to breakup the wind flow
Burning of refuse on days when meteorological conditions

4-41
Impacts Mitigation steps

provide for good mixing and dispersion
Noise pollution Heavy duty muffler systems on heavy equipment
Limit certain activities
Water pollution and Channeling and retention of water to reduce erosion and situation
issues Collection and treatment of sewage and organic waste
Increased recycling and reuse of water
Use of biodegradable or otherwise readily treatable additives
Cooling ponds, towers and canals to reduce temperatures of
cooling water discharge
Neutralization and sedimentation of wastewater
Dewatering of sludges and appropriate disposal of solids
Use deep well injection below potable levels
Construct liners of ponds and solids waste disposal
Dilute water at point of discharge
Chemical discharges Develop spill prevention plans
and spills Develop traps and containment system and chemically treat
discharges on site
Biological Installation of systems to discourage nesting or perching of birds
in dangerous environments
Increased employee awareness to sensitive areas
Disruption of traffic Develop traffic plan that minimizes road use by workers
Upgrade roads and intersections
Worker exposure to Provide dust collector equipment
dust from ash and coal Maintain dust levels less than 10 mg/m3
Monitor for free silica content
Provide dust masks when levels are exceeded
Worker exposure to Maintain boilers properly
toxic gases leaking Monitor concentrations with levels not to exceed
from the boilers
Worker exposure to Maintain noise levels from below 90 dba
excessive noise Provide ear protection if in excess
Induced secondary Provide infrastructure plan and financial support for increased
development puts demands
increased demand on Construct facilities to reduce demands
infrastructure
4.8 Environmental Management Plan
A typical EMP shall be composed of the following:
1. summary of the potential impacts of the proposal

2. description of the recommended mitigation measures
3. statement of their compliance with relevant standards
4. allocation of resources and responsibilities for plan implementation
5. schedule of the actions to be taken
6. programme for surveillance, monitoring and auditing
7. contingency plan when impacts are greater than expected

4-42
Each of the above components are precisely discussed below:
Summary of impacts: The predicted adverse environmental and social impacts for which
mitigation measures are identified in the earlier sections to be briefly summarized with
cross referencing to the corresponding sections in the EIA report.
Description of mitigation measures: Each mitigation measure should be briefly

described with reference to the impact to which it relates and the conditions under which
it is required. These should be accompanied by, or referenced to, project design and
operating procedures, which elaborate on the technical aspects of implementing the
various measures.
Description of monitoring programme: Environmental monitoring refers to compliance

monitoring and residual impact monitoring. Compliance monitoring refers to meeting the
industry-specific statutory compliance requirements (Ref. Applicable National regulations
as detailed in Chapter 3).
Residual impact monitoring refers to monitoring of identified sensitive locations with

adequate number of samples and frequency. The monitoring programme should clearly
indicate the linkages between impacts identified in the EIA report, measurement
indicators, detection limits (where appropriate), and definition of thresholds that will
signal the need for corrective actions.
Institutional arrangements: Responsibilities for mitigation and monitoring should be

clearly defined, including arrangements for co-ordination between the various actors
responsible for mitigation. Details should be provided w.r.t the deployment of staff
(detailed organogram), monitoring network design, parameters to be monitored, analysis
methods, associated equipments etc.
Implementation schedule and reporting procedures: The timing, frequency and

duration of mitigation measure should be specified in an implementation schedule,
showing links with overall project implementation. Procedures to provide information on
the progress and results of mitigation and monitoring measures should also be clearly
specified.
Cost estimates and sources of funds: These should be specified for both the initial
investment and recurring expenses for implementing all measures contained in the EMP,
integrated into the total project costs, and factored into loan negotiation.
The EMP should contain commitments that are binding on the proponent in different
phases of project implementation i.e., pre-construction or site clearance, construction,
operation, decommissioning.
4.9 Reporting
Structure of the EIA report (Appendix III of the EIA Notification), applicable for IEs is
given in the Table 4.7. Each task prescribed in ToR shall be incorporated appropriately in
the contents in addition to the contents described in the table.

4-43
Table 4-7: Structure of EIA Report
S.NO EIA STRUCTURE CONTENTS

1. Introduction Purpose of the report
Identification of project & project proponent
Brief description of nature, size, location of the project and
its importance to the country, region
Scope of the study – details of regulatory scoping carried
out (As per ToR)
2. Project Description Condensed description of those aspects of the project
(based on project feasibility study), likely to cause
environmental effects. Details should be provided to give
clear picture of the following:
Type of project
Need for the project
Location (maps showing general location, specific
location, project boundary & project site layout)
Size or magnitude of operation (incl. Associated activities
required by or for the project)
Proposed schedule for approval and implementation
Technology and process description
Project description including drawings showing project
layout, components of project etc. Schematic
representations of the feasibility drawings which give
information important for EIA purpose
Description of mitigation measures incorporated into the
project to meet environmental standards, environmental
operating conditions, or other EIA requirements (as
required by the scope)
Assessment of new & untested technology for the risk of
technological failure
3. Description of the Study area, period, components & methodology
Environment Establishment of baseline for VECs, as identified in the
scope
Base maps of all environmental components
4. Anticipated Details of investigated environmental impacts due to
Environmental project location, possible accidents, project design, project
Impacts & construction, regular operations, final decommissioning or
Mitigation Measures rehabilitation of a completed project
Measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse
impacts identified

Irreversible and Irretrievable commitments of
environmental components
Assessment of significance of impacts (Criteria for
determining significance, assigning significance)
Mitigation measures
5. Analysis of Incase, the scoping exercise results in need for
Alternatives alternatives:
(Technology & Site) Description of each alternative
Summary of adverse impacts of each alternative
Mitigation measures proposed for each alternative and
selection of alternative
6. Environmental Technical aspects of monitoring the effectiveness of
Monitoring Program mitigation measures (incl. measurement methodologies,

4-44
S.NO EIA STRUCTURE CONTENTS

frequency, location, data analysis, reporting schedules,
emergency procedures, detailed budget & procurement
schedules)
7. Additional Studies Public consultation
Risk assessment
Social impact assessment, R&R Action Plans
8. Project Benefits Improvements in the physical infrastructure
Improvements in the social infrastructure
Employment potential –skilled; semi-skilled and unskilled
Other tangible benefits
9. Environmental Cost If recommended at the Scoping stage
Benefit Analysis
10. EMP Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring that
mitigative measures are implemented and their
effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA
11. Summary & Overall justification for implementation of the project
Conclusion (This Explanation of how, adverse effects have been mitigated
will constitute the
summary of the EIA
Report)
12. Disclosure of The names of the Consultants engaged with their brief
Consultants engaged resume and nature of Consultancy rendered
4.10 Public Consultation
Public consultation refers to the process by which the concerns of local affected people
and others who have plausible stake in the environmental impacts of the project or
activity are ascertained.
Public consultation is not a decision taking process, but is a process to collect views
of the people having plausible stake. If the SPCB/Public agency conducting public
hearing is not convinced with the plausible stake, then such expressed views need not
be considered.
Public consultation involves two components, one is public hearing, and other one is
inviting written responses/objections through Internet/by post, etc., by placing the
summary of EIA report on the web site.
All Category A and Category B1 projects require public hearing except the following:
− Once environmental clearance is granted to an industrial estates/SEZs/EPZs etc.,
for a given composition (type and capacity) of industries, then individual units
will not require public hearing
− Expansion of roads and highways, which do not involve any further acquisition of
land.
− All building/ construction projects/ area development projects/townships
− All Category B2 projects
− All projects concerning national defense and security or involving other strategic
considerations as determined by the Central Government
Public consultation involves two components, one is public hearing, and other one is
inviting written responses/objections through Internet/by post, etc., by placing the
summary of EIA report on the web site.

4-45
Public hearing shall be carried out at the site or in its close proximity, district-wise,
for ascertaining concerns of local affected people.
Project proponent shall make a request through a simple letter to the
MemberSecretary of the SPCB or UTPCC to arrange public hearing.
Project proponent shall enclose with the letter of request, at least 10 hard copies and
10 soft copies of the draft EIA report including the summary EIA report in English
and local language prepared as per the approved scope of work, to the concerned
Authority.
Simultaneously, project proponent shall arrange to send, one hard copy and one soft
copy, of the above draft EIA report along with the summary EIA report to the
following Authorities within whose jurisdiction the project will be located:
− District magistrate(s)
− Zilla parishad and municipal corporation
− District industries office
− Concerned regional office of the MoEF/SPCB
Above mentioned Authorities except concerned prior environmental clearance
Authority (MoEF/SEIAA) shall arrange to widely publicize the draft EIA report
within their respective jurisdictions. They shall also make draft EIA report for
inspection electronically or otherwise to the public during normal hours till the public
hearing is over.
Concerned regulatory Authority (MoEF/SEIAA/UTEIA) shall display the summary
of EIA report on its website and also make full draft EIA report available for
reference at a notified place during normal office hours at their head office.
SPCB or UTPCC concerned shall make arrangements for giving publicity about the
project within the State/UT and make available the summary of draft EIA report for
inspection in select offices, public libraries. They shall also additionally make
available a copy of the draft EIA report to the above five authorities/offices as
mentioned above.
The MemberSecretary of the concerned SPCB or UTPCC shall finalize the date,
time and exact venue for the conduct of public hearing within seven days of the date
of the receipt of the draft EIA report from the project proponent and advertise the
same in one major National Daily and one Regional vernacular Daily.
A minimum notice period of 30 (thirty) days shall be provided to the public for
furnishing their responses.
No postponement of the date, time, venue of the public hearing shall be undertaken,
unless some untoward emergency situation occurs and only then on the
recommendation of the concerned District Magistrate the postponement shall be
notified to the public through the same National and Regional vernacular dailies and
also prominently displayed at all the identified offices by the concerned SPCB or
UTPCC
In the above exceptional circumstances fresh date, time and venue for the public
consultation shall be decided by the Member–Secretary of the concerned SPCB or
UTPCC only in consultation with the District Magistrate and notified afresh as per
the procedure.
The District Magistrate or his or her representative not below the rank of an
Additional District Magistrate assisted by a representative of SPCB or UTPCC, shall
supervise and preside over the entire public hearing process.

4-46
The SPCB or UTPCC shall arrange to video film the entire proceedings. A copy of
the videotape or a CD shall be enclosed with the public hearing proceedings while
forwarding it to the Regulatory Authority concerned.
The attendance of all those who are present at the venue shall be noted and annexed
with the final proceedings.
There shall be no quorum required for attendance for starting the proceedings.
Every person present at the venue shall be granted the opportunity to seek
information or clarifications on the project from the Applicant. The summary of the
public hearing proceedings accurately reflecting all the views and concerns expressed
shall be recorded by the representative of the SPCB or UTPCC and read over to the
audience at the end of the proceedings explaining the contents in the vernacular
language and the agreed minutes shall be signed by the District Magistrate or his or
her representative on the same day and forwarded to the SPCB/UTPCC concerned.
A statement of the issues raised by the public and the comments of the proponent
shall also be prepared in the local language and in English and annexed to the
proceedings.
The proceedings of the public hearing shall be conspicuously displayed at the office
of the Panchayats within whose jurisdiction the project is located, office of the
concerned Zilla Parishad, District Magistrate, and the SPCB or UTPCC. The SPCB or
UTPCC shall also display the proceedings on its website for general information.
Comments, if any, on the proceedings, may be sent directly to the concerned
regulatory authorities and the Applicant concerned.
The public hearing shall be completed within a period of 45 (forty five) days from
date of receipt of the request letter from the Applicant. Therefore the SPCB or
UTPCC concerned shall send the public hearing proceedings to the concerned
regulatory Authority within 8(eight) days of the completion of the public hearing.
The proponent may also directly forward a copy of the approved public hearing
proceedings to the regulatory Authority concerned along with the final EIA report or
supplementary report to the draft EIA report prepared after the public hearing and
public consultations.
Upon receipt of the same, the Authority will place executive summary of the report
on the website to invite responses from other concerned persons having a plausible
stake in the environmental aspects of the project or activity.
If SPCB/UTPCC is unable to conduct the public hearing in the prescribed time, the
Central Government incase of Category A projects and State Government in case of
Category B projects at the request of the SEIAA or project proponent can engage a
public agency for conducting the public hearing process within a further period of 45
days. The respective governments shall pay the appropriate fee to the public agency
for conducting public hearing.
A public agency means a non-profit making institution/ body such as
technical/academic institutions, government bodies not subordinate to the concerned
Authority.
If SPCB/Public Agency authorized for conducting public hearing informs the
Authority, stating that it is not possible to conduct the public hearing in a manner,
which will enable the views of the concerned local persons to be freely expressed,
then Authority may consider such report to take a decision that in such particular
case, public consultation may not have the component of public hearing.

4-47
Often restricting the public hearing to the specific district may not serve the entire
purpose, therefore, NGOs who are local and registered under the Societies Act in the
adjacent districts may also be allowed to participate in public hearing, if they so
desire.
Confidential information including non-disclosable or legally privileged information
involving intellectual property right, source specified in the application shall not be
placed on the website.
The Authority shall make available on a written request from any concerned person
the draft EIA report for inspection at a notified place during normal office hours till
the date of the public hearing.
While mandatory requirements will have to be adhered to, utmost attention shall be
given to the issues raised in the public hearing for determining the modifications
needed in the project proposal and the EMP to address such issues.
Final EIA report after making needed amendments, as aforesaid, shall be submitted
by the applicant to the concerned Authority for prior environmental clearance.
Alternatively, a supplementary report to draft EIA and EMP addressing all concerns
expressed during the public consultation may be submitted.
4.11 Appraisal
Appraisal means the detailed scrutiny by the EAC or SEAC of the application and the
other documents like the final EIA report, outcome of the public consultation including
public hearing proceedings submitted by the applicant for grant of environmental
clearance.
The appraisal shall be made by EAC to the Central Government or SEAC to SEIAA.
Project proponent either personally or through consultant can make a presentation to
EAC/SEAC for the purpose of appraising the features of the project proposal and also
to clarify the issues raised by the members of the EAC/SEAC.
On completion of these proceedings, concerned EAC/SEAC shall make categorical
recommendations to the respective Authority, either for grant of prior environmental
clearance on stipulated terms & conditions, if any, or rejection of the application with
reasons.
In case EAC/SEAC needs to visit the site or obtain further information before being
able to make categorical recommendations, EAC/SEAC may inform the project
proponent accordingly. In such an event, it should be ensured that the process of
environmental clearance is not unduly delayed to go beyond the prescribed
timeframe.
Upon the scrutiny of the final report, if EAC/SEAC opines that ToR for EIA studies
finalized at the scoping stage are covered by the proponent, then the project
proponent may be asked to provide such information. If such information is declined
by the project proponent or is unlikely to be provided early enough so as to complete
the environmental appraisal within prescribed time of 60 days, the EAC/SEAC may
recommend for rejection of the proposal with the same reason.
Appraisal shall be strictly in terms of the ToR for EIA studies finalized at the scoping
stage and the concerns expressed during public consultation.
This process of appraisal shall be completed within 60 days from the receipt of the
updated EIA report and EMP report, after completing public consultation.

4-48
The EIA report will be typically examined for following:

– Project site description supported by topographic maps & photographs – detailed
description of topography, land use and activities at the proposed project site and
its surroundings (buffer zone) supported by photographic evidence.
– Clarity in description of drainage pattern, location of eco sensitive areas,
vegetation characteristics, wildlife status - highlighting significant environmental
attributes such as feeding, breeding and nesting grounds of wildlife species,
migratory corridor, wetland, erosion and neighboring issues.
– Description of the project site – how well the interfaces between the project
related activities and the environment have been identified for the entire project
cycle i.e. construction, operation and decommissioning at the end of the project
life.
– If it is envisaged that the project is to be closed after a specified period in case of
mining projects, the interface at the closure stage also needs to be described.
– How complete and authentic are the baseline data pertaining to flora and fauna
and socio economic aspects?
– Citing of proper references, with regard to the source(s) of baseline data as well
as the name of the investigators/ investigating agency responsible for collecting
the primary data.
– How consistent are the various values of environmental parameters with respect
to each other?
– Is a reasonable assessment of the environmental and social impact made for the
identified environmental issues including project affected people?
– To what extent the proposed environmental plan will mitigate the environmental
impact and at what estimated cost, shown separately for construction, operation
and closure stages and also separately in terms of capital and recurring expenses
along with details of agencies that will be responsible for the implementation of
environmental plan/ conservation plan.
– How well the concerns expressed/highlighted during the Public hearing have
been addressed and incorporated in the EMP giving item wise financial
provisions and commitments (in quantified terms)?
– How far the proposed environmental monitoring plan will effectively evaluate the
performance of the EMP? Are details for environmental monitoring plan
provided in the same manner as the EMP?
– Identification of hazard and quantification of risk assessment and whether
appropriate mitigation plan has been included in the EMP?
– Does the proposal include a well formulated time bound green belt development
plan for mitigating environmental problems such as fugitive emission of dust,
gaseous pollutants, noise, odour etc.
– Does EIA makes a serious attempt to guide the project proponent for minimizing
the requirement of natural resources including land, water energy and other non
renewable resources?
– How well the EIA statement has been organized and presented so that the issues,
their impact and environmental management strategies emerge clearly from it and
how well organized was the power point presentation made before the expert
committee?

4-49
– Is the information presented in the EIA adequately and appropriately supported

by maps, imageries and photographs highlighting site features and environmental
attributes?
4.12 Decision Making
The Chairperson reads the sense of the Committee and finalizes the draft minutes of the
meeting, which are circulated by the Secretary to all the core members and sectoral
experts invited to the meeting. Based on the response from the members, the minutes are
finalized and signed by the Chairperson. This process for finalization of the minutes
should be so organized that the time prescribed for various stages is not exceeded.
Approval / Rejection / Reconsideration
The Authority shall consider the recommendations of concerned appraisal Committee

and convey its decision within 45 days of the receipt of recommendations.
If the Authority disagrees with the recommendations of the Appraisal Committee,
then reasons shall be communicated to concerned Appraisal Committee and applicant
with in 45 days from the receipt of the recommendations. The Appraisal Committee
concerned shall consider the observations of the Authority and furnish its views on
the observations within further period of 60 days. The Authority shall take a decision
with in the next 30 days based on the views of appraisal Committee.
If the decision of the Authority is not conveyed within the time, then the proponent
may proceed as if the environmental clearance sought has been granted or denied by
the regulatory Authority in terms of the final recommendation of the concerned
appraisal Committee. For this purpose, the decision of the Appraisal Committee will
be public document, once the period specified above for taking the decision by the
Authority is over.
Incase of the Category B projects, application shall be received by the
MemberSecretary of the SEIAA and clearance shall also be issued by the same
SEIAA.
If approved
The concerned MoEF/SEIAA will issue an environmental clearance for the project.
The project proponent should make sure that the award of environmental clearance is
properly publicized in at least two local newspapers of the district or state where the
proposed project is located. For instance, the executive summary of the
environmental clearance may be published in the newspaper along with the
information about the location (website/office where it is displayed for public) where
the detailed environmental clearance is made available. The MoEF and
SEIAA/UTEIAA, as the case may be, shall also place the environmental clearance in
the public domain on Government Portal. Further copies of the environmental
clearance shall be endorsed to the Heads of local bodies, Panchayats and Municipal
bodies in addition to the relevant offices of the Government.
The Environmental clearance will be valid from the start date to actual
commencement of the production of the developmental activity.

4-50
4.13 Post-clearance Monitoring Protocol
The MoEF, Government of India will monitor and take appropriate action under the EP
Act, 1986.
The project proponent must submit half-yearly compliance reports in respect of the
stipulated prior environmental clearance terms and conditions in hard and soft copies to
the regulatory Authority concerned, on 1st June and 1st December of each calendar year.
All such compliance reports submitted by the project management shall be public
documents. Copies of the same shall be given to any person on application to the
concerned regulatory Authority. The latest such compliance report shall also be displayed
on the web site of the concerned regulatory Authority.
The SPCB shall incorporate EIA clearance conditions into consent conditions in respect
of Category A and Category B projects and in parallel monitor and enforce the same.

4-51
Stakeholders’ Roles and Responsibilities
5.
STAKEHOLDERS’ ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Prior environmental clearance process involves many stakeholders i.e., Central

Government, State Government, SEIAA, EAC at the National Level, SEAC, Public
Agency, SPCB, the project proponent, and the public.
The roles and responsibilities of the organizations involved in different stages of prior
environmental clearance are given in Table 5-1.
Organization-specific functions are listed in Table 5-2.
In this Chapter, constitution, composition, functions, etc., of the Authorities and the
Committees are discussed in detail.
Table 5-1: Roles and Responsibilities of Stakeholders Involved in

Prior Environmental Clearance
STAGE MoEF/ EAC/ PROJECT EIA SPCB/ PUBLIC

SEIAA SEAC PROPONENT CONSULTANT PUBLIC AND
AGENCY INTEREST
GROUP
Screening Receives Advises the Submits Advises and
application MoEF/ application assists the
and takes SEIAA (Form 1) and proponent by
advise of provides providing
EAC/ necessary technical
SEAC information information
Scoping Approves Reviews Submits the Prepares ToR
the ToR, the ToR, draft ToR to
communic visits the SEIAA and
ates the proposed facilitates the
same to site, if visit of the
the project required EAC/SEAC
proponent and members to the
and places recommend project site
the same s the ToR
in the to the
website MoEF/
SEIAA
EIA Report Reviews Submits Prepares the EIA Reviews Participates
& Public and detailed EIA report EIA report in public
Hearing forwards report as per the and hearings and
Presents and
copies of finalized ToR conducts offers
appraises the
the EIA public comments
Facilitates the likely impacts
report to hearing in and
public hearing and pollution
SPCB the manner observations
by arranging control measures
/public prescribed .
presentation on proposed in the
agency for
the project, EIA public hearing Submits Comments
conducting
and EMP – proceeding can be sent
public
takes note of s and directly to
hearing
objections and views of SEIAA
5-1
Technical EIA Guidance Manuals
Places the updates the SPCB, to through

summary EMP the Internet in
of EIA accordingly Authority response to
report in and the the summary
the website project placed in the
proponent website
Conveys as well
objections
to the
project
proponent
for update,
if any
Appraisal Receives Critically Submits Provides
and updated examines updated EIA, technical advise
Clearance EIA the reports, EMP reports to to the project
presentation MoEF/SEIAA. proponent and if
Takes
of the necessary
advise of Presents the
proponent presents the
EAC/ overall EIA and
and proposed
SEAC, EMP including
appraises measures for
approves public concerns
MoEF/ mitigation of
EIA and to EAC/SEAC
SEIAA likely impacts
attaches
(recommen (terms and
the terms
dations are conditions of
and
forwarded clearance)
conditions
to MoEF/
SEIAA)
Post- Implements Conducts Incorporate
clearance environmental periodic s the
Monitoring protection monitoring clearance
measures conditions
prescribed and into
submits appropriate
periodic consent
monitoring conditions
results and
ensures
implement
ation
Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions
ORGANIZATION FUNCTIONS
Central Constitutes the EAC
Government Considering recommendations of the State Government, constitutes the SEIAA &
SEAC
Receives application from the project proponent in case of Category A projects or
Category B projects attracting general condition
Communicated the ToR finalized by the EAC to the project proponent.
Receives EIA report from the project proponent and soft copy of summary of the
report for placing in the website
Summary of EIA report will be placed in website. Forwards the received responses
to the project proponent
Engages other public agency for conducting public hearings in cases where the
SPCB does not respond within time

5-2
Receives updated EIA report from project proponent incorporating the

considerations from the proceedings of public hearing and responses received
through other media
Forwards updated EIA report to the EAC for appraisal
Either accepts the recommendations of EAC or asks for reconsideration of specific
issues for review by the EAC.
Takes the final decision – acceptance/ rejection – of the project proposal and
communicates the same to the project proponent
State Government Identifies experts as per the composition specified in the Notification and
subsequent guidelines to recommend to the the Central Government.
Extends funding support to fulfill the functions of SEIAA/SEAC
Engages other public agency for conducting public hearings in cases where the
SPCB does not respond within time
State Governments will suitably pay the public agency for conducting such activity
EAC Reviews Form 1 and its attachments
Visits site(s), if necessary
Finalizes ToR and recommends to the Central Government, which in turn
communicates the finalized ToR to the project proponent, if not exempted by the
Notification
Reviews EIA report, proceedings and appraises their views to the Central
government
If the Central Government has any specific views, then the EAC reviews again for
appraisal
SEIAA Receives application from the project proponent
Considers SEAC’s views for finalization of ToR
Communicates the finalized ToR to the project proponent
Receives EIA report from project proponent
Uploads the summary of EIA report in the website in cases of Category B projects
Forwards the responses received to the project proponent
Receives updated EIA report from project proponent incorporating the
considerations from the proceedings of public hearing and responses received
through other media
Forwards updated EIA report to SEAC for appraisal
Either accepts the recommendations of SEAC or asks for reconsideration of
specific issues for review by SEAC.
Takes the final decision and communicates the same to the project proponent
SEAC Reviews Form 1
If necessary visits, site(s) for finalizing the ToR
Reviews updated EIA - EMP report and
Appraises the SEIAA
SPCB Receives request from project proponent and conducts public hearing in the manner
prescribed.
Conveys proceedings to concerned Authority and project proponent
Public Agency Receives request from the respective Governments to conduct public hearing
Conducts public hearing in the manner prescribed.
Conveys proceedings to the concerned Authority/EAC /Project proponent
5.1 SEIAA
SEIAA is constituted by the MoEF to take final decision regarding the

acceptance/rejection of prior environmental clearance to the project proposal for all
Category ‘B’ projects.

5-3
The state government may decide whether to house them at the Department of
Environment or at any other Board for effective operational support.
State Governments can decide whether the positions are permanent or part-time. The
Central Government (MoEF) continues to follow the model of paying fee (TA/DA,
accommodation, sitting fee) to the Chairperson and the members of EAC. As such,
the State Government is to fund SEIAA & SEAC and decide the appropriate
institutional support for them.
A. Constitution
SEIAA is constituted by the Central Government comprising of three members

including a Chairperson and MemberSecretary to be nominated by the State
Government or UT Administration concerned.
The Central Government will notify as and when the nominations (in order) are
received from the State Governments, within 30 days from the date of receipt.
The Chairperson and the non-official member shall have a fixed term of three years,
from the date of Notification by the Central Government constituting the Authority.
The form used by the State Governments to submit nominations for Notification by the
Central Government is provided in Annexure XIV.
B. Composition
Chairperson shall be an expert in the EIA process

MemberSecretary shall be a serving officer of the concerned State Government/ UT
Administration familiar with the environmental laws.
MemberSecretary may be of a level equivalent to the Director, Dept. of
Environment or above – a full time member.
All the members including the Chairperson shall be the experts as per the criteria set
in the Notification.
The Government servants can only serve as the MemberSecretary to SEIAA and the
Secretary to SEAC. All other members including Chairperson of the SEIAA and
SEAC shall not be comprised of serving Government Officers; industry
representatives; and the activists.
Serving faculty (academicians) is eligible for the membership in the Authority and/or
the Committees, if they fulfill the criteria given in Appendix VI to the Notification.
This is to clarify that the serving Government officers shall not be nominated as
professional/expert member of SEIAA/SEAC/EAC.
Professionals/Experts in the SEIAA and SEAC shall be different.
Summary regarding the eligibility criteria for Chairperson and Members of the SEIAA is
given in Table 5-3.
C. Decision-making process
The decision of the Authority shall be arrived through consensus.

If there is no consensus, the Authority may either ask SEAC for reconsideration or
may reject the approval.

5-4
All decisions of the SEIAA shall be taken in a meeting, considering the majority
Table 5-3: SEIAA: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson/ Members/ Secretary
S. No. Requirement
Attribute Members MemberSecretary Chairperson
1 Professional qualification Compulsory Compulsory Compulsory
as per the Notification
2 Experience a Professional Professional Professional

Qualification + 15 Qualification + 15 Qualification + 15
(Fulfilling any one of
years of experience in years of experience in years of experience
a, b, c)
one of the expertise one of the expertise in one of the
area mentioned in the area mentioned in the expertise area
Appendix VI Appendix VI mentioned in the
Appendix VI
b Professional Professional Professional
Qualification +PhD+10 Qualification Qualification
years of experience in +PhD+10 years of +PhD+10 years of
one of the expertise experience in one of experience in one of
area mentioned in the expertise area the expertise area
Appendix VI mentioned in the mentioned in the
Appendix VI Appendix VI
c Professional Professional -------------
Qualification +10 years Qualification +10
of experience in one of years of experience in
the expertise area one of the expertise
mentioned in the area mentioned in the
Appendix VI + 5 years Appendix VI + 5 years
interface with interface with
environmental issues, environmental issues,
problems and their problems and their
management management
3 Test of independence Shall not be a serving Only serving officer Shall not be a
(conflict of interest) government officer from the State serving government
and minimum grade Government (DoE) officer
Shall not be a person
of the Secretary of familiar with
engaged in industry Shall not be a
the Authority environmental laws
and their associations person engaged in
not below the level of
industry and their
Shall not be a person Director
associations
associated with
environmental activism Shall not be a
person associated
with environmental
activism
4 Age Below 67 years at the As per State Below 72 Years at
time of Notification of Government Service the time of the
the Authority Rules Notification of the
Authority
5 Other memberships Shall not be a member Shall not be a member Shall not be a
in Core Committees in any in any member in any
and/or as sectoral SEIAA/EAC/SEAC SEIAA/EAC/SEAC SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
expert

5-5
S. No. Requirement
Attribute Members MemberSecretary Chairperson
6 Tenure of earlier Only one term before Not applicable Only one term
appointment this in continuity is before this in
(continuous) permitted continuity is
permitted
7 Eminent Desirable Desirable Compulsory
environmental
expertise with
understanding on
environmental
aspects and impacts
8 Expertise in the Desirable Desirable Compulsory
environmental
clearance process
Note:
1. A member after continuous membership in two terms (6 years) shall not be considered for
further continuation. His/her nomination may be considered after a gap of one term (three years),
if other criteria meet.
2. Chairperson/Member (core or sectoral expert) once notified may not be removed prior to the
tenure of three years without cause and proper enquiry.
5.2 EAC and SEAC
EAC and SEAC are independent Committees to review each developmental activity and
offer its recommendations for consideration of the Central Government and SEIAA
respectively.
A. Constitution
EAC and SEAC shall be constituted by the Central Government comprising a

maximum of 15 members including a Chairperson and Secretary. In case of SEAC,
the State Government or UT Administration is required to nominate the
professionals/experts for consideration and Notification by the Central Government.
The Central Government will notify as and when the nominations (in order) are
received from the State Governments, within 30 days from the date of receipt.
The Chairperson and the non-official member shall have a fixed term of three years,
from the date of Notification by the Central Government.
The Chairperson shall be an eminent environmental expert with understanding on
environmental aspects and environmental impacts. The Secretary of the SEAC shall
be a State Government officer, not below the level of a Director/Chief Engineer.
The members of the SEAC need not be from the same State/UT.
In case the State Governments/ Union Territories so desire, the MoEF can form
regional EAC to serve the concerned States/Union Territories.

5-6
State Governments may decide to their convenience to house SEAC at the

Department of Environment or at SPCB or at any other department, to extend support
to the SEAC activities.
B. Composition
Secretary to EAC/SEAC shall invite a maximum of two sectoral professionals/experts

with the prior approval of the Chairperson, if desired.
The Secretary of each EAC shall be an officer of the level equivalent to or above the
level of Director, MoEF, GoI.
The suggested model for appraisal committees is a composition of core expert
members and joined by sectoral experts. This means, core group expert members will
be common to all the developmental projects in a group, whereas the sectoral experts
join the core group when specific sectoral project is being appraised.
The desired composition of state or central appraisal committee for this sector
includes the following:
− Environmental management specialist/Environmental regulator/Environmental
planner
− Air & Noise quality expert
− Occupational Health expert
− Geology / Geo – hydrology specialist
− Ecologist
− Transportation specialist
− Safety & Health specialist
− Social scientist
− Organic Chemistry specialist
− Agronomy specialist
− Irrigation & flood control expert
− Mineral Exploration & beneficiation expert
− Chemical Engineer
− Marine Engineer
− Metallurgical Engineer
− Civil Engineer, etc.
C. Decision making
The EAC and SEAC shall function on the principle of collective responsibility. The
Chairperson shall endeavour to reach a consensus in each case, and if consensus cannot
be reached, the view of the majority shall prevail.
D. Operational issues
Secretary may deal with all correspondence, formulate agenda and prepare agenda
notes. Chairperson and other members may act only for the meetings.
Chairperson of EAC/SEAC shall be one among the core group having considerable
professional experience with proven credentials.
EAC/SEAC shall meet at least once every month or more frequently, if so needed, to
review project proposals and to offer recommendations for the consideration of the
Authority.

5-7
EAC/SEAC members may inspect the site at various stages i.e. during screening,
scoping and appraisal, as per the need felt and decided by the Chairperson of the
Committee.
The respective Governments through the Secretary of the Committee may
pay/reimburse the participation expenses, honorarium etc., to the Chairperson and
members.
i. Tenure of EAC/SEIAA/SEAC
The tenure of Authority/Committee(s) shall be for a fixed period of three years. At the
end of the three years period, the Authority and the committees need to be re-constituted.
However, staggered appointment dates may be adopted to maintain continuity of
members at a given point of time.
ii. Qualifying criteria for nomination of a member to EAC/SEIAA/SEAC
While recommending nominations and while notifying the members of the Authority and
Expert Committees, it shall be ensured that all the members meet the following three
criteria:
Professional qualification
Relevant experience/Experience interfacing with environmental management
Absence of conflict of interest
These are elaborated subsequently.
a) Professional qualification
The person should have at least (i) 5 years of formal University training in the concerned
discipline leading to a MA/MSc Degree, or (ii) in case of Engineering/Technology/
Architecture disciplines, 4 years formal training in a professional training course together
with prescribed practical training in the field leading to a B.Tech/B.E./B.Arch. Degree, or
(iii) Other professional degree (e.g. Law) involving a total of 5 years of formal University
training and prescribed practical training, or (iv) Prescribed apprenticeship/articleship and
pass examinations conducted by the concerned professional association (e.g.
MBA/IAS/IFS). In selecting the individual professionals, experience gained by them in
their respective fields will be taken note of.
b) Relevant experience
Experience shall be related to professional qualification acquired by the person and be
related to one or more of the expertise mentioned for the members of the Core group
or the Sectoral Experts. Such experience should be a minimum of 15 years.
When the experience mentioned in the foregoing sub-paragraph interfaces with
environmental issues, problems and their management, the requirement for the length
of the experience can be reduced to a minimum of 10 years.
c) Absence of conflict of interest

For the deliberations of the EAC/SEAC to be independent and unbiased, all possibilities
of potential conflict of interests have to be eliminated. Therefore, serving government
officers; persons engaged in industry and their associations; persons associated with the
formulation of development projects requiring environmental clearance, and persons

5-8
associated with environmental activism shall not be considered for membership of

SEIAA/ SEAC/ EAC.
iii. Age
Below 70 years for the members and below 72 years for the Chairperson of the
SEIAA/SEAC/EAC. The applicability of the age is at the time of the Notification of the
SEIAA/SEAC/EAC by the Central Government.
Summary regarding the eligibility criteria for Chairperson and Members of the
EAC/SEAC is given in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4: EAC/SEAC: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson / Members / Secretary
S. Requirement
No.
Attribute Core Secretary Chairperson
Members/Sectoral
Expert members
1 Professional Compulsory Compulsory Compulsory
qualification as per
the Notification
2 Experience a Professional Professional Professional
Qualification + 15 years Qualification + 15 years Qualification + 15
(Fulfilling any
of experience in one of of experience in one of years of experience in
one of a, b, c)
the expertise area the expertise area one of the expertise
mentioned in the mentioned in the area mentioned in the
Appendix VI Appendix VI Appendix VI
b Professional Professional Professional
Qualification +PhD+10 Qualification +PhD+10 Qualification
years of experience in years of experience in +PhD+10 years of
one of the expertise area one of the expertise area experience in one of
mentioned in the mentioned in the the expertise area
Appendix VI Appendix VI mentioned in
Appendix VI
c Professional Professional -------------
Qualification +10 years Qualification +10 years
of experience in one of of experience in one of
the expertise area the expertise area
mentioned in the mentioned in the
Appendix VI + 5 years Appendix VI + 5 years
interface with interface with
environmental issues, environmental issues,
problems and their problems and their
management management

5-9
S. Requirement
No.
Attribute Core Secretary Chairperson
Members/Sectoral
Expert members
3 Test of independence Shall not be a serving In case of EAC, not less Shall not be a serving
(conflict of interest) government officer than a Director from the government officer
and minimum grade MoEF, Government of
Shall not be a person Shall not be a person
of the Secretary of the India
engaged in industry and engaged in industry
Committees
their associations and their associations
Shall not be a person Incase of SEAC, not Shall not be a person
associated with below the level of associated with
environmental activism Director/Chief Engineer environmental
from the State activism
Government (DoE)
4 Age Below 67 years at the As per state Government Below 72 Years at the
time of Notification of Service Rules time of the
the Committee Notification of the
Committee
5 Membership in Core Only one other than this Shall not be a member Shall not be a
committees nomination is permitted in other member in any other
SEIAA/EAC/SEAC SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
6 Membership of Only three other than Shall not be a member
Sectoral Experts this nomination is in other
permitted SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
7 Tenure of earlier Only one term before Not applicable Only one term before
appointment this in continuity is this in continuity is
(continuous) permitted permitted
8 Eminent Desirable Not applicable Compulsory
environmental
expertise with
understanding on
environmental aspects
and impacts
Note:
1. Core members are the members in EAC/SEAC, who are common for all the types of
developmental activities, whereas, sectoral expert members will join for the specific developmental
sectors. Core members may be limited to about 12.
2. Sectoral expert members: Sectoral Expert members are the members who join the EAC/SEAC,
when corresponding sector is being reviewed/appraised. At a given sectoral review, a maximum
of three sectoral expert members may join. Therefore the total number of expert members in
EAC/SEAC does not exceed 15.
3. A member after continuous membership in two terms (six years) shall not be considered for
further continuation. His/her nomination may be reconsidered after a gap of one term (three
years), if other criteria meet.
4. Chairperson/Member (core or sectoral expert) once notified may not be removed prior to the
tenure of 3 years with out cause and proper enquiry. A member after continuous membership in
two terms (6 years) shall not be considered for further continuation. The same profile may be
considered for nomination after a gap of three years, i.e., one term, if other criteria are meeting.

5-10
E. Other conditions
An expert Core Committee member of one State/UT, can have at the most another
State/UT Committee membership (core or sectoral expert member), but in no case
more than two Committees at a given point of time.
Sectoral experts (not being a member in a Core Committee) can have membership in
not more than four states.
An expert member of a Committee (core or sectoral expert) shall not have
membership continuously in the same committee for more than two terms, i.e. six
years. They can be nominated after a gap of three years, i.e., one term. When a
member of Committee has been associated with any development project, which
comes for environmental clearance, he/she may not participate in the deliberations
and the decisions in respect to that particular project.
At least four members shall be present in each meeting to fulfill the quorum
If a member does not consecutively attend six meetings, without prior intimation to
the Committee his/her membership may be terminated by the Notifying Authority.
Prior information for absence due to academic pursuits, career development and
national/state-endorsed programmes may be considered as genuine grounds for
retention of membership.

5-11
ANNEXURE I
Technical EIA Guidance Manual
A. Location
IEs are often classified as urban, semi-urban or rural. In the present context, an urban IE
is defined as the located in, or within easy commuting distance of, the metropolitan area
or a city of, say, 500,000 inhabitants. Semi-urban and rural refer more to the region in
which the estate is situated than to its actual site. A semi-urban estate is the one located
in the principal town of a mixed urban and rural area. The population of the centre should
not be less than 50,000. A rural estate is not the one built in the open country, as the
name might imply, but in the central town, the population of which should be at least
25,000, of a predominantly rural region.
The lower limits of population given above should be treated with caution. For an IE to
be viable, the city or town in which it is established must be able to provide the utilities
and services required by the tenant enterprises. These usually are not to be found in small
towns and villages.
B. Industrial Activity
The classification of an IE by the function it performs, or is expected to perform, tends to

be confusing since normally there is more than one function. To some extent this may be
resolved by separating function into activity and motivation.
An estate may be described as:
Composite: containing establishments engaged in a variety of unrelated industries

Ancillary: containing enterprises, usually small, in various fields, but all serving one
large establishment and frequently supervised by the parent enterprise
i
Single trade: often called as functional, accommodating either establishments

engaged in the same trade (e.g., woodwork, repair of motor vehicles) or producing the
same class of articles.
C. Motivation
Motivation is related to objectives. From this perspective, an IE may be classified as

developmental, promotional, or dispersal. In most cases these descriptions refer to the
composite IEs.
Developmental – A developmental IE is the one intended to advance, improve, or

increase the level of industrial activity in the area in which it is located. This will
usually be a semi-rural or rural area. If, to achieve this goal, it is necessary to
stimulate entrepreneurial talent among selected artisans, a variant - a nursery estate -
is established.
Promotional – In a sense, all IEs are promotional, but the term has come to mean the
introduction of new industries into, and the improvement of existing industries in,
economically backward regions. Rural IEs fall into this category.
Dispersal – These IEs are intended to accommodate enterprises that on account of
lack of space for expansion, or for environmental reasons, are required to move from
urban areas.
Promotional Aspects
Nursery Estate
A nursery estate would be indicated if artisan activity were the only feature of the
industrial scene. It could provide the physical facilities to transform artisans into small-
scale industrialists. Support in the forms of common production facilities and advice,
technical and managerial, would be essential.
A nursery estate (artisan work-sheds) usually consists of one or more sheds, built on
developed land, so constructed that each may be subdivided to meet the varied need for
floor space, and to accommodate limited expansion of individual enterprises. It is
customary to provide electric power connections to each module, and for water supply
and sanitary arrangements to be communal. Common production facilities may be
provided. They appear to be useful only where most of the artisans are engaged in the
same trade.
Normally, an entrepreneur is permitted to occupy only a specified number of modules,

frequently not more than three. If his business expands to the extent that more space is
required he is expected to find other accommodation. This rule works only if alternative
accommodation is available. Very few tenants leave on this account. Those requiring of
extra space sometimes hire it outside while still retaining their estate premises.
Functional Estate
A functional estate may be considered if there are a sufficient number of establishments

engaged in the manufacture of the same or allied products. It would be a probable choice
for a (semi-rural or rural) area either where local materials are worked extensively or
where special skills have developed. The making of pottery, furniture, clocks and sports
equipment is often found on IEs of this kind. The estate may contain either standard or
ii
custom-built work-places. The size of the former may be determined by the number of
workers per unit in the existing establishments.
Common production facilities, bulk purchasing and quality control arrangements can be
more effective on this type of estate than on any other. Experience shows that these
services should preferably be managed by the entrepreneurs as a group.
Ancillary Estate
An ancillary estate might be a feasible proposition in the vicinity of a large establishment,

provided a considerable proportion of its intermediate inputs could be produced by small-
scale enterprises. Such an estate can be established only if the management of the large
firm is prepared to give full support. There are a number of examples of such IEs in
India. There is a danger that the industrial development of the area may become too
dependent on the success of the parent company; if it fails, so do all the small
establishments associated with it.
The needs of the parent establishment which an ancillary estate is intended to serve will
determine its composition and size. Because an estate of this kind will bring work to the
area that hitherto had gone elsewhere, it may be expedient to waive the lower limit of
size. Indeed, the estate will be able to take advantage of the infrastructure created by the
parent enterprise.
Composite or General Purpose IE
Most frequently the circumstances will call for setting up a composite estate to
accommodate a variety of industries. Such an IE may be designed to cater to the needs of
small establishments or for mixed sizes of light industry. The requirements of heavy
industry cannot economically be provided by an IE. There are financial and technical
advantages to IEs accommodating a mixture of small and medium-sized or large
enterprises. This type of IE is by far the most common. It can be designed to
accommodate virtually all sizes and types of enterprise, with the exception of those
engaged in heavy industry.
D. Sponsorship / Ownership
The sponsor is the agency initiating the estate and providing all or part of the necessary
funds. There are three types of sponsorship:
Governmental: central, state or municipal

Private: cooperative society, limited company or an association of industrialists
Government-assisted: co-operative society, limited company or an association of
industrialists with assistance from the government through the grant of a long-term
loan
Government sponsorship and ownership predominated heavily in the past. Donor agency
funding has also played an important role in the establishment of IEs in developing
countries. In recent years, privately financed IEs have become very common, and much
of the donor assistance has shifted to advice and the funding of various support services,
which should preferably be run by industrial associations.
In spite of the growing role of private sector, a large IE programme cannot be carried
solely by a private enterprise. Land ownership issues, planning and environmental
iii
considerations will make it essential to involve the government authorities. Many of the
private-assisted IEs are the result of official pressure on industrialists to relocate their
work places to less congested or environmentally less vulnerable sites. A coherent
strategy for IE development may be desirable. To ensure that such overall development
objectives are attained, it may be necessary to set up a parastatal IE development
authority even though the actual attainment of the objectives is left to the private sector.
In a country or region with a low development level, it may be necessary for the
government to ‘prime-the-pump’ by financing at least the first set of IEs and setting up
basic support services. Where IEs are privatized, new owners should sign an obligation
to maintain environmental standards, sewage systems, etc.
Government IEs
For government IEs, the executing agency may be either a government department, a
parastatal government corporation or a municipality.
When a government department is the executing agency, all funds for the establishment
of an estate comes from government sources or through the government if foreign aid is
involved. In a developing country this may be the only means of starting an IE
programme. Until the beneficial effects of an estate are demonstrated, there may be no
other way to raise the required capital. The disadvantage of a department as an executing
agency lies in the lack of persons with suitable commercial or managerial experience for
executing the programme and managing the IEs, and in the fact that, until the estate is
able to meet its recurring costs, annual deficits must be met by the government. A
parastatal differs from a government department in that frequently there are non-
government representatives on the board of directors, and it has borrowing powers. In
countries with a federal constitution the central government usually makes long-term
loans to state or provincial governments to construct IEs.
While municipalities frequently function as executing agencies in developed market

economies, they are still comparatively rare in economies in transition and developing
countries. In most cases, local government lacked sufficient decision-making powers to
initiate such projects and the skills to execute them, at least until recently. Finally, the
municipality by itself will in many cases not have access to adequate sources of finance.
Government-Assisted IEs
The principal difference between a government-assisted and private estate is that the
former is eligible for government grants and foreign investment. Both may be in receipt
of loans from the government, but, normally, loans to assisted IEs are at concessionary
rates and for longer terms. Often, government-assisted IEs are the result of pressure on
local entrepreneurs by the municipality to move from the urban centre, as in Turkey (see
Box 1). The industrialists or the municipality, sometimes jointly, form a body to
implement the project. This executing agency is usually organized as a co-operative
society if it is composed entirely of entrepreneurs and is a de facto co-operative. A
government loan is then approved for the sole purpose of erecting work-places and
buildings to house common facilities. The loan may not be used to purchase equipment.
Private IEs
Although private IEs have become common, information on the financing modes of these
IE is hard to find. Private sponsorship is likely to ensure that an estate is efficient and
profitable. However, the necessity to provide a return to the private shareholders may
defeat one of the broader, long-term objectives of development policy in many countries:
iv
that of stimulating small-scale enterprise by providing work-places at sub economic rents,

often in locations outside economic core regions. Co-operative IEs can be a solution to
this dilemma.
A variant on the private estate is the estate created by the erection of workshops by a
privately owned firm on surplus land within the compound of the factory. These work-
places are let to small-scale entrepreneurs who will often be ancillaries to the estate owner
v
ANNEXURE II
Forms of Industrial Estates
Industrial areas
An industrial area is a parcel of improved land developed and subdivided into plots for
the accommodation of industrial establishments and offered for sale or for lease. Its size
may allow advantage to be taken of economies of scale in providing the infrastructure,
which may be passed on to the occupants. An attraction for a prospective occupier is the
time saved in finding a site and in preparing the land. The industrial area is essentially a
piece of real estate promotion. An industrial area may approximate an IE, but the
essential differences are that in the former there is no unified and continuous management
and that, beyond land and utilities, it provides no additional incentive to industry.
Industrial zones
An industrial zone is merely an area of raw land set aside for industry. In general, it is
created by a municipal by-law and is part of an urban renewal or development
programme. Any promotional effect it may have is dependent on its location in relation to
transport and distribution facilities, and the price of land within the zone.
Growth centers
In order to promote industrialization of backward areas, the central Government, in June

1988, announced the scheme for establishment 70 Growth Centres throughout the
country. Each growth centre would be bestowed with the best of infrastructural facilities
to facilitate and promote industrial growth. The facilities for growth centers are:
Proximity to railway station, national or state highways, or port

Water, electricity, telecommunication, education and health facilities, sufficient land
Financing pattern of each growth centre is as follows:
Central Government : Rs. 10 Crores

State Governments : Rs. 5 Crores
Financial Institutions/Banks : Rs. 5 Crores
Market Borrowing : Rs. 10 Crores
About 65 Growth Centres have been identified so far, out of which about 28 Growth
centres are in various state of completion. One of the important criteria for identification
of a growth centre is that its sphere of influence should cover an area of about 400 to 800
hectares.
Export processing zones (EPZs)
IEs may serve as a step towards more advanced industrial infrastructure such as EPZs.
EPZs can play a useful role in countries which intend to develop an export-oriented
manufacturing sector, but do not have adequate countrywide conditions for foreign
investment and imports of raw materials and equipment. Physically, an EPZ need not be
restricted to an estate location. An EPZ should not remain an enclave; to be a real
catalyst of export-oriented manufacturing, it must develop linkages to domestic
industries.
i
The International Labour Organization (ILO) has defined EPZs as the "Industrial zones
with special incentives set up to attract foreign investors, in which imported materials
undergo some degree of processing before being re-exported".
With developments in information technology (IT), "imported material" would also

include "electronic data" and electronic labour (Call Centres). EPZs have evolved from
initial assembly and simple processing activities to include hi-tech and science parks,
finance zones, logistic centres and even tourist resorts. Their physical form now includes
not only enclave-type zones but also single-industry zones; single-commodity zones; and
single-factory (such as the Export Oriented Units in India) or single-company zones.
India’s first EPZ was established in Kandla in 1965 while seven others were later
established in Mumbai, Chennai, Surat, Falta, Kochi, Noida and Vishakapatnam (Vizag).
India’s experience with EPZs has not been a huge success for the following reasons:
there were zone scale and location issues

the operations were cumbersome
there were insular policies, focused on import minimization (vs. trade enhancement
through export promotion)
It was envisaged that some of the existing EPZs would be converted into SEZs and
accordingly the Government converted the EPZs located at Surat, kandla, Kochi, Vizag
and Noida into SEZs.
The different forms of EPZs are listed in the following table.
ii
Table: Different Forms of EPZs
Trade Manufacturing Services
Special
Industrial free zone / Information Financial Commercial
Free port Economic Zone Enterprise Zone
EPZ Processing Zone Services Zone free zone
(SEZ)
warehouse
entire province entire city or
Physical entire city or enclave or industrial part of city or part of city or "zone area, often
region or "zone within
characteristics jurisdiction park entire city within zone" adjacent to
municipality zone"
port or airport
development of
development of deregulation;
development of development of off-shore facilitation of
Economic trading centre and private sector development of export
SMEs in information banking, trade and
objectives diversified investment in industry
depressed areas processing centre insurance, imports
economic base restricted area
securities hub
all goods for
all goods for use
Duty free capital equipment and storage and re-
in trade, industry, selective basis no capital equipment varies
goods allowed production inputs export of
consumption
import
data processing, warehousing,
trade, service, all types of
Typical light industry and software packaging,
industry, banking, industry and all financial services
activities manufacturing development, distribution,
etc. services
computer graphics trans-shipment
Simple business Reduced Profits tax abatement Zoning relief; Demonopolization Tax relief; strict
Incentives start-up; minimal business taxes; and regulatory relief; simplified and deregulation of confidentiality;
Exemption
tax and regulatory liberalized exemption from foreign business telecoms; deregulation of
from import
- taxation restraints. labour codes; exchange controls. Free registration; access to market- currency
quotas.
- customs’ Waivers with reduced foreign repatriation of profits. local tax priced INTELSAT exchange and
reinvested
duties regard to exchange Trade union freedom abatement; services. A specific capital
profits wholly
- labour laws termination of controls. no restricted despite the reduction of authority manages movements. free
tax-free
- other employment and specific fact that EPZs are licensing labour relations. repatriation of
overtime. Free advantages; required to respect requirements. Trade union freedom profits
Trade Manufacturing Services
Special
Industrial free zone / Information Financial Commercial
Free port Economic Zone Enterprise Zone
EPZ Processing Zone Services Zone free zone
(SEZ)
repatriation of trade unions are national employment Trade unions are restricted
capital, profits discouraged regulations.15 years prohibited.
and dividends within the SEZ exemptions on all Government
preferential taxes(maximum) mandated liberal
interest rates. on hiring and
firing of workers
unrestricted
within Freeport limited to small unlimited,
limited to small portion
Domestic sales outside Freeport, highly restricted portion of upon payment
of production
upon payment of production of full duty
full duty
additional
developed by
incentives and may be extended to
Other features socialist
streamlined single- factory sites
countries
procedures
Hong Kong, China (southern Jebel ali,
Ireland, Taiwan (China),
Singapore, provinces, Bahrain, Dubai, Colon, Miami
Typical Malaysia, Dominican Indonesia, India-Bangalore,
Bahamas including Caribbean, (USA FTZ)
examples Republic, Mauritius, Senegal Caribbean
Freeport, Batam, Hainan and Turkey, Cayman Mauritius,
Kenya, Hungary
Labuan, Macao Shenzhen) Iran
Source: International Labour Organization
iv
Special economic zones (SEZ)
SEZs are specially demarcated geographical regions that have more liberal economic laws
as compared to the centralized laws of the country. The SEZ concept itself gives the SEZ
definition. The very purpose of a SEZ is to develop the area covered under the special
economic zone by following special economic policies.
The basic motive behind developing an SEZ in India is to attract mass foreign
investments to India. India Real Estate Investments have attracted huge foreign funds and
thus the SEZs in India have increased by and large.
The SEZ benefits are:
SEZ's offer economic progress to the area, the local inhabitants and the country as a
whole
Exemption from payment of stamp duty and registration fees on the lease/license of
plots to the SEZ developer
External commercial borrowings of up to 500 million USD a year without any
restriction of maturity to the SEZ developers
Presently around fourteen major SEZs are functional in India. Santa Cruz, Mumbai,
Maharashtra; Cochin, Kerala, Kandla And Surat in Gujarat; Chennai, Tamil Nadu;
Vishakhapatnam, Andhra Pradesh; Falta And Salt Lake in West Bengal; Noida, Greater
Noida in Uttar Pradesh; Indore, Madhya Pradesh; Jaipur, Rajasthan,etc.
India was one of the first in Asia to recognize the effectiveness of the EPZ model in
promoting exports, with Asia's first EPZ set up in Kandla in 1965. With a view to
overcome the shortcomings experienced on account of the multiplicity of controls and
clearances, absence of world-class infrastructure, and an unstable fiscal regime and with a
view to attract larger foreign investments in India, the SEZs Policy was announced in
April 2000.
This policy intended to make SEZs an engine for economic growth supported by quality
infrastructure complemented by an attractive fiscal package, both at the Centre and the
State level, with the minimum possible regulations. SEZs in India functioned from
1.11.2000 to 09.02.2006 under the provisions of the Foreign Trade Policy and fiscal
incentives were made effective through the provisions of relevant statutes.
The Special Economic Zones Act, 2005, was passed by the Parliament in May, 2005
which received Presidential assent on the 23rd of June, 2005. After extensive
consultations, the SEZ Act, 2005, supported by the SEZ Rules, came into effect on 10th
February, 2006, providing for drastic simplification of procedures and for single window
clearance on matters relating to central as well as state governments. The main objectives
of the SEZ Act are:
generation of additional economic activity

promotion of exports of goods and services
promotion of investment from domestic and foreign sources
creation of employment opportunities
development of infrastructure facilities
Science and technology parks (such as biotechnology parks and

leather complexes)
S&T parks basically provide the same kind of infrastructure as IEs, but are intended for
technologically advanced industries and emphasize the high-level support services that
such activities need – technical consultancy through networking with local R&D
institutions; advisory services on finance and venture capital; marketing; and search for
joint venture partners
Petroleum, chemical & petrochemical investment regions
To promote investment in this sector and make the country a hub for both domestic and
international markets, the government has decided to attract major investment, both
domestic and foreign, by providing a transparent and investment-friendly policy and
facility regime under which integrated Petroleum, Chemicals & Petrochemical Investment
Regions (PCPIRs) may be set up. The PCPIRs would reap the benefits of co-siting,
networking and greater efficiency through the use of common infrastructure and support
services. They would have high-class infrastructure, and provide a competitive
environment conducive for setting up businesses. They would thus result in a boost to
manufacturing, augmentation of exports and generation of employment.
A PCPIR would be a specifically delineated investment region with an area of around 250
km2 planned for the establishment of manufacturing facilities for domestic and export led
production in petroleum, chemicals and petrochemicals, along with the associated
services and infrastructure.
A PCPIR would be a combination of production units, public utilities, logistics,

environmental protection mechanisms, residential areas and administrative services. It
would have a processing area, where the manufacturing facilities, along with associated
logistics and other services, and required infrastructure will be located, and a non-
processing area, to include residential, commercial and other social and institutional
infrastructure. The minimum processing area for the PCPIR will be about 40% of the
total designated area, i.e., around 100 km2. The processing area may or may not be
contiguous.
The PCPIR may include one or more SEZs, Industrial Parks, Free Trade & Warehousing
Zones, EOUs, or Growth Centres, duly notified under the relevant Central or State
legislation or policy. All the benefits available under the relevant legislation or policy
will continue to remain available to the said Zones or Parks, as the case may be, forming
part of the PCPIR. The PCPIR could cover existing settlements/industries & IEs/ services
and would therefore benefit from and be complementary to the region. The concerned
state government may not acquire the entire area comprising the PCPIR, but it will notify
the same under the relevant Act for proper planning and zoning to ensure coordinated
development.
vi
ANNEXURE III
Difference between Expert Oriented Units and Special Economic
Zones
Difference between Export Oriented Units and Special Economic Zones
EXPORT ORIENTED UNITS (EOU) SEZ
Establishment EOU unit can be set-up any place declared as SEZ Economic Zone unit has to be located
“warehousing station” under Customs Act. within the specified zones developed
There are 300 such places all over India
Import The unit can import capital goods, raw The unit can import capital goods, raw
Procedures material, consumables, packing material, material, consumables, packing material,
spares, etc without payment of customs duty. spares, etc without payment of customs
Similarly these can be procured indigenously duty. Similarly these can be procured
without payment of excise duty. Second hand indigenously without payment of excise
capital goods can also be imported. duty. Second hand capital goods can also be
imported.
Net Foreign They have to achieve positive NFE (Net They have to achieve positive NFE (Net
Exchange foreign Exchange Earnings) foreign Exchange Earnings)
Earnings (NEF)
Minimum Minimum Investment in plant and machinery There is no such limit to Special Economic
Investment building is Rs. 100 lakhs for EOU. This Zone
should be before commencement of
commercial production
Procedure A bond in prescribed form has to be executed A bond in prescribed form has to be
–B-17 in case of EOU executed – a form prescribed in Special
Economic Zone Rules, 2003 in case of
SEZ.
Green Channel There is no physical supervision of customs / There is no physical supervision of customs
/excise authorities over production and / /excise authorities over production and
clearances, but prescribed records are clearances, but prescribed records are
required to be maintained. required to be maintained.
Custom Fast Track Clearance Scheme (FTCS) for In case of Special Economic Zone units ,
Clearance clearances of imported consignments of EOU custom clearance for export and import is
obtained within the zone itself.
Export of final Generally all final production should be Generally all final production should be
production exported except rejects up to prescribed limit exported except rejects up to prescribed
limit
Central Sales Central Sales tax ( CST) paid on purchases is In case of Special Economic Zone supplier
Tax ( CST) refundable (but not local tax) does not have to pay CST
Supplies made Supplies made to EOU by Indian Suppliers Supplies to Special Economic Zone are
by Indian are ‘deemed exports’ and supplier is entitled ‘Exports’ and all export benefits are
Suppliers to benefits of ‘deemed export’. available
Infrastructure General infrastructure available to EOU unit Better infrastructural facilities are available
are not as better as available to SEZ units to Special Economic Zone
Schemes like EOU / SEZ are suitable when :
the undertaking is predominantly export oriented
Requirement of imported capital goods and imported raw material is high.
Source: Confederation of Indian Industry
i
ANNEXURE IV
Common Service Facilities for IE
Fire Protection
Fire protection is essential. It is usual for fire hydrants to be fitted at strategic points in
the water reticulation and for fire hoses to be available. The tenants are expected to
provide first-aid fire appliances for their own premises (a customary requirement under
all fire insurance schemes).
Security
Security may be provided either by the IE administration, in which case it consists of

fencing the area and employing watchmen, or by the establishment of a policy post on the
estate. It is not uncommon, especially in IEs for medium- and large-scale establishments,
for the tenants to be required to fence their plots and to provide their own security guards.
Collection and disposal of waste
Collection and disposal of IE waste must be undertaken either by the local authority or
the estate administration. If the IE is within the collection area of the local authority, it
should be handled by the authority. However, there were a few notified instances where
the local authority, while levying rates on estate premises, had declined to provide the
service. In such cases, an agreement should be reached on this matter before the IE is
built. If the duty devolves on the estate administration, the tenants are charged for the
service. Sometimes an incinerator is provided for the use of tenants.
Medical Care
The provision of medical care - first-aid post, clinic or dispensary - by the IE

administration depends on the current labour legislation. In some countries each
workplace is required to have first-aid materials, appliances and trained personnel on the
premises on a scale that would vary with the number of persons employed. Where this is
not a legal obligation, it is not uncommon for the IE administration to provide the service
- often a clinic with a resident dresser and a visiting doctor. For a very small IE, probably
all that is needed is a small stock of first-aid materials and an IE worker with some
training in first-aid.
Common temporary storage for Hazardous Waste
A common storage facility for storing the hazardous wastes generated from the industries
within IEs may be required. These storage facilities can temporarily store the hazardous
wastes before they are transported to the disposal sites.
Bank, Post Office
A bank and a post-office are for the convenience of the IE tenants. They are desirable but
not essential. Many IEs have neither. It is not necessary for the IE administration to
provide one or the other. If business develops to the extent that either a commercial bank
or the postal authority sees the need to open a branch office in the IE, it will do so. It
would be advisable none-the-less to reserve space for such an office.
i
Weigh Bridge
A weigh bridge may be necessary, but only in special circumstances, e.g., where there are
several large firms on the IE with bulky material inputs and outputs. It is unlikely to be
needed on an IE for small-scale enterprises.
Exhibition Halls
Showroom or exhibition halls are luxuries. One or the other could be justified on an IE
producing articles for the tourist trade, assuming that the location of the IE attracts
tourists.
Repair Workshop
A central repair workshop to deal with machinery and vehicles owned by the IE tenants is
necessary. It should be provided by the IE administration only if there is no commercial
firm capable of undertaking the work, and then only if there is sufficient volume to justify
the equipping and staffing of a workshop.
In countries where the allocation of certain materials is controlled, the IE administration

may be called upon to endorse applications for materials submitted by tenant enterprises.
It is a necessary service and one that does not involve the administration in any expense.
ii
ANNEXURE V
Criteria for Industrial Estate Planning
i
Criteria Industrial Estate Planning
Identification of areas to be avoided for siting of industrial estates
A.1 Biological diversity of an area
1 National parks
2 Wild life sanctuaries
3 Game reserve
4 Tiger reserve/elephant reserve/turtle nesting ground, breeding grounds
5 Core zone of biosphere reserve
6 Habitat for migratory birds
7 Mangrove area
8 Areas with threatened (rare, vulnerable, endangered) flora/fauna , protected corals
9 Wetlands
10 Botanical gardens, Zoological gardens, Gene Banks
11 Reserved forests, Protected forests
12 Any other closed/protected area under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972
13 Any other area as locally applicable
A.4 Sensitive/incompatible land uses
1 Public water supply areas from rivers/surface water bodies - Upto 2 km from
watersheds u/s of public water supply abstraction points in the rivers/surface water
bodies
2 Public water supply areas from ground water- 1 km around public water supply
abstraction points from ground water
3 Ground water recharge areas - 1/2 km ground water recharge areas
4 Scenic areas/tourism areas/hill resorts - 1 km from the periphery of the core areas of
scenic areas/tourism areas/hill resorts with tourists/visitors more than 10 lakhs a year
5 Religious places, pilgrim centers - 1 km around core areas of religious places that attract
over 10 lakhs pilgrims a year
6 Protected tribal settlements - notified tribal areas where industrial activity is not
permitted
7 Coastal Regulatory Zone (CRZ)
8 Monuments of national significance - 1 km from monuments of national significance
9 Monuments of state significance – ½ km from monuments of state significance
10 Monuments of national significance – 100 m from monuments of local significance
11 World Heritage Sites - 2 km from World Heritage sites
12 Flood prone areas (based on flood in 1in 25 years )
ii
13 Agricultural research stations

14 Air port areas
15 Any other feature as specified by the State or local government and other features as
locally applicable (including prime agricultural lands, pastures, migratory corridors etc.)
Identification of candidate sites based on socio-economic factors

from the areas other than those areas to be avoided
Land availability - extent of land to suit to the industrialization demand, preferably

wastelands
Land ownership - government or private land lease in acquisition.
Electricity- nearness or distance of various pre- final sites from nearest existing sub-
station / power plant.
Nearness to the major settlement - distance of nearest major settlement from all the
pre-final candidate sites.
Water availability- distance from source of water supply for domestic and industrial
purposes
Distance from existing industrial areas
Distance from sensitive zone
Drainage- distance of major rivers or drains from the pre-final sites
Nearness to transportation network for economic handling of both raw materials and
finished goods
Environmental sensitivity of the area to suit to the needed industrial development.
Transportation facility: distance from existing railway line and highway.
Candidate site Matrix for Site Suitability
Parameters Site - I Site - II Site - III Site …….
ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS
Distance to Weightage
sensitive zones
Justification
Suitability to air Weightage
Polluting Industries
Justification
Suitability to Water Weightage
Polluting Industries
Justification
PHYSICAL INFRASTRUCTURE PARAMETERS
Availability of Weightage
water and nearness
to water supply Justification
source
iii
Parameters Site - I Site - II Site - III Site …….

effluent disposal Justification
places
Nearness to Road Weightage
Justification
Nearness to Justification
Railway Line
Weightage
Land and Land
Costs Justification
SOCIO-ECONOMIC PARAMETERS
Skilled Manpower Weightage
Availability
Justification
Nearness to Sales Weightage
Market
Justification
Nearness to Major Weightage
Settlement
Justification
Contribution to Weightage
balanced industrial
development Justification
Social acceptance Weightage

to the proposed
estate Justification
development
The categorization of physical, environmental and social parameters have to be done

rationally, such as in the case of physic infrastructure given below.
Physical Infrastructure Parameters
Parameters Good Moderate Poor
Water supply Upto 5 km 5-10 kms 10-15 kms

(Nearness to source)
Availability of Uninterrupted power Power supply with Frequent power
electricity supply intermittent cuts cuts
Discharge from the Disposal point within Disposal point within 15 Disposal point
ETP (nearness to the 5 kms kms more than 15 kms
disposal point)
Nearness to road Up to 1 km 1-5 km More than 5 km
Nearness to railway Up to 1 km 1-2 km More than 2 km
line
Availability of land Government Institutional ownership Private ownership
ownership
iv
Weightage out of 5: 5 for excellent, 4 for very good, 3 for good, (-ve)3 for poor, (-ve) 5 for very
poor.
Description of potential site(s)
Parameters Industrial Estate 1 Industrial Estate2
Location
Area
Habitable villages
Land use
Land availability
Nearness to the road
Nearness to the railway line
Water supply (Nearness to the
source)
Discharge from the ETP
(Nearness to the disposal point)
Assessment of sensitivity of land use and air/water pollution of the

potential site(s) and suitability to industries
A. Landuse sensitivity assessment
0.5 0.5-2 2-5 km 5-7 km 7-15 >15

km km km km
A Biological diversity
National parks
Wild life sanctuaries
Game reserve
Tiger reserve/elephant
reserve/turtle nesting
ground, breeding grounds
Core zone of biosphere
reserve
Habitat for migratory birds
Mangrove area
Areas with threatened (rare,
vulnerable, endangered)
flora/fauna, protected corals
Wetlands
Botanical gardens,
Zoological gardens, Gene
Banks
v
Reserved forests, Protected

forests
Any other closed/protected
area under the Wild Life
(Protection) Act, 1972
Any other area as locally
applicable
B. Incompatible Land uses
Public water supply areas
from rivers/surface water
bodies - Upto 2 km from
watersheds u/s of public
water supply abstraction
points in the rivers/surface
water bodies
Public water supply areas
from ground water
Ground water recharge
areas
Scenic areas/tourism
areas/hill resorts (over 10
lakhs tourists/visitors a
year)
Religious places, pilgrim
centers (over 10 lakhs
pilgrims/visitors a year
Protected tribal settlements -
notified tribal areas where
industrial activity is not
permitted
Coastal Regulatory Zone
(CRZ)
Monuments of national
significance
Monuments of state
significance
Monuments of local
significance
World Heritage Sites
Flood prone areas (based on
flood in 1in 25 years )
Agricultural research
stations
Air port areas
Any other feature as
specified by the State or
local government and other
features as locally
vi
applicable (including prime

agricultural lands, pastures,
migratory corridors etc.)
C. Land Use:
Double Cropped
Single Cropped
Plantations
Command Areas
Fallow Lands
Forests:
Reserved Forest
Protected Forest
Scrub/Degraded Forest
Other Forest
Waste Lands:
gullied and/or ravenous land
upland with or without
scrub
water logged and marshy
land/salt pan
land affected by
salinity/alkalinity-
coastal/inland
shifting cultivation area
under utilized/degraded
notified forest land
degraded pastures/grazing
land
degraded land under
plantation crops
sands-desertic/coastal
mining/industrial wasteland
barren rocky/stony
waste/sheet rock area
steep sloping area
snow covered and/or glacial
area
D. Population
Rural
Urban
E. Environmental Quality
vii
Areas with ‘critical’/’high’

air pollution
Critically polluted areas or
‘low’ quality areas - areas
with surface water quality
exceeding the applicable
‘criteria’
Areas with ground water
quality exceeding the
applicable ‘criteria’
Hilly stretches that act as
barriers for dispersion of
emissions, areas with
frequent inversion
conditions
F. Others
Municipality/ Metro City
NH
Railways
Note:
1. Use ‘X’ to indicate not existing and ‘9’ to indicate that a feature exists.
2. From the above table, the conclusions on the land use sensitivity are to be drawn. For
example, if a sensitive land use falls at a distance of 6 km, for this site industries with
pollution potential of 5-7 km then additional pollution control measures byondjust
meeting MINAS may be required.
Site Suitability
Distance to < 0.5 km 0.5 to 2 2 to 5 km 5 to 7 km 7 to 15 km > 15 km

sensitive land km
use
Impact
potential of
industry
Upto 0.5 km B G G G G G
0.5 to 2 km R B G G G G
2 to 5 km R R B G G G
5 to 7 km R R R B G G
>7 km R R R R B G
R Requires additional pollution control measures

towards best available technologies
B Requires additional pollution control measures
beyond the technologies considered for meeting
minimal national standards
viii
G Suitable
B. Air pollution sensitivity assessment
a) Air Pollution Potential of Industries
Industry Category Impact Potential*

A1 > 7 km
A2 5 to 7 km
A3 2 to 5 km
A4 < 2 km
* impact potential considered without pollution control equipment in operation
b) Air Quality in the Area
Distance Upto 0.5 0.5 to 2 km 2 to 5 km 5 to 7 km 7 to 15 km or

from IE Site km more
Air Quality*
* Low, Moderate, high, Critical
Concentration Industrial SO2 SPM Residential SO2 &NO2 SPM
Low L 0-40 0-180 L 0-30 0-70

Moderate M 40-80 180-360 M 30-60 70-140
High H 80-120 360-540 H 60-90 140-210
Critical C > 120 > 540 C >90 >210
Site Suitability
Distance to < 0.5 km 0.5 to 2 km 2 to 5 km 5 to 7 km 7 to 15 > 15

‘critical’/’high’ km km
quality
Impact potential
of industry
A4 (>2 km) R B G G G G
A3 (2 to 5 km) R R B G G G
A2 (5 to 7 km) R R R B G G
A1 (>7 km) R R R R B G

ix

G Suitable
c) Land Use Sensitivity: Site Suitability

sensitive land use km km
Impact potential
of industry
R Requires additional pollution control measures towards

best available technologies
B Requires additional pollution control measures beyond the
technologies considered for meeting minimal national
standards
G Suitable
d) Dispersion Sensitivity
Distance Upto 0.5 km 0.5 to 2 km 2 to 5 km 5 to 7 km 7 to 15 km or

from IE more
Site
Dispersion
Sensitivity*
* Low, Moderate, high, Critical
Site Suitability

critical/high km km
dispersion area
Impact potential
of industry
x

G Suitable
e) Confirmatory Tests through Air Quality Modelling
The Kilder Dispersion Model system (POI-KILD and ARE-KILD) of the NILU programs
specially prepared for planning use for the Central Pollution Control Board in India
should preferably be used to confirm the site suitability by placing the data from existing
industries of the suitable type at the proposed site and assessing its behavior.
f) Suitability to Air Polluting Industries
Summary statement showing the site suitability for air polluting industries form various
aspects as above (air quality, dispersion, land use, modeling) should be summarized as
below:
S.No. Parameter Suitability
Site 1 Site 2
1 Land use sensitivity assessment

2 Dispersion sensitivity
2 Air Quality
4 Air quality modelling
C. Water pollution sensitivity assessment
Water pollution potential of industries

Wastewater disposal options (place of disposal) available
imilative capacity of the receiving water body (taking into consideration source
strength (pollution potential of industries), dilution factor (flow), use, existing quality
etc.)
Location of wastewater disposal point in the river or receiving water body
Flow available in the rivers/streams (hydrology of the receiving water bodies);
Uses in the downstream (ecological sensitivity and functions of the receiving water
bodies);
Existing water quality (ref. Chapter 2)
Assimilative capacity
xi
a) Water Pollution Potential of Industries
Industry Description Impact

Category Potential*
W1 Industry with ≥25 kld discharge of effluents (irrespective of Very High

organic load) that are not easily bio-degradable (BOD/COD ≤
0.4) or toxic or having TDS generation more than 10,000 mg/l
Industry with 100-500 kld discharge of non-toxic effluents with
organic load of >100 kg/d with BOD/COD ratio = 0.4-0.7)
Industry with > 500 kld of discharge of non-toxic effluents
(irrespective of organic load) that are less bio-degradable
(BOD/COD=0.4-0.7)
W2 Industry with 100-500 kld discharge of non-toxic effluents with High
organic load of < 100 kg/day with BOD/COD ≤ 0.7
Industry with >500 kld discharge of non-toxic effluents
(irrespective of organic load) that are less biodegradable
(BOD/COD ratio of >0.7)
Industry with ≥25 kld discharge of effluents (irrespective of
organic load) having TDS generation >5,000 mg/l but ≤ 10,000
mg/l
W3 Industry with 25-500 kld of non-toxic effluents that are easily Medium to
biodegradable or less biodegradable (BOD/COD ratio of > 0.7) High
Industry with ≥25 kld discharge of effluents (irrespective of
organic load) having TDS generation ≤ 5,000 mg/l
W4 Industry with <25 kld discharge of effluents that are easily Low
biodegradable (BOD/COD ratio of > 0.7) and non-toxic
* impact potential considered without pollution control equipment in operation
xii
Table: Indicative Classification of Industries based on their Air/Water Pollution
Potential
S. Industries Air Pollution Water Pollution

No. Potential Potential
1 Thermal Power Plants – Coal or coke based ≥ 200/210 MW A1 W2

2 Thermal Power Plants – Coal or coke based < 200/210 MW A3 W2
3 Thermal Power Plants – gas based A3 W4
4 Thermal Power Plants – LDO based A3 W4
5 Oil Refinery, Petroleum Refining A1 W1
6 Petrochemicals A1 W1
7 Integrated Iron and Steel A1 W1
8 Fertilizer A1 W1
9 Copper Smelter A1 W4
10 Zinc Smelter A1 W4
11 Aluminum Smelter A1 W4
12 Lead Smelting A1 W4
13 Cement – large A2 W4
14 Cement – medium A2 W4
15 Cement – small/tiny A4 W4
16 Pesticides – Technical grades A2 W1
17 Pharmaceuticals – bulk drug A2 W1
18 Nitric Acid A1 W2
19 Sulphuric Acid A1 W2
20 Phosphoric acid A2 W2
21 Caustic Soda
a) Mercury cell A3 W1
b) Membrane cell A3 W3
22 Dye and Dye Intermediates A2 W1
23 Sugar A3 W2
24 Organic Chemicals A2 W2
25 Re-Heating (Reverberatory) Furnace, Capacity: large A3 W4
26 Foundries, Cupola, Arc Furnace, Induction Furnaces – large A3 W4
27 Paint (excluding formulation) A2 W2
28 Inorganic Chemicals A2 W2
29 Man-Made Fibres A1 W2
(Synthetic; Semi Synthetic)
30 Boilers More than 15 t/hr A3 W4
i

31 Composite Woolen Mills - Chromium and Sulphide A4 W2

32 Glass - Soda lime and Borosilicate and Other special glasses A3 W4
(other than Lead)
Furnace capacity - Product draw capacity more than 60 tpd
33 Glass - Lead Glass: Furnaces of all Capacity A3 W4
34 Wood and wood products A4 W4
a) Ply wood manufacturing
b)Fibre board manufacturing
c)Furniture
35 Leather Tannery
a) Chrome Tanneries / Combined Chrome and Vegetable A4 W1
Tanneries
b) Vegetable Tanneries
A4 W1
36 Pulp and Paper

a) Agro Based A2 W1
b) Waste Paper Based A2 W2
c) Paper Board without cooking operation A2 W3
37 Composite Woollen Mills - Common A4 W2
38 Fermentation A3 W2
(Maltries and Breweries)
39 Asbestos manufacturing – medium/large
(Including all process involving the use of Asbestos) A1 W3
40 Boilers
W4
Less than 2 t/hr A4
W4
2 to 5 t/hr A4
41 Slaughter House, Meat and Sea Food Industry - Slaughter A3 W2
House - all capacities
42 Food and Fruit Processing
a) Soft Drinks A4 W3
b) Fruit Based Synthetic A4 W3
(More than 0.4 tpd)
c) Bottle and Tetrapack A4 W3
Synthetic (Less than 0.4 tpd)
43 Food and Fruit Processing - Fruit and Vegetables A4 W4

44 Food and Fruit Processing – Bakery A4 W4

45 Food and Fruit Processing
a) Bread and Bread and Biscuit Continuous Process (More A4 W4
than 20tpd)
Non Continuous Process (Less than 20tpd)
b) Biscuit Production
A4 W4
all capacities
46 Food and Fruit Processing - Confectioneries
> 4 tpd A4 W4
Below 4 tpd A4 W4
47 Distillery (Alchohol distillery) A2 W1
48 Pesticides – formulation A2 W3
49 Pharmaceuticals – formulation A4 W3
50 Cotton Textile Industries A4 W2
51 Electroplating A4 W1
52 Stone Crushing A3 W4
53 Coke Oven A1 W1
54 Synthetic Rubber A3 W2
55 Calcium Carbide A3 W4
56 Carbon Black A2 W4
57 Natural Rubber A4 W4
58 Re-Heating (Reverberatory) Furnace, Capacity: A4 W4
small/medium
59 Foundries, Cupola, Arc Furnace, Induction Furnaces – A4 W4
small/medium
60 Lime Kiln A3 W4
61 Jute Processing A4 W4
62 Dairy A4 W3
63 Ceramic Industry A3 W4
64 Starch and Glucose A4 W2
65 a) Pottery and Earthen Ware A4 W4
b) SSI and Using Furnace oil A4 W4
66 Soap (Detergent Formulation) A4 W4
67 Bone mills and allied industries A4 W2
Indicative List of Industries of A4W4 Category
1. Agarbatti and similar products

2. Agricultural equipment manufacturing units
3. Air conditioner’s parts
4. Aluminium doors / windows / fittings / furniture
5. Assembly and repair of cycles
6. Assembly and repair of electrical gadgets
7. Assembly and repair of sewing machines
8. Assembly and repair of electronic goods
9. Assembly of coolers
10. Atta chakki, spices (except chillies)
11. Auto parts (lathe work)
12. Automobile servicing and repairing stations
13. Ball pen refill
14. Barbed wire making
15. Basket making
16. Batic works
17. Belts and buckles
18. Bio-gas
19. Biscuit, cakes, and cookies making
20. Black smithy
21. Bianco cake
22. Block making and Photo enlarging
23. Book binding
24. Bread and bakeries
25. Brooms & Brushes
26. Bulbs (battery)
27. Button making, fixing of buttons and hooks
28. Candles
29. Cane and bamboo products
30. Canvas bags and hold-all making
31. Canned fruits & vegetables
32. Cardboard boxes
33. Carpentry
34. Cement jellies, cement tanks, manhole covers and wall rings etc.
35. Chewing gum and supari
36. Clay and modeling
37. Clarified Fruit Juices from Pulpy fruits
38. Coir and jute products
39. Cold storage < 10 t capacity
40. Confectionery and bubble gum
41. Copper and Brass artwares
42. Cordages, rope and twine making
43. Cotton ginning
44. Cotton and Woolen hosiery (dry processing)
45. Cotton / silk printing (by hand)
46. Crayons
47. Cycle chain
48. Cycle locks
49. Dal Dehusking Unit (Cottage Scale)

50. Dari and carpet weaving
51. Data processing
52. Detergent (without Bhatti - cottage type of industries, only mixing process)
53. Dehydrated Fruits
54. Desiccated Coconut
55. Diamond cutting and polishing work
56. Elastic products
57. Electric fittings (switch, ;lug, pin, etc.)
58. Electric motor parts
59. Electric press assembling
60. Electroplating for jewelry and engraving
61. Embroidery
62. Engineering works
63. Fishing net making
64. Fish Pickles
65. Fish Products : Thermal Processed
66. Flavours (blending operation)
67. Flour mills (excluding roller mills)
68. Fountain pens, ball pens and felt pens
69. Framing of pictures and mirrors
70. Fruit processing and preservation - pickles, fruit crushers etc.
71. Fruit and Vegetable Preserves and Candies
72. Fruit Jam, Jellies and Marmalades
73. Fruit Squashes and Syrups
74. Fruit Toffees
75. Garment making (no bleaching or dyeing)
76. Gold and Silver Threads
77. Groundnut decorticating
78. Handloom weaving
79. Hangers
80. Hats, caps, turban including embroidery
81. Hosiery products (without dyeing and bleaching)
82. Honey-Based Beverages
83. Ice boxes and body of the coolers
84. Ice creams, ice candy
85. Instant Pickles
86. Iron grills and door making
87. Jam, jellies and fruits preserves
88. Jewellery items
89. Key rings
90. Khadi and handloom
91. Knife making
92. Kulfi and confectionery
93. Kumkum, kajal, tika, etc
94. Lace products
95. Lactic Beverage : Cereal Based
96. Laundry and dry cleaning
97. Leather and Rexene made ups
98. Leather footwear (does not include any kind of tanning)
99. Manjan and hair oil

100. Manufacture of mineral water
101. Manufacture of tooth paste, tooth powder, shampoo, nail polish, hair oil by mixing process
102. Manufacture of biddies
103. Manufacture of made-up textiles goods such as curtains, mosquito nets, mattress bedding material, pillow
covers and bags etc.
104. Manufacture of metal building components such as grills, gates, doors and window frame, water tanks,
wire net etc. (use of coal is not permitted)
105. Manufacture of milk products such as butter, ghee etc..
106. Manufacture of mirrors and photo frames
107. Manufacture of musical instruments
108. Manufacture of paper and card board products (pulp and paper mfg. excluded)
109. Manufacturing of ice-cream
110. Manufacturing of ink for fountain pens (formulation only)
111. Manufacturing of office and household furniture and appliances-steel and wood
112. Manufacturing of optical frames
113. Manufacturing of scientific and mathematical instruments (Engg. works & Assly.
114. Manufacturing of surgical gauges and bandages
115. Manufacturing of writing instruments (pens, pencils, etc.)
116. Mushrooms : Production and Preservation
117. Marble stone items
118. Mattress and pillows without blowing process
119. Metal lathe cutting
120. Mini Rice Mill
121. Motor winding works
122. Musical instruments (including repairs)
123. Nails, screws, rolling shutters (from finished material)
124. Name plate making
125. Oil ginning and expelling (no hydrogenation and no refining)
126. Packing boxes for shirts etc.
127. Pan masala
128. Papad making
129. Paper bags
130. Paper stationery items and book binding
131. Parboiled Paddy (Dry Heat Method)
132. Peanut Chikki
133. Pencil and pen manufacturing units
134. Photographs, printings (including sign board painting)
135. Photosetting
136. Photostat and cyclostyling
137. Pickles and Chutneys
138. Garland of flowers
139. Processing of condiments spices, groundnuts and dal etc
140. Pulse mills
141. Rakhee making
142. Ready-made garments and apparel making (dry processing)
143. Repairs of watches and clocks
144. Rice Flakes
145. Rubber stamps
146. Saree fall making
147. Saw mills

148. Scissors making
149. Screen printing
150. Screw and nails
151. Shoe laces
152. Silver foil making
153. Small electronic components
154. Soap making (only mixing process)
155. Soft drink making (not excluding 500 bottles per day)
156. Spectacles and optical frames
157. Spices (Masala) Powder
158. Sports goods
159. Stamp pads
160. Stationery articles (except manufacturing of paper and inks)
161. Steel furniture
162. Stone engraving
163. Stone, marble, granite cutting, polishing and finishing
164. Stove pipe, alpine and safety pins, aluminum buttons, (by hand process)
165. Surgical bandages rolling and cutting
166. Surgical instruments and equipment
167. Table lamps and shades
168. Tailoring
169. Textile weaving
170. Thread balls, and cotton fillings
171. Tin boxes and makings
172. Toys and dolls
173. Turmeric, salt and spices grinding units
174. Typewriter parts, manufacturing and assembling
175. Tyre retreating
176. Umbrella assembly
177. Velvet embroidered shoes/shawls
178. Vermicelli and Macaroni
179. Village oil ghani
180. Village pottery industry (without bhatti)
181. Water meters repairing
182. Water tanks
183. Welding works
184. Wet grinding
185. Wood carving and decorative woodwares
186. Wooden furniture works
187. Wool balling and lachhee making
188. Wool knitting (with machine)
189. Xerox and photocopying; and
190. Zari making
ANNEXURE VI
Site Establishment Factors for IE Development
Selection of Enterprises
For an IE built to relocate industry there is no need for an admission policy; all
establishments involved in the move must be housed. If new enterprises are to be
introduced into any IE, it becomes a matter of selecting from among the applicants those
most suitable in the light of national industrial objectives. This involves the assignment
of priorities. How far an admission policy is applied is open to question. On some IEs it
is obvious that the objective has been to fill the vacant plots as quickly as possible.
However, the factors normally to be considered in connection with the applicant
enterprise are:
Its degree of complementarity with existing or prospective establishments in the

estate
Its level of technology
The employment it will provide
The use it will make of local materials
The relative priority assigned to each of these will depend on the principal goal of the IE.
An applicant enterprise that can provide services needed by establishments on the IE
should be given a high priority. Its presence could obviate the necessity for the IE
administration to supply such services. A high level of technology is to be encouraged
provided it does not run counter to the goal of increasing employment. Preference should
be given to entrepreneurs who are prepared to modernize their equipment. In a few
instances this has been made a condition for admission.
If an establishment uses electricity or water at a rate per worker much greater than that
allowed for in the design of the estate, the expansion of other establishments may be
restricted. If a firm needs a great deal of space per worker, the employment potential of
the estate is reduced. Industries in which there is a high risk of fire or explosion could
cause damage to other properties on an IE. Industries handling toxic materials can affect
the quality of output of food processing industries. Nuisance can be caused by the
excessive emission of dust (e.g., stone crushing), smoke (e.g., brickworks) or offensive
odours (e.g. tanneries). On a large IE it may be possible to accept such industries by
assigning them to special zones, but that is not possible on a smaller estate.
Selection of Entrepreneurs
The many objectives of an IE can be summed up in the words "industrial expansion". To

attain this, it is essential that the firms on the estate increase productivity and profitability.
This will largely depend on the entrepreneurial acumen of their managers. IEs may, and
do, shelter firms that neither contribute to the development objective of the enterprise nor
to returns on sponsors’ investment. Therefore, the entrepreneurial ability of the applicants
must be ascertained. A good screening procedure will help to identify the right type of
entrepreneur. To prevent speculation with freehold plots, entrepreneurs should only be
accepted if their investment projects have been approved by the authorities and if they can
submit proof that adequate financial resources have been secured. Speculators will be
screened out in this way.
If the reason for the application is the transfer of an existing enterprise, then information
on the credit-worthiness of the applicant may be obtainable from his bank, and on his
business reputation by discreet inquiries in the trade. It is more difficult if an applicant is
proposing to engage in a new line of business. An effort should be made to ascertain
what experience, if any, he has in that field. Lack of experience need not necessarily
disqualify him if he is in a position to employ the necessary expertise. His ability as a
manager may be gauged by the success of his current undertaking.
Control of Investor Activities
Orderly development of an estate requires some controls on investor activities. Their

main purpose is to ensure that investors behave as good neighbours, construct buildings
which are in conformity with an overall plan for the estate, and use and maintain them in
a proper way. The controls should also bind the developer to certain standards and
policies. Investors (especially those which might be classed as high quality, like
electronics or medical equipment manufacturers) will normally seek assurances that no
unsuitable development will take place in or near the estate, e.g. activities involving
odours, smoke or dust. Controls can take the form of conditions attached to a licence or
lease agreement, or as a set of by-laws or protective covenants, and may include the
following:
Limitation on Types of Activity
In many developing countries and economies in transition, environmental factors were

often neglected when factories were established in the past. While everything should be
done to reduce their environmental impact, it may not always be possible, for economic
and social reasons, to curtail activities. The establishment of new polluting factories,
however, should be discouraged. The short-term gain brought by accepting these plants
is unlikely to outweigh the long-term cost to society and the environment. Industries
requiring special safety precautions such as refineries and explosives manufacturing
should be assigned to separate areas, or IEs located well away from residential areas.
Building Restrictions
Building plans should be subject to approval by the estate developer, in addition to any
approvals from planning authorities or other agencies involved in building control.
Normally, the developer will have a set of guidelines indicating the height and design
restrictions, the building line (x metres back from the centre of the road or the edge of the
plot), and the built-over or building/open space ratio in each plot. In many IEs the ratio is
50, i.e. the building area can occupy half the plot area. In some higher quality IEs the
building/open space ratio may be as low as 30:70. If the estate is close to an airport there
may be also restrictions on lighting and advertising signs. Plots and buildings must be
completed/occupied within an agreed period. Without authorization no changes in the
purpose of a building, subletting or alterations to buildings may take place.
Parking
All well-planned IEs have parking restrictions. Each investor may be obliged to provide
enough parking space for cars and trucks on the site to avoid parking on roadways. Truck
parking in front of buildings may be prohibited.
Storage
The developer will often set down standards or guidelines for the storage of chemicals
and/or hazardous goods. The developer may reserve the right to improve the storage of
such goods.
Safety
Each building should conform to fire regulations and industrial safety standards.
Pollution
Domestic sewage can usually be discharged into the sewer system. Industrial liquid
effluent is normally treated at the plant prior to discharge. The estate developer or
environmental authority should approve the proposals for treatment of industrial waste
and the equipment to measure the volume of the discharge. They may find it necessary to
limit the volume of the discharge from time to time and to vary the discharge standards to
comply with new environmental regulations.
Substances which would damage the sewerage system would be prohibited; These
include: any liquids at a temperature exceeding 45oC; substances such as adhesives or
paint which form viscous or solid coatings on the system; petroleum or other inflammable
spirits; radio-active substances; effluents with high levels of acidity or alkalinity (i.e. with
a pH value below 6 or above 9); and substances which produce fumes or odours. No
effluent or harmful material should be allowed to enter storm water drains.
Solid waste must be stored safely (if possible in closed containers) until it is removed.
Air pollution must be kept below the standards set by the estate by using effective
combustion processes and/or installing scrubbers or filters.
ANNEXURE VII
A Compilation of Legal Instruments
Table: A Compilation of Legal Instruments
Sl. Legal Instrument Responsible Chemical Use Objective of Relevant Articles/Provisions

No. (Type, Reference, Ministries or Categories/Pollutants Legislation
Year) Bodies
1 Air (Prevention Central Pollution Air pollutants from chemical The prevention, control Section 2: Definitions
and Control of Control Board and industries and abatement of air Section 21: Consent from State Boards
Pollution) Act, State Pollution pollution Section 22: Not to allow emissions exceeding prescribed
1981 amended Control Boards limits
1987 Section 24: Power of Entry and Inspection
Section 25: Power to Obtain Information
Section 26: Power to Take Samples
Section 37-43: Penalties and Procedures
2 Air (Prevention Central Pollution Air pollutants from chemical The prevention, control Rule 2: Definitions
and Control of Control Board and industries and abatement of air Rule 9: Consent Applications
Pollution) (Union State Pollution pollution
Territories) Rules, Control Boards
1983
3 Water (Prevention Central Pollution Water Pollutants from water The prevention and Section 2: Definitions
and Control of Control Board and polluting industries control of water Section 20: Power to Obtain Information
Pollution) Act, State Pollution pollution and also Section 21: Power to Take Samples
1974 amended Control Boards maintaining or restoring Section 23: Power of Entry and Inspection
1988 the wholesomeness of Section 24: Prohibition on Disposal
water Section 25: Restriction on New Outlet and New Discharge
Section 26: Provision regarding existing discharge of
sewage or trade effluent
Section 27: Refusal or withdrawal of consent by state
boards
4 Water (Prevention Central Pollution Water Pollutants from water The prevention and Rule 2: Definitions
and Control of Control Board and polluting industries control of water
Rule 30: Power to take samples
Pollution) Rules, State Pollution pollution and also
1975 Control Boards maintaining or restoring Rule 32: Consent Applications
the wholesomeness of
water
5 The Environment Ministry of All types of environmental Protection and Section 2: Definitions
(Protection) Act, Environment and pollutants Improvement of the
Section 7: Not to allow emission or discharge of
1986, amended Forests, Central Environment
environmental pollutants in excess of prescribed standards
1991 Pollution Control
Board and State Section 8: Handing of Hazardous Substances
Pollution Control
Boards Section 10: Power of Entry and Inspection
Section 11: Power to take samples
6 Environmental Ministry of All types of Environmental Protection and Rule 2: Definitions
(Protection) Rules, Environment and Pollutants Improvement of the
Rule 3: Standards for emission or discharge of
1986 Forests, Central Environment
environmental pollutants
(Amendments in Pollution Control
1999, 2001, 2002, Board and State Rule 5: Prohibition and restriction on the location of
2002, 2002, 2003, Pollution Control industries and the carrying on process and operations in
2004) Boards different areas
Rule 13: Prohibition and restriction on the handling of
hazardous substances in different areas
Rule 14: Submission of environmental statement
7 Hazardous Waste MoEF, CPCB, Hazardous Wastes generated Management & Rule 2: Application
(Management and SPCB, DGFT, Port from industries using hazardous Handling of hazardous Rule 3: Definitions
Handling) Rules, Authority and chemicals wastes in line with the Rule 4: Responsibility of the occupier and operator of a
1989 amended Customs Authority Basel convention facility for handling of wastes
2000 and 2003 Rule 4A: Duties of the occupier and operator of a facility
Rule 4B: Duties of the authority
Rule 5: Grant of authorization for handling hazardous
wastes
Rule 6: Power to suspend or cancel authorization
Rule 7: Packaging, labeling and transport of hazardous
wastes
Rule 8: Disposal sites
Rule 9: Record and returns
Rule 10: Accident reporting and follow up

Rule 11: Import and export of hazardous waste for
dumping and disposal
Rule 12: Import and export of hazardous waste for
recycling and reuse
Rule 13: Import of hazardous wastes
Rule 14: Export of hazardous waste
Rule 15: Illegal traffic
Rule 16: Liability of the occupier, transporter and operator
of a facility
Rule 19: Procedure for registration and renewal of
registration of recyclers and re-refiners
Rule 20: Responsibility of waste generator
8 Manufacture Ministry of Hazardous Chemicals - Toxic, Regulate the Rule 2: Definitions
Storage and Import Environment & Explosive, Flammable, manufacture, storage Rule 4: responsibility of the Occupier
of Hazardous Forests, Chief Reactive and import of Hazardous Rule 5: Notification of Major Accidents
Chemicals Rules, Controller of Chemicals Rule 7-8: Approval and notification of site and updating
1989 amended Imports and Rule 10-11: Safety Reports and Safety Audit reports and
2000 Exports, CPCB, updating
SPCB, Chief Rule 13: Preparation of Onsite Emergency Plan
Inspector of Rule 14: Preparation of Offsite Emergency Plan
Factories, Chief Rule 15: Information to persons likely to get affected
Inspector of Dock Rule 16: Proprietary Information
Safety, Chief Rule 17: Material Safety Data Sheets
Inspector of Mines, Rule 18: Import of Hazardous Chemicals
AERB, Chief
Controller of
Explosives, District
Collector or
District Emergency
Authority, CEES
under DRDO
9 Chemical CCG, SCG, DCG, Hazardous Chemicals - Toxic, Emergency Planning Rule 2: Definitions
Accidents LCG and MAH Explosive, Flammable, Preparedness and Rule 5: Functions of CCG
(Emergency Units Reactive Response to chemical Rule 7: Functions of SCG
Planning, accidents Rule 9: Functions of DCG
Preparedness and Rule 10: Functions of LCG

Response) Rules,
1996
10 EIA Notification, MoEF, SPCB Chemicals/pollutants expected Requirement of Rule 2: Requirements and procedure for seeking
1994 to be generated from industrial environmental clearance environmental clearance of projects
activities before establishment of
or modernization /
expansion of certain
type of industries/
projects.
11 Batteries SPCB, CPCB and Lead Acid Batteries To control the hazardous Rule 2: Application
(Management and MoEF waste generation (lead Rule 3: Definitions
Handling) Rules, waste) from used lead Rule 4: Responsibilities of manufacturer, importer,
2001. acid batteries assembler and re-conditioner
Rule 5: Registration of Importers
Rule 7: Responsibilities of dealer
Rule 8: Responsibilities of recycler
Rule 9: Procedure for registration / renewal of registration
of recyclers
Rule 10: Responsibilities of consumer or bulk consumer
Rule 11: Responsibilities of auctioneer
Rule 14: Computerization of Records and Returns
12 Public Liability Ministry of Hazardous Substances To provide immediate Section 2: Definitions
Insurance Act, Environment & relief to persons affected Section 3: Liability to give relief in certain cases on
1991 amended Forests, District by accident involving principle of no fault
1992 Collector hazardous substances Section 4: Duty of owner to take out insurance policy
Section 7A: Establishment of Environmental Relief Fund
Section 14-18: Penalties and Offences
13 Public Liability Ministry of Hazardous Substances To provide immediate Rule 2: Definitions
Insurance Rules, Environment & relief to persons affected Rule 6: Establishment of administration of fund
1991 amended Forests, District by accident involving Rule 10: Extent of liability
1993 Collector hazardous substances Rule 11: Contribution of the owner to environmental relief
and also for Establishing fund
an Environmental Relief
fund
14 Factories Act, Ministry of Labour, Chemicals as specified in the Control of workplace Section 2: Interpretation
1948 DGFASLI and Table environment, and Section 6: Approval, licensing and registration of factories
Directorate of providing for good Section 7A: General duties of the occupier
Industrial Safety health and safety of Section 7B: General duties of manufacturers etc., as
and workers regards articles and substances for use in factories
Health/Factories Section 12: Disposal of wastes and effluents
Inspectorate Section 14: Dust and fume
Section 36: Precautions against dangerous fumes, gases,
etc.
Section 37: Explosion or inflammable dust, gas, etc.
Chapter IVA: Provisions relating to Hazardous processes
Section 87: Dangerous operations
Section 87A: Power to prohibit employment on account of
serious hazard
Section 88: Notice of certain accident
Section 88A: Notice of certain dangerous occurrences
Chapter X: Penalties and procedures
15 The Petroleum Ministry of Petroleum (Class A, B and C - Regulate the import, Section 2: Definitions
Act, 1934 Petroleum and as defined in the rules) transport, storage, Section 3: Import, transport and storage of petroleum
Natural Gas production, refining and Section 5: Production, refining and blending of petroleum
blending of petroleum Section 6: Receptacles of dangerous petroleum to show a
warning
Section 23-28 Penalties and Procedure
16 The Petroleum Ministry of Petroleum (Class A, B and C - Regulate the import, Rule 2: Definition
Rules, 2002 Petroleum and as defined in the rules) transport, storage, Chapter I part II: General Provision
Natural Gas, production, refining and Chapter II: Importation of Petroleum
Ministry of blending of petroleum Chapter III: Transport of Petroleum
Shipping (for Chapter VII: Licenses
notification of
authorized ports for
import), Ministry
of Environment &
Forests or SPCB
(for clearance of
establishment of
loading/unloading
facilities at ports)
Chief Controller of
Explosives, district
authority,
Commissioner of
Customs, Port
Conservator, State
Maritime Board
(Import)
17 The Explosives Ministry of Explosive substances as defined To regulate the Section 4: Definition
Act, 1884 Commerce and under the Act manufacture, Section 6: Power for Central government to prohibit the
Industry possession, use, sale, manufacture, possession or importation of especially
(Department of transport, export and dangerous explosives
Explosives) import of explosives Section 6B: Grant of Licenses
with a view to prevent
accidents
18 The Explosive Ministry of Explosive substances as defined To regulate the Rule 2: Definition
Rules, 1983 Commerce and under the Act manufacture, Chapter II: General Provisions
Industry and Chief possession, use, sale, Chapter III: Import and Export
Controller of transport, export and Chapter IV: Transport
Explosives, port import of explosives Chapter V: Manufacture of explosives
conservator, with a view to prevent Chapter VI: Possession sale and use
customs collector, accidents Chapter VII: Licenses
railway
administration
19 The Gas Cylinder Ministry of Gases (Toxic, non toxic and Regulate the import, Rule 2: Definition
Rules, 2004 Commerce and non flammable, non toxic and storage, handling and Chapter II: General Provisions
Industry and Chief flammable, Dissolved transportation of gas Chapter III: Importation of Cylinder
Controller of Acetylene Gas, Non toxic and cylinders with a view to Chapter IV: Transport of Cylinder
Explosives, port flammable liquefiable gas other prevent accidents Chapter VII: Filling and Possession
conservator, than LPG, LPG
customs collector,
DGCA, DC, DM,
Police (sub
inspector to
commissioner)
20 The Static and Ministry of Gases (Toxic, non toxic and Regulate the import, Rule 2: Definition
Mobile Pressure Commerce and non flammable, non toxic and manufacture, design, Chapter III: Storage
Vessels (Unfired) Industry and Chief flammable, Dissolved installation, Chapter IV: Transport
Rules, 1981 Controller of Acetylene Gas, Non toxic and transportation, handling, Chapter V: Licenses
Explosives, port flammable liquefiable gas other use and testing of
conservator, than LPG, LPG mobile and static
customs collector, pressure vessels
DGCA, DC, DM, (unfired) with a view to
Police (sub prevent accidents
inspector to
commissioner)
21 The Motor Vehicle Ministry of Hazardous and Dangerous To consolidate and Section 2: Definition
Act, 1988 Shipping, Road Goods amend the law relating Chapter II: Licensing of drivers of motor vehicle
Transport and to motor vehicles Chapter VII: Construction equipment and maintenance of
Highways motor vehicles
22 The Central Motor Ministry of Hazardous and Dangerous To consolidate and Rule 2: Definition
Vehicle Rules, Shipping, Road Goods amend the law relating Rule 9: Educational qualification for driver’s of goods
1989 Transport and to motor vehicles carriages carrying dangerous or hazardous goods
Highways including to regulate the Rule 129: Transportation of goods of dangerous or
transportation of hazardous nature to human life
dangerous goods with a Rule 129A: Spark arrestors
view to prevent loss of Rule 130: Manner of display of class labels
life or damage to the Rule 131: Responsibility of the consignor for safe
environment transport of dangerous or hazardous goods
Rule 132: Responsibility of the transporter or owner of
goods carriage
Rule 133: Responsibility of the driver
Rule 134: Emergency Information Panel
Rule 135: Driver to be instructed
Rule 136: Driver to report to the police station about
accident
Rule 137: Class labels
23 The Mines Act Ministry of Coal Use of toxic and inflammable Safety of the mine Section 2: Definitions
1952 and Mines gases, dust or mixtures workers Chapter IV: Mining operations and management of mines
Chapter V: Provisions as to health and safety
Chapter IX: Penalties and procedure
24 The Custom Act, CBEC, Ministry of Hazardous Goods To prevent entry of Section 2: definitions
1962 Finance illegal hazardous goods Section 11: Power to Prohibit Importation or Exportation
or banned goods of Goods
including hazardous or
banned chemicals
25 The Merchant Ministry of All packaged cargo including For safe handling and Section 3: Definitions
Shipping Act, Shipping, Road Dangerous and hazardous transportation of cargo Section 331: Carriage of Dangerous Goods
1958 amended in Transport and goods as defined in the rules including dangerous
2002 and 2003 Highways goods to prevent
accident
26 Merchant Shipping Ministry of All packaged cargo including For safe handling and
(carriage of Cargo) Shipping, Road Dangerous and hazardous transportation of cargo
Rules 1995 Transport and goods as defined in the rules including dangerous
Highways goods to prevent
accident
27 The Indian Port Ministry of All Chemicals - handling and For control of activities Section 2: Definitions
Act, 1908 Shipping, Road storage on ports including safety Chapter IV: Rules for the safety of shipping and the
Transport and of shipping and conservation of ports
Highways conservation of ports Chapter VII: Provisions with respect to penalties
28 The Dock Ministry of Labour, All Chemicals termed as Safety of Dock workers
Workers, (Safety, DGFASLI and dangerous goods including handling of
Health and Directorate of Dock dangerous goods
Welfare) Act, Safety
1986
ANNEXURE VIII
Form 1 (Application for Obtaining EIA Clearance)
FORM 1
(I) Basic Information
Name of the Project:
Location / site alternatives under consideration:
Size of the Project: *
Expected cost of the project:
Contact Information:
Screening Category:
• Capacity corresponding to sectoral activity (such as production capacity for

manufacturing, mining lease area and production capacity for mineral
production, area for mineral exploration, length for linear transport
infrastructure, generation capacity for power generation etc.,)
(II) Activity
1. Construction, operation or decommissioning of the Project involving actions,

which will cause physical changes in the locality (topography, land use, changes
in water bodies, etc.)
Details thereof (with

approximate quantities /rates,
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No wherever possible) with source
of information data
1.1 Permanent or temporary change in land use,
land cover or topography including increase
in intensity of land use (with respect to
local land use plan)
1.2 Clearance of existing land, vegetation and
buildings?
1.3 Creation of new land uses?
1.4 Pre-construction investigations e.g. bore

houses, soil testing?
1.5 Construction works?
19
1.6 Demolition works?
1.7 Temporary sites used for construction works

or
housing of construction workers?
1.8 Above ground buildings, structures or
earthworks including linear structures, cut
and
fill or excavations
1.9 Underground works including mining or
tunneling?
1.10 Reclamation works?
1.11 Dredging?
1.12 Offshore structures?
1.13 Production and manufacturing processes?
1.14 Facilities for storage of goods or materials?
1.15 Facilities for treatment or disposal of solid

waste or liquid effluents?
1.16 Facilities for long term housing of
operational workers?
1.17 New road, rail or sea traffic during
construction or operation?
1.18 New road, rail, air waterborne or other

transport infrastructure including new or
altered routes and stations, ports, airports etc?
1.19 Closure or diversion of existing transport

routes or infrastructure leading to changes in
traffic
movements?
1.20 New or diverted transmission lines or

pipelines?
1.21 Impoundment, damming, culverting,
realignment or other changes to the
hydrology of watercourses or aquifers?
1.22 Stream crossings?
1.23 Abstraction or transfers of water form ground

or surface waters?
1.24 Changes in water bodies or the land surface
affecting drainage or run-off?
20
1.25 Transport of personnel or materials for
construction, operation or decommissioning?
1.26 Long-term dismantling or decommissioning
or restoration works?
1.27 Ongoing activity during decommissioning
which could have an impact on the
environment?
1.28 Influx of people to an area in either
temporarily or permanently?
1.29 Introduction of alien species?
1.30 Loss of native species or genetic diversity?
1.31 Any other actions?
2. Use of Natural resources for construction or operation of the Project (such as land,
water, materials or energy, especially any resources which are non-renewable or in
short supply):

approximate quantities /rates,
S.No. Information/checklist confirmation Yes/No wherever possible) with source
of information data
2.1 Land especially undeveloped or agricultural
land (ha)
2.2 Water (expected source & competing users)

unit: KLD
2.3 Minerals (MT)
2.4 Construction material – stone, aggregates,

and / soil (expected source – MT)
2.5 Forests and timber (source – MT)
2.6 Energy including electricity and fuels
(source, competing users) Unit: fuel (MT),
energy (MW)
2.7 Any other natural resources (use appropriate
standard units)
21
3. Use, storage, transport, handling or production of substances or materials,
which could be harmful to human health or the environment or raise
concerns about actual or perceived risks to human health.

approximate
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No quantities/rates, wherever
possible) with source of
information data
3.1 Use of substances or materials, which are
hazardous (as per MSIHC rules) to human health or
the environment (flora, fauna, and
water supplies)
3.2 Changes in occurrence of disease or affect disease
vectors (e.g. insect or water borne diseases)
3.3 Affect the welfare of people e.g. by changing living

conditions?
3.4 Vulnerable groups of people who could be affected

by the project e.g. hospital patients, children, the
elderly etc.,
3.5 Any other causes
4. Production of solid wastes during construction or operation or

decommissioning (MT/month)

approximate
information data
4.1 Spoil, overburden or mine wastes
4.2 Municipal waste (domestic and or commercial

wastes)
4.3 Hazardous wastes (as per Hazardous Waste

Management Rules)
22
4.4 Other industrial process wastes
4.5 Surplus product
4.6 Sewage sludge or other sludge from effluent

treatment
4.7 Construction or demolition wastes
4.8 Redundant machinery or equipment
4.9 Contaminated soils or other materials
4.10 Agricultural wastes
4.11 Other solid wastes
5. Release of pollutants or any hazardous, toxic or noxious substances to air

(Kg/hr)

approximate
information data
5.1 Emissions from combustion of fossil fuels from
stationary or mobile sources
5.2 Emissions from production processes

5.3 Emissions from materials handling including
storage or transport
5.4 Emissions from construction activities including
plant and equipment
5.5 Dust or odours from handling of materials
including construction materials, sewage and
waste
23
5.6 Emissions from incineration of waste
5.7 Emissions from burning of waste in open air (e.g.
slash materials, construction debris)
5.8 Emissions from any other sources
6. Generation of Noise and Vibration, and Emissions of Light and Heat:
Yes/No Details thereof (with

approximate
quantities/rates, wherever
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation possible) with source of
information data with
source of information
data
6.1 From operation of equipment e.g. engines,
ventilation plant, crushers
6.2 From industrial or similar processes
6.3 From construction or demolition
6.4 From blasting or piling
6.5 From construction or operational traffic
6.6 From lighting or cooling systems
6.7 From any other sources
24
7. Risks of contamination of land or water from releases of pollutants into the
ground or into sewers, surface waters, groundwater, coastal waters or the sea:

approximate
information data
7.1 From handling, storage, use or spillage of
hazardous materials
7.2 From discharge of sewage or other effluents to

water or the land (expected mode and place of
discharge)
7.3 By deposition of pollutants emitted to air into the

land or into water
7.4 From any other sources
7.5 Is there a risk of long term build up of pollutants in

the environment from these sources?
8. Risk of accidents during construction or operation of the Project, which could

affect human health or the environment

approximate
information data
8.1 From explosions, spillages, fires etc from storage,

handling, use or production of hazardous
substances
8.2 From any other causes
8.3 Could the project be affected by natural disasters

causing environmental damage (e.g. floods,
earthquakes, landslides, cloudburst etc)?
25
9. Factors which should be considered (such as consequential development) which
could lead to environmental effects or the potential for cumulative impacts with
other existing or planned activities in the locality

approximate
S. No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No quantities/rates, wherever
information data
9.1 Lead to development of supporting.
lities, ancillary development or development
stimulated by the project which could have
impact on the environment e.g.:
• Supporting infrastructure (roads, power supply,

waste or waste water treatment, etc.)
• housing development
• extractive industries
• supply industries
• other
9.2 Lead to after-use of the site, which could havean

impact on the environment
9.3 Set a precedent for later developments
9.4 Have cumulative effects due to proximity to other

existing or planned projects with similar effects
(III) Environmental Sensitivity
Aerial distance (within 15

S.No. Areas Name/ km.)
Identity Proposed project location
boundary
1 Areas protected under international conventions,

national or local legislation for their ecological,
landscape, cultural or other related value
26
2 Areas which are important or sensitive for
ecological reasons - Wetlands, watercourses or
other water bodies, coastal zone, biospheres,
mountains, forests
3 Areas used by protected, important or sensitive
species of flora or fauna for breeding, nesting,
foraging, resting, over wintering, migration
4 Inland, coastal, marine or underground waters
5 State, National boundaries
6 Routes or facilities used by the public for access

to recreation or other tourist, pilgrim areas
7 Defence installations
8 Densely populated or built-up area
9 Areas occupied by sensitive man-made land uses

(hospitals, schools, places of worship, community
facilities)
10 Areas containing important, high quality or scarce

resources
(ground water resources, surface resources,
forestry, agriculture, fisheries, tourism, minerals)
11 Areas already subjected to pollution or

environmental damage. (those where existing legal
environmental standards are exceeded)
12 Areas susceptible to natural hazard which could
cause the project to present environmental
problems
(earthquakes, subsidence, landslides, erosion,
flooding
or extreme or adverse climatic conditions)
(IV). Proposed Terms of Reference for EIA studies
27
ANNEXURE IX
Pre-Feasibility Report: Additional Points for Possible Coverage
Pre-Feasibility Report: Additional Points for Possible Coverage
1. Description of the Project
General
Location details
- Longitude & latitude
- Nearest major towns and industries
- Approach to site
- Road: existing highway/roads distance from site
- Distance from nearest airport (existing/proposed)
- Ecologically sensitive areas
Location & vicinity plan identifying the areas proposed for plant
Land availability
- Extent of land available for project, township, wastewater disposal, etc.
- Land use pattern (agricultural, barren, forest etc.)
- Incase of agricultural land, whether irrigated/non irrigated, number of crops
- Land ownership (Govt. Pvt., tribal, non-tribal endowment, patta, etc.)
- Prevailing land cost details
- Estimation of population affected, homestead oustees, land ownership details
Topography of the area
Ground profile and levels permanent features
Soil condition soil investigation results
Site data: whether the site is flood prone & HFL of the site
Drainage patterns
Water information to be furnished by owner
Source of circulating/consumptive water
Location in relation to river/canal/dam, water availability and quality
Lean season water availability and allocation source in case main source not perennial.
Approved water allocation quota (drinking, irrigation and industrial use) and surplus
availability
Inter-state issue, if any
Requirement of construction of dam/barrage storage etc. if any and its location.
Feasible ways of bringing water to site indicating constraints if any.
Transportation arrangement contemplated: fuel transportation
Proposed wastewater disposal / utilization
Requirement of land for wastewater disposal pipeline system in to nearby canals, open
nallahs, rivers, etc.
New facilities needed
Source of construction water and domestic water
Source of construction power & start up power
Source of construction operational power
Source of availability of construction material like sand, brick, stone chips, borrow earth etc.
Proximity to infrastructure facilities (hospital, schools, residential accommodation) available
Technical Profile of the Project
Technical parameters of the IE and components

Size of the IE
Types of industries
Capacities and specific pollutants of concern
Identification of sites, master planning, development and management aspects
i
Justification of the Project
Importance of the proposed IE for Quality of Life

Current demand scenario of the Industrial estate
Alternatives to meet the requirement and
Post project scenario on residual demand
Details of Socio-economic Consequences
Importance of the proposed product for Quality-of-Life

Employments and infrastructure addition
Status of land availability, current and post project land use variation
Wastewater and Solid waste Disposal Studies
Wastewater and solid waste disposal studies including but not limited to preparation of
disposal plan based on disposal system study results in accordance approved disposal
methods and criteria
- Disposal locations like TSDF and other wastewater receiving bodies.
- Linking with the other disposal pipeline networking ex: with guard pond, STP wastewater
disposal lines.
- Flow variations in the receiving body according to the seasonal variations
- Quantity of treated wastewater will be discharged in to rivers, open nallah, sea, etc.
- Prepare technical specifications for disposal system
- Cost of treatment of wastewater
Project Schedule
Outline project implementation and procurement arrangement including contract packaging

and a project implementation schedule.
Project benefits
2. Evaluation of alternative sites
Evaluation of alternative sites having least possible impacts and justification for the proposed
project site may be discussed.
3. Environmental Aspects
Noise level monitoring data collected from locations from all the four sides surrounding the
project area and also at sensitive receptors. If any incompatible land-use attributes fall within
a 15 km radius of the project boundary, provide details on:
- Public water supply areas from rivers/surface water bodies, from groundwater
- Scenic areas/tourism areas/hill resorts
- Religious places, pilgrim centers that attract over 10 lakh pilgrims a year
- Protected tribal settlements (notified tribal areas where industrial activity is not
permitted); CRZ
- Monuments of national significance, World Heritage Sites
- Cyclone, Tsunami prone areas (based on last 25 years);
- Airport areas
- Any other feature as specified by the State or local government and other features as
locally applicable, including prime agricultural lands, pastures, migratory corridors, etc.
If ecologically sensitive attributes fall with in a 15 km radius of the project boundary, please
give details. Ecologically sensitive attributes include
ii
- National parks
- Wild life sanctuaries Game reserve
- Tiger reserve/elephant reserve/turtle nesting ground
- Breeding grounds
- Core zone of biosphere reserve
- Habitat for migratory birds
- Mangrove area
- Tropical forests
- Important lakes
- Endangered species of flora and fauna
The above listing is not exhaustive. Thus the proponent may provide additional necessary
information, felt appropriate, to include in the pre-feasibility study report in support of selecting
the site for the proposed developmental activities. The Concerned EAC/SEAC during scrutiny,
may specifically ask for any additional information/ data required to substantiate the requirement
to prescribe the ToR for EIA studies. However, it is to make clear that all the required further
information by EAC/SEAC may be mentioned in one single letter, within the prescribed time.
iii
ANNEXURE X
Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations
TYPES OF MONITORING AND NETWORK DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
A. Types of Monitoring
Monitoring refers to the collection of data using a series of repetitive measurements of
environmental parameters (or, more generally, to a process of systematic observation). The
environmental quality monitoring programme design will be dependent upon the monitoring
objectives specified for the selected area of interest. The main types of EIA monitoring activities
are:
Baseline monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters during the pre-project

period for the purpose of determining the range of variation of the system and establishing
reference points against which changes can be measured. This leads to the assessment of the
possible (additional available) assimilative capacity of the environmental components in pre-
project period w.r.t. the standard or target level.
Effects monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters during project
construction and implementation to detect changes which are attributable to the project to provide
the necessary information to:
− verify the accuracy of EIA predictions; and
− determine the effectiveness of measures to mitigate adverse effects of projects on the
environment.
− Feedback from environmental effect monitoring programs may be used to improve
the predictive capability of EIAs and also determine whether more or less stringent
mitigation measures are needed
Compliance monitoring is the periodic sampling or continuous measurement of
environmental parameters to ensure that regulatory requirements and standards are being met.
Compliance and effects monitoring occurs during the project construction, operation, and
abandonment stages. The resources and institutional set-up should be available for the monitoring
at these stages. All large-scale construction projects will require some construction stage
monitoring. To control the environmental hazards of construction as specified in the EIA, a
monitoring program should be established to ensure that each mitigation measure is effectively
implemented. There are numerous potential areas for monitoring during operations.
The scope of monitoring topics discussed in this chapter is limited to Baseline and Effects
monitoring. In addition, this chapter will also discuss the Compliance monitoring during the
construction phase. Post-project monitoring requirements are discussed in the EMP.
Before any field monitoring tasks are undertaken there are many institutional, scientific, and fiscal
issues that must be addressed in the implementation of an environmental monitoring program.
Careful consideration of these issues in the design and planning stages will help avoid many of
the pitfalls associated with environmental monitoring programs. Although these issues are
important but the discussions here are confined to the monitoring network design component.
B. Network Design
Analysis of Significant Environmental Issues
At the outset of planning for an environmental monitoring network, the EIA manager may not
know exactly what should be monitored, when monitoring should begin, where it should monitor,
which techniques should be employed, and who should take responsibility for its conduct.
Because there are usually a number of objective decisions associated with network design to be
i
made, it is important to start with an analysis of environmental issues. The scoping phase of an
EIA is designed to identify and focus on the major issues. Scoping should provide a valuable
source of information on the concerns that need to be addressed by the monitoring network
design. These are project specific as well as specific to the environmental setting of the location
where the project is proposed to be located.
Hence, the network designs are associated with questions like:
What are the expected outputs of the monitoring activity?

Which problems do we need to address to? etc.
Defining the output will influence the design of the network and optimize the resources used for
monitoring. It will also ensure that the network is specially designed to optimize the information
on the problems at hand.
What to Monitor?
The question of what to monitor is associated with the identification of VECs.
VECs are generally defined as environmental attributes or components of the environment that are
valued by society as identified during the scoping stage of the project. They are determined on
the basis of perceived public concerns. For example, changes to water quality and quantity could
have implications on fish by affecting habitat, food supply, oxygen, and contaminant uptake.
Similarly, employment and business, and economies are both VECs that serve as pathways.
The choice of VECs is also related to the perceived significant impact of the project
implementation on important environmental components. In general, the significance or
importance of environmental components is judged based on:
legal protection provided (for example, rare and endangered species)

political or public concerns (for example, resource use conflicts and sustainable development)
scientific judgment (for example, ecological importance); or
commercial or economic importance
However, in addition to their economic, social, political or ecological significance, the chosen
VEC should also have unambiguous operational ease, be accessible to prediction and
measurement; and be susceptible to hazard. Once the VECs are defined, the VECs may be
directly measured (for example, extent of habitat for an endangered species). In cases where it is
impossible or impractical to directly measure the VECs, the chosen measurement endpoints or
environmental indicators must correspond to, or be predictive of assessment endpoints.
The chosen environmental indicators must be: 1) measurable; 2) appropriate to the scale of
disturbance/ contamination; 3) appropriate to the impact mechanism; 4) appropriate and
proportional to temporal dynamics; 5) diagnostic; and 6) standardized; as well as have: 1) a low
natural variability; 2) a broad applicability; and 3) an existing data series.
Where, How and How Many Times to Monitor?
These are the other components of Monitoring Network Design. These questions are best
answered based on local field conditions, capacity and resources available, prevailing legal and
regulatory priorities, etc. For this screening or reconnaissance Surveys of the study area also
necessary. This may also include some simple inexpensive measurements and
assimilative/dispersion modeling. The data will give some information on the prevailing special
and temporal variations, and the general background air pollution in the area. The number of
monitoring stations and the indicators to be measured at each station in the final permanent
network may then be decided upon based on the results of the screening study as well as on the
ii
knowledge of the sources of the proposed development and prevailing local
environmental/meteorological conditions. The best possible definition of the air pollution
problem, together with the analysis of the resources: personnel, budget and equipment available,
represent the basis for the decision on the following questions:
What spatial density (number) of sampling stations is required? How many samples are
needed and during what period (sampling (averaging) time and frequency)?
Where should the stations be located?
What kind of equipment should be used?
What additional background information is needed?
− meteorology
− topography
− population density
− emission sources and emission rates
− effects and impacts
How will the data be made available/communicated?
C. Site Selection
This normally means that for designing a monitoring programme in an (study) area which might
have an impact, several monitoring stations are needed for characterizing the baseline conditions
of the impacted area. When considering the location of individual samplers, it is essential that the
data collected are representative for the location and type of area without the undue influence
from the immediate surroundings. In any measurement point in the study area the total ambient
concentration is the representative of:
natural background concentration

regional background
impact of existing large regional sources such as Industrial emissions and other power plants
To obtain the information about the importance of these different contributions it is therefore
necessary to locate monitoring stations so that they are representative for different impacts. In
addition to the ambient pollution data, one would often need other data governing the variations
such as meteorological data for air pollution, to identify and quantify the sources contributing to
the measurements. When considering the location of individual samplers, it is essential that the
data collected are representative for the location and type of area without undue influence from
the immediate surroundings.
iii
ANNEXURE XI
Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes
GUIDANCE FOR ASSESSMENT OF BASELINE COMPONENTS AND ATTRIBUTES
Attributes Sampling Measurement Method Remarks
Network Frequency
A. Air
Meteorological Minimum 1 site in the Min: 1 hrly Mechanical / automatic IS 5182 Part 1-20 Sit-
Wind speed project impact area observations from weather station specific primary data is
Wind direction requirements continuous records Rain gauge essential
Dry bulb temperature As per IMD Secondary data from
Wet bulb temperature Other additional site(s) IMD, New Delhi for the
As per IMD
Relative humidity are require depending nearest IMD station
Rainfall upon the model applied
Solar radiation or site sensitivities
Cloud cover
Pollutants 24 hrly twice a week Gravimetric (High –
10 to 15 locations in Monitoring Network
the project impact area Volume) Minimum 2 locations in
SPM 8 hrly twice a week
Gravimetric (High – upwind side, more sites in
RPM Volume with Cyclone)
SO2 24 hrly twice a week downwind side / impact
EPA Modified West & zone
NO2 Gaeke method
CO All the sensitive receptors
Arsenite Modified need to be covered
H2S* Jacob & Hochheiser
NH*3 Measurement Methods
NDIR technique
HC* Methylene-blue As per CPCB standards
Fluoride* Nessler’s Method for NAQM, 1994
Pb* Infra Red analyzer
VOC-PAH* Specific lon meter
Mercury*
(parameters are given in ToR for EIA
studies based on nature of project,
raw material & process technology,
i
Network Frequency
location-nature/activities within of air
B. Noise
Hourly equivalent noise levels Same as for Air At lest one day Instrument : Sensitive Min: IS: 4954- 1968 as
Pollution along with continuous in each Noise level meter adopted by CPCB
others Identified in season on a working (preferably recording type)
study area and non-working day
Hourly equivalent noise levels Inplant (1.5 m from Same as above for day Instrument : Noise level CPCB / OSHA
machinery or high and night meter
emission processes)
Hourly equivalent noise levels Highways (within 500 Same as above for day Instrument : Noise level CPCB / IS : 4954-1968
meters from the road and night meter
edge)
Peak particle velocity 150- 200m from blast Based on hourly PPV meter
site observations
C. Land Environment
Soil One surface sample Season-wise Collected and analyzed as The purpose of impact
Particle size distribution from each landfill per soil analysis reference assessment on soil (land
Texture and/or hazardous waste book, M.I.Jackson and soil environment) is to assess
pH site (if applicable) and analysis reference book by the significant impacts
Electrical conductivity prime villages, (soil C.A. Black due to leaching of wastes
Cation exchange capacity samples be collected as or accidental releases and
Alkali metals per BIS specifications) contaminating
Sodium Absorption Ratio (SAR) in the study area
Permeability
Porosity
ii
Network Frequency
Land Use/Landscape
Location code At least 20 points along Drainage once in the Global positioning Drainage within the plant
Total project area with plant boundary study period and land system area and surrounding is
Topography and general major land use categories from Topo-sheets very important for storm
Drainage (natural) use categories in the secondary data (local Satellite Imageries water impacts.
Cultivated, forest plantations, study area. ` maps) and satellite (1:25,000) From land use maps
water bodies, roads and imageries Satellite Imageries sensitive receptors
settlements (1:25,000) (forests, parks, mangroves
etc.) can be identified
D. Solid Waste
Quantities: For green field unites it Process wise or Guidelines
Based on waste generated from is based on secondary activity wise for IS 9569 : 1980
per unit production data base of earlier respective raw
IS 10447 : 1983
Per capita contribution plants. material used.
Domestic waste IS 12625 : 1989
Collection, transport and disposal
depends upon the IS 12647 : 1989
system
season also IS 12662 (PTI) 1989
Process Waste
Quality (oily, chemical,
biological)
General segregation into Grab and Composite Process wise or Analysis
biological/organic/inert/hazardous samples activity wise for IS 9334 : 1979
Loss on heating respective raw
IS 9235 : 1979
pH material used.
Electrical Conductivity Domestic waste IS 10158 : 1982
Calorific value, metals etc. depends upon the
season also
iii
Network Frequency
Quality Grab and Composite Process wise or Analysis Impacts of hazardous

Permeability And porosity samples. Recyclable activity wise for IS 9334 : 1979 waste should be
Moisture pH components have to respective raw performed critically
IS 9235 : 1979
Electrical conductivity analyzed for the material used. depending on the waste
recycling requirements IS 10158 : 1982 characteristics and place
Loss on ignition
of discharge. For land
Phosphorous
disposal the guidelines
Total nitrogen should be followed and
Cation exchange capacity impacts of accidental
Particle size distribution releases should be
Heavy metal assessed
Ansonia
Flouride
E. Biological Environment (aquatic)

Primary productivity Considering probable Season changes are Standards techniques Seasonal sampling for
Aquatic weeds impact, sampling very important (APHA et. Al. 1995, Rau aquatic biota
Enumeration of points and number of and Wooten 1980) to be One season for terrestrial
phytoplankton, zooplankton and samples to be decided followed for sampling and biota, in addition to
benthos on established measurement vegetation studies during
Fisheries guidelines on monsoon season
Diversity indices ecological studies
Preliminary assessment
Trophic levels based on site eco-
environment setting Microscopic analysis of
Rare and endangered species plankton and
within 10/25 km radius
Sanctuaries / closed areas / meiobenthos, studies of
from the proposed site
Coastal regulation zone (CRZ) macrofauna, aquatic
Terrestrial Samples to collect from
vegetation and application
Vegetation – species, list, upstream and
of indices, viz. Shannon,
economic importance, forest downstream of
similarity, dominance IVI
iv
Network Frequency
produce, medicinal value discharge point, nearby etc.
Importance value index (IVI) of tributaries at down Point quarter plot-less
trees stream, and also from method (random
Wild animals dug wells close to sampling) for terrestrial
activity site vegetation survey.
Avifauna For forest studies, Secondary data to collect
Rare and endangered species chronic as well as from Government offices,
Sanctuaries / National park / short-term impacts NGOs, published
Biosphere reserve should be analyzed literature
warranting data on Plankton net
micro climate
Sediment dredge
conditions
Depth sampler
Microscope
Field binocular
F. Socio-economic
Demographic structure Socio-economic survey Different impacts Primary data collection Secondary data from
Infrastructure resource base is based on occurs during through R&R surveys (if census records, statistical
Economic resource base proportionate, stratified construction and require) or community hard books, toposheets,
Health status: Morbidity pattern and random sampling operational phases of survey are based on health records and
Cultural and aesthetic attributes method the project personal interviews and relevant official records
questionnaire available with Govt.
agencies
* Project Specific
v
ANNEXURE XII
Sources of Secondary Data Collection
Annexure XIIA: Potential Sources of Data For EIA
Information Source
Air Environment
1. Meteorology- Temperature, Rainfall, Humidity, Indian Meteorology Department, Pune
Inversion, Seasonal Wind rose pattern (16 point
compass scale), cloud cover, wind speed, wind
direction, stability, mixing depth
2. Ambient Air Quality- 24 hourly concentration of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB),
SPM, RPM, SO2, NOx, CO State Pollution Control Board (SPCB),
Municipal Corporations
Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF)
State Department of Environment (DoEN)
Water Environment
3. Surface water- water sources, water flow (lean Central Water Commission (CWC),
season), water quality, water usage, Downstream Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB),
water users State Pollution Control Board (SPCB), Central Water
Command area development plan and Power Research Institute (CWPRS), Pune
Catchment treatment plan State Irrigation Department
Hydel Power generation organizations such as
NHPC, State SEBs
4. Ground Water- groundwater recharge Central Ground Water Board (CGWB)
rate/withdrawal rate, ground water potential Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA)
groundwater levels (pre monsoon, post monsoon), State Ground Water Board (SGWB)
ground water quality, changes observed in quality National Water Development Authority (NWDA)
and quantity of ground water in last 15 years
5. Coastal waters- water quality, tide and current data, Department of Ocean Development, New Delhi
bathymetry State Maritime Boards
Naval Hydrographer’s Office, Dehradun
Port Authorities
National Institute of Oceanography (NIO), Goa
Biological Environment
6. Description of Biological Environment- inventory District Gazetteers
of flora and fauna in 7 km radius, endemic species, National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
endangered species, Aquatic Fauna, Forest land, Hyderabad
forest type and density of vegetation, biosphere, Forest Survey of India, Dehradun
national parks, wild life sanctuaries, tiger reserve, Wildlife Institute of India
elephant reserve, turtle nesting ground, core zone World Wildlife Fund
of biosphere reserve, habitat of migratory birds, Zoological Survey of India
routes of migratory birds Botanical Survey of India
Bombay Natural History Society, (BNHS), Mumbai
State Forest Departments
State Fisheries Department
Ministry of Environment and Forests
State Agriculture Departments
State Agriculture Universities
Land Environment
7. Geographical Information-Latitude, Longitude, Toposheets of Survey of India, Pune
Elevation ( above MSL) National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
Space Application Centre (SAC), Ahmedabad
REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE 1

Information Source
8. Nature of Terrain, topography map indicating Survey of India Toposheets
contours (1:2500 scale) National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
State Remote Sensing Centre,
Space Application Centre (SAC), Ahmedabad
9. Hydrogeology- Hydrogeological report (in case of NRSA, Hyderbad
ground water is used/area is drought Survey of India Toposheets
prone/wastewater is likely to discharged on land) Geological Survey of India
Geomorphological analysis (topography and State Geology Departments
drainage pattern) State Irrigation Department
Geological analysis (Geological Department of Wasteland Development, Ministry of
Formations/Disturbances- geological and structural Rural Areas
maps, geomorphological contour maps, structural National Water Development Authority (NWDA)
features, including lineaments, fractures, faults and
joints)
Hydrogeological analysis (disposition of permeable
formations, surface-ground water links, hydraulic
parameter determination etc)
Analysis of the natural soil and water to assess
pollutant absorption capacity
10. Nature of Soil, permeability, erodibility Agriculture Universities
classification of the land State Agriculture Department
Indian Council for Agriculture Research
State Soil Conservation Departments
National Bureau of Soil Survey and Landuse Planning
Central Arid Zone Research Institute (CAZRI),
Jodhpur
11. Landuse in the project area and 10 km radius of the Survey of India- Toposheets
periphery of the project All India Soil and Landuse Survey; Delhi
National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
Town and County Planning Organisation
State Urban Planning Department
Regional Planning Authorities (existing and proposed
plans)
Village Revenue Map- District Collectorate
Directorate of Economics and Statistics-State
Government
Space Application Centre, Ahmedabad
12. Coastal Regulation Zones- CRZMP, CRZ Urban Development Department

classification, Demarcation of HTL and LTL∗ State Department of Environment
State Pollution Control Board
Space Application Centre*
Centre for Earth Sciences Studies,
Thiruvanthapuram*
Institute of Remote Sensing, Anna University
Chennai*
Naval Hydrographer’s Office, Dehradun*
National Institute of Oceanography, Goa*
National Institute of Ocean Technology, Chennai
Centre for Earth Science Studies
∗ Agencies authorized for approval of demarcation of HTL and LTL

Information Source
Social
13. Socioeconomic - population, number of houses Census Department
and present occupation pattern within 7 km from District Gazetteers- State Government
the periphery of the project District Statistics- District Collectorate
International Institute of Population Sciences,
Mumbai (limited data)
Central Statistical Organisation
14. Monuments and heritage sites District Gazetteer
Archeological Survey of India,
INTACH
District Collectorate
Central and State Tourism Department
State Tribal and Social Welfare Department
Natural Disasters
15. Seismic data (Mining Projects)- zone no, no of Indian Meteorology Department, Pune
earthquakes and scale, impacts on life, property Geological Survey of India
existing mines
16. Landslide prone zone, geomorphological Space Application Centre
conditions, degree of susceptibility to mass
movement, major landslide history (frequency of
occurrence/decade), area affected, population
affected
17. Flood/cyclone/droughts- frequency of occurrence Natural Disaster Management Division in

per decade, area affected, population affected Department of Agriculture and Cooperation
Indian Meteorological Department
Industrial
18. Industrial Estates/Clusters, Growth Centres State Industrial Corporation
Industrial Associations
State Pollution Control Boards
Confederation Indian Industries (CII)
FICCI
19. Physical and Chemical properties of raw material Material and Safety Data Sheets
and chemicals (Industrial projects); fuel quality ENVIS database of Industrial Toxicological Research
Centre, Lucknow
Indian Institute Petroleum
20. Occupational Health and Industrial Hygiene- Central Labour Institute, Mumbai
major occupational health and safety hazards, Directorate of Industrial Safety
health and safety requirements, accident histories ENVIS Database of Industrial Toxicological Research
Centre, Lucknow
National Institute of Occupational Health,
Ahmedabad
21. Pollutant release inventories (Existing pollution Project proponents which have received EC and have
sources in area within 10 km radius) commenced operations
22. Water requirement (process, cooling water, DM EIA Reports

water, Dust suppression, drinking, green belt, fire National and International Benchmarks
service)

Annexure XIIB: Summary of Available Data with Potential Data Sources for EIA
Agency Information Available

1. Archaeological Survey of India Inventory of monuments and sites of national importance- Listing and
Department of Culture documentation of monuments according to world heritage, pre
Government of India historic, proto historic and secular, religious places and forts
Janpath, New Delhi - 110011
[email protected]
2. Botanical Survey Of India Photodiversity documentation of flora at National, State and District
P-8, Brabourne Road Calcutta level and flora of protected areas, hotspots, fragile ecosystems, sacred
700001 groves etc
Tel#033 2424922 Identification of threatened species including endemics, their
Fax#033 2429330 mapping, population studies
Email: [email protected]. . Database related to medicinal plants, rare and threatened plant species
Red data book of Indian plants (Vol 1,2, and 3)
RO - Coimbatore, Pune, Jodhpur, Manual for roadside and avenue plantation in India
Dehradun, Allahabad, Gantok,
Itanagar, Port Blair
3. Bureau of Indian Standards Bureau of Indian Standards Committees on Earthquake Engineering
Manak Bhawan, 9 Bahadur Shah and Wind Engineering have a Seismic Zoning Map and the Wind
Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110 002 Velocity Map including cyclonic winds for the country
Tel#3230131, 3233375, 3239402 (10
lines)
Fax : 91 11 3234062, 3239399,
3239382
Email- [email protected]
4. Central Water Commission (CWC) Central Data Bank -Collection, collation and Publishing of
Sewa Bhawan, R.K.Puram Hydrological, Hydrometeorological, Sediment and Water Quality
New Delhi - 110066 data-.
[email protected] Basin wise Master Plans
Flood atlas for India
RO- Bangalore, Bhopal, Flood Management and Development and Operation of Flood
Bhubaneshwar, Chandigarh, Forecasting System- CWC operate a network of forecasting stations
Coimbatore/Chennai, Delhi, Over 6000 forecasts are issued every year with about 95% of the
Hyderabad, Lucknow, Nagpur, forecasts within the permissible limit.
Patna, Shillong, Siliguri and Water Year Books, Sediment Year Books and Water Quality Year
Vadodara Books.
Also actively involved in monitoring of 84 identified projects through
National, State and Project level Environmental Committees for
ensuring implementation of environmental safeguards
5. Central Ground Water Board surveys, exploration, monitoring of ground water development
(HO) N.H.IV, New CGO
Complex,
Faridabad - 121001
RO - Guwahati, Chandigarh,
Ahemadabad, Trivandrum,
Calcutta, Bhopal, Lucknow,
Banglore, Nagpur, Jammu,
Bhubneshwar, Raipur, Jaipur,
Chennai, Hyderabad, Patna
16
Based on web search and literature review

6. Central Pollution Control Board National Air Quality Monitoring Programme
Parivesh Bhawan, CBD-cum-Office National River Water Quality Monitoring Programme- Global
Complex Environment Monitoring , MINARS
East Arjun Nagar, DELHI - 110 032 Zoning Atlas Programme
INDIA Information on 17 polluting category industries (inventory, category
E-mail : [email protected] wise distribution, compliance, implementation of pollution control
programmes
7. Central Arid Zone Research AGRIS database on all aspects of agriculture from 1975 to date
Institute, Jodhpur Also have cell on Agriculture Research Information System;
Working on ENVIS project on desertification
Email : [email protected] Repository of information on the state of natural resources and
desertification processes and their control
Regional Centre at Bhuj in Gujarat The spectrum of activities involves researches on basic resource
inventories; monitoring of desertification, rehabilitation and
management of degraded lands and other areas
8. Central Inland Capture Fisheries Data Base on

Research Institute, Barrackpore- Ecology and fisheries of major river systems of India.
743101, Biological features of commercially important riverine and estuarine
Tel#033-5600177 fish species.
Fax#033-5600388 Production functions and their interactions in floodplain wetlands.
Email : [email protected] Activities - Environmental Impact Assessment for Resource
Management ; Fisheries Resource surveys
9. Central Institute of Brackish Water Repository of information on brackish water fishery resources with
Aquaculture systematic database of coastal fishery resources for ARIS
141, Marshalls Road, Egmore , Agricultural Research Information System (ARIS) database covers
Chennai - 600 008, State wise data on soil and water quality parameters, land use pattern,
Tel# 044-8554866, 8554891, production and productivity trends,
Director (Per) 8554851 Social, economic and environmental impacts of aquaculture farming,
Fax#8554851, Guidelines and effluent standards for aquaculture farming
10. Central Marine Fisheries Research Assessing and monitoring of exploited and un-exploited fish stocks in
Institute (CMFRI), Cochin Indian EEZ
Monitoring the health of the coastal ecosystems, particularly the
endangered ecosystems in relation to artisanal fishing, mechanised
fishing and marine pollution
The institute has been collecting data on the catch and effort and
biological characteristics for nearly half a century based on
scientifically developed sampling scheme, covering all the maritime
States of the country
The voluminous data available with the institute is managed by the
National Marine Living Resources Data Centre (NMLRDC)
11. Central Water and Power Research Numerical and Physical models for hydro-dynamic simulations
Station, Pune
Tel#020-4391801-14; 4392511;
4392825
Fax #020-4392004,4390189
12. Central Institute of Road Transport, Repository of data on all aspects of performance of STUs and a host
Bhosari, Pune of other related road transport parameters
411 026, India.
Tel : +91 (20) 7125177, 7125292,
7125493, 7125494

13. Department of Ocean Development Assessment of environment parameters and marine living resources
(primary and secondary) in Indian EEZ (Nodal Agency NIO Kochi)
Stock assessment, biology and resource mapping of deep sea shrimps,
lobsters and fishes in Indian EEZ (Nodal agency-Fisheries Survey of
India)
Investigations of toxical algal blooms and benthic productivity in
Indian EEZ (Nodal agency- Cochin University of Science and
technology)
Coastal Ocean Monitoring and Prediction System (COMAP) -
monitoring and modelling of marine pollution along entire Indian
coast and islands. Parameters monitored are temp, salinity, DO, pH,
SS, BOD, inorganic phosphate, nitrate, nitrite, ammonia, total
phosphorus, total nitrite, total organic carbon, petroleum
hydrocarbons, pathogenic vibros, pathogenic E.coli, shigella,
salmonella, heavy metals (Cd, Hg, Pb) and pesticide residues (DDT,
BHC, Endosulfan). Monitoring is carried out along the ecologically
sensitive zones and urban areas (NIO Mumbai- Apex coordinating
agency).
Sea Level Measurement Programe (SELMAM)- sea level measurement
at selected stations (Porbandar, Bombay, Goa, Cochin, Tuticorin,
Madras, Machilipatnam, Visakhapatnam, Paradeep, Calcutta and
Kavaratti (Lakshadweep Island)) along Indian coast and islands using
modern tide gauges
Detailed coastal maps through Survey of India showing contour at 1/2
a metre interval in the scale of 1:25000. (Nellore- Machhalipatnam work
already over)
Marine Data Centre (MDC) IMD for Ocean surface meteorology,
GSI for marine geology, SOI for tide levels, Naval Hydrographic
Office for bathymetry, NIO Goa for physical chemical and biological
oceanography, NIO Mumbai for marine pollution, CMFRI for
coastal fisheries, Institute of Ocean Management Madras for coastal
geomorphology
DOD has setup Indian National Centre for Ocean Information
Services (INCOIS) at Hyderabad for generation and dissemination of
ocean data products (near real time data products such as sea surface
temperature, potential fishing zones, upwelling zones, maps, eddies,
chlorophyll, suspended sediment load etc). MDC will be integrated
with INCOIS
Integrated Coastal and Marine Area Management (ICMAM)
programme - GIS based information system for management of 11
critical habitats namely Pichavaram, Karwar, Gulf of Mannar, Gulf of
Khambat, Gulf of Kutch, Malvan, Cochin, Coringa mangroves,
Gahirmata, Sunderbans and Kadamat (Lakshadeep)
Wetland maps for Tamil Nadu and Kerala showing the locations of
lagoons, backwaters, estuaries, mudflats etc (1:50000 scale)
Coral Reef Maps for Gulf of Kachch, Gulf of Mannar, Andaman and
Nicobar and Lakshadeep Islands (1:50,000 scale) indicating the
condition of corals, density etc
14. Environment Protection Training Environment Information Centre- has appointed EPTRI as the
and Research Institute Distributed Information Centre for the Eastern Ghats region of India.
Gachibowli, Hyderabad - 500 019, EIC Collaborates with the Stockholm Environment Institute Sweden
India Phone: +91-40-3001241, Database on Economics of Industrial Pollution Prevention in India
3001242, 3000489 Database of Large and Medium Scale Industries of Andhra Pradesh
Fax: +91-40- 3000361 Environmental Status of the Hyderabad Urban Agglomeration
E-mail: [email protected] Study on ‘water pollution-health linkages’ for a few Districts of A.P

Environment Quality Mapping
Macro level studies for six districts in the State of Andhra Pradesh
Micro level studies for two study zones presenting the permissible
pollutant load and scoping for new industrial categories
Zonation of the IDA, Parwada which helped APIIC to promote the
land for industrial development
Disaster management plan for Visakhapatnam Industrial Bowl Area
15. Forest Survey of India (FSI) State of Forest Report (Biannual)

Kaulagarh Road, P.O., IPE National Forest Vegetation Map (Biannual exercise) (on 1: 1 million
Dehradun - 248 195 scale)
Tel# 0135-756139, 755037, 754507 Thematic mapping on 1:50,000 scale depicting the forest type, species
Fax # 91-135-759104 composition, crown density of forest cover and other landuse National
E-Mail : [email protected] Basic Forest Inventory System
[email protected] Inventory survey of non forest area
Forest inventory report providing details of area estimates,
RO- Banglore, Calcutta, Nagpur topographic description, health of forest, ownership pattern,
and Shimla estimation of volume and other growth parameters such as height and
diameter in different types of forest, estimation of growth,
regeneration and mortality of important species, volume equation and
wood consumption of the area studied
16. Geological Survey of India Environmental hazards zonation mapping in mineral sector
27 Jawaharlal Nehru Road, Calcutta Codification of base line information of geo-environmental
700 016, India Telephone +91-33- appreciation of any terrain and related EIA and EMP studies
2496941 FAX 91-33-2496956 Lineament and geomorphological map of India on 1:20,000 scale.
[email protected] Photo-interpreted geological and structural maps of terrains with
limited field checks.
17. Indian Council of Agriculture A total of 80,000 profiles at 10 kms grid across the country were
Research, analyzed to characterize the soils of India.
Krishi Bhawan, New Delhi, Detailed soil maps of the Country (1:7 million), State (1:250,000) and
Tel#011-338206 districts map (1:50,000) depicting extent of degradation (1:4.4 millions)
have been prepared.
Thematic maps depicting soil depth, texture drainage, calcareousness,
− ICAR complex, Goa- Agro salinity, pH, slope and erosion have been published
metrology Agro-climate characterization of the country based on moisture,
− Central Arid Zone Research thermal and sunshine regimes
Institute- Agro forestry Agro-ecological zones (20) and sub-zones (60) for the country were
− Central Soil salinity Research delineated based on physiography, soils, climate, Length of Growing
Institute, Period and Available Water Content, and mapped on 1:4.4 million
− Indian Institute of Soil Science scale.
− Central Soil and Water Digitization of physiography and soil resource base on 1:50,000 scale
Conservation Research and for 14 States have been completed.
Training Institute .Soil fertility maps of N,P,K,S and Zn have also been developed
− National Bureau of Soil Survey Water quality guidelines for irrigation and naturally occurring
and Landuse Planning saline/sodic water
Calibration and verification of ground water models for predicting
water logging and salinity hazards in irrigation commands
18. Indian Bureau of Mines National mineral inventory for 61 minerals and mineral maps
Indira Bhawan, Civil Lines Nagpur Studies on environmental protection and pollution control in regard
Ph no - 0712-533 631, to the mining and mineral beneficiation operations
Fax- 0712-533 041 Collection, processing and storage of data on mines, minerals and
mineral-based industries, collection and maintenance of world mineral
intelligence, foreign mineral legislation and other related matters

19. Indian Meteorology Department Meteorological data
Shivaji nagar, Pune 41100 Background air quality monitoring network under Global
Atmospheric Watch Programme (operates 10 stations)
RO- Mumbai, Chennai, Calcutta, Seismicity map, seismic zoning map; seismic occurrences and cyclone
New Delhi, Nagpur, Guwahati hazard monitoring; list of major earthquakes
Climatological Atlas of India , Rainfall Atlas of India and
Agroclimatic Atlas of India
Monthly bulletin of Climate Diagnostic Bulletin of India
Environmental Meteorological Unit of IMD at Delhi to provide
specific services to MoEF
20. INTACH Listing and documentation of heritage sites identified by
Natural Heritage, 71 Lodi Estate, New municipalities and local bodies (Listing excludes sites and buildings
Delhi-110 003 under the purview of the Archaeological Survey of India and the State
Departments of Archaeology)
Tel. 91-11-4645482, 4632267/9,
4631818, 4692774, 4641304 Fax : 91-
11-4611290
E-mail : [email protected]
21. Industrial Toxicology Research Activities include health survey on occupational diseases in industrial
Centre workers, air and water quality monitoring studies, ecotoxicological
Post Box No. 80, Mahatma Gandhi impact assessment, toxicity of chemicals, human health risk
Marg, Lucknow-226001, assessment
Phone: +91-522- Five databases on CD-ROM in the area of environmental toxicology
221856,213618,228227; Fax : +91- viz: TOXLINE, CHEMBANK, POISINDEX, POLTOX and
522 228227 PESTBANK. The Toxicology Information Centre provides
Email: [email protected] information on toxic chemicals including household chemicals
ENVIS centre and created a full-fledged computerized database
(DABTOC) on toxicity profiles of about 450 chemicals
22. Indian Institute of Forest Consultancy and research on joint forest management (Ford
Management Foundation, SIDA, GTZ, FAO etc)
Post Box No. 357, Nehru Nagar
Bhopal - 462 003
Phone # 0755-575716, 573799,
765125, 767851
Fax # 0755-572878
23. Indian Institute of Petroleum Fuel quality characterisation

Mohkampur , Dehradun, India, Emission factors
248005
0135- 660113 to 116
0135- 671986
24. Ministry of Environment and Survey of natural resources

Forest National river conservation directorate
Environmental research programme for eastern and western ghats
National natural resource management system
Wetlands conservation programme- survey, demarcation, mapping
landscape planning, hydrology for 20 identified wetlands National
wasteland identification programme
25. Mumbai Metropolitan Regional Mumbai Urban Transport Project

Development Authority Mumbai Urban Development Project
Mumbai Urban Rehabilitation Project
Information on MMR; statistics on councils and corporations Regional
Information Centre- Basic data on population, employment, industries
and other sectors are regularly collected and processed

26. Municipal Corporation of Greater Air Quality Data for Mumbai Municipal Area
Mumbai Water quality of lakes used for water supply to Mumbai
27. Ministry of Urban Development Identification of hazard prone area
Disaster Mitigation and Vulnerability Atlas showing areas vulnerable to natural disasters
Vulnerability Atlas of India Land-use zoning and design guidelines for improving hazard resistant
construction of buildings and housing
Building Materials & Technology State wise hazard maps (on cyclone, floods and earthquakes)
Promotion Council
G-Wing,Nirman Bhavan, New
Delhi-110011
Tel: 91-11-3019367
Fax: 91-11-3010145
E-Mail: [email protected]
28. Natural Disaster Management Weekly situation reports on recent disasters, reports on droughts,
Division in Department of floods, cyclones and earthquakes
Agriculture and Cooperation
29. National Bureau Of Soil Survey & NBSS&LUP Library has been identified as sub centre of ARIC
Land Use Planning (ICAR) for input to AGRIS covering soil science literature generated
P.O. Box No. 426, Shankar Nagar in India
P.O., Nagpur-440010 Research in weathering and soil formation, soil morphology, soil
mineralogy, physicochemical characterisation, pedogenesis, and landscape-
Tel#91-712-534664,532438,534545 climate-soil relationship.
Fax#:91-712-522534 Soil Series of India- The soils are classified as per Soil Taxonomy. The
described soil series now belong to 17 States of the country.
RO- Nagpur, New Delhi, Banglore, Landuse planning- watershed management, land evaluation criteria, crop
Calcutta, Jorhat, Udaipur efficiency zoning
Soil Information system is developed state-wise at 1:250,000 scale.
Presently the soil maps of all the States are digitized, processed and
designed for final output both digital and hardcopy. The thematic layers
and interpreted layers of land evaluation (land capability, land
irrigability and crop suitability), Agro-Ecological Zones and soil
degradation themes are prepared.
Districts level information system is developed for about 15 districts at 1:
50, 000 scale. The soil information will be at soil series level in this system.
Soil resource inventory of States, districts water-sheds (1:250,000;
1:50,000; 1:10,000/8000)
30. National Institute of Ocean Waste load allocation in selected estuaries (Tapi estuary and Ennore
Technology, creek) is one the components under the Integrated Coastal and Marine
Velacherry-Tambaram main road Area Management (ICMAM) programme of the Department of
Narayanapuram Ocean Development ICMAM is conducted with an IDA based credit
Chennai, Tamil Nadu to the Government of India under the Environmental Capacity
Tel#91-44-2460063 / 2460064/ Building project of MoEF (waste assimilation capacity of Ennore
2460066/ 2460067 creek is over)
Fax#91-44-2460645 Physical oceanographic component of Coastal & Ocean monitoring
Predictive System (COMAPS) a long term monitoring program under
the Department of Ocean Development
Identification of suitable locations for disposal of dredge spoil using
mathematical models & environmental criteria
EIA Manual and EIA guidelines for port and harbour projects
31. National Institute of Oceanography, Coastal Ocean Monitoring and Predictions(COMAP)-Monitoring of
Goa coastal waters for physicochemical and biological parameters
including petroleum hydrocarbons, trace metals, heavy metals, and
RO- Mumbai, Kochi biomass of primary (phytoplankton) and secondary (zooplankton,
microbial and benthic organisms)
Marine Biodiversity of selected ecosystem along the West Coast of
India

32. National Botanical Research Dust filtering potential of common avenue trees and roadside shrubs
Institute, has been determined, besides studies have also been conducted on
Post Box No 436 Rana Pratap Marg heavy-metals accumulation potential of aquatic plants supposedly
Lucknow- 226001, useful as indicators of heavy metal pollution in water bodies and
Tel: (+91) 522 271031-35 Fax: (+91) capable of reducing the toxic metals from water bodies.
522 282849, 282881 Assessment of bio-diversity of various regions of India
Lucknow
33. National Geophysical Research Exploration, assessment and management of ground water resources
Institute, Uppal Road, Hyderabad including ground water modelling and pollution studies
Telephone:0091-40-7171124,
FAX:0091-40-7171564
34. National Environmental National Air Quality Monitoring (NAQM) for CPCB
Engineering Research Institute, Database on cleaner technologies of industrial productions
Nagpur
RO- Mumbai, Delhi, Chennai,
Calcutta, Ahmedabad, Cochin,
Hyderabad, Kanpur
35. National Hydrology Institute, Basin studies, hydrometeorological network improvement,
Roorkee hydrological year book, hydrological modelling, regional flood
RO- Belgaum (Hard Rock Regional formulae, reservoir sedimentation studies, environmental hydrology,
Centre), Jammu (Western watershed development studies, tank studies, and drought studies.
Himalayan Regional Centre),
Guwahati (North Eastern Regional
Centre), Kakinada (Deltaic Regional
Centre), Patna (Ganga Plains North
Regional Centre), and Sagar (Ganga
Plains South)
36. National Institute Of Urban Affairs, Urban Statistics Handbook
India Habitat Centre, New Delhi
37. National Institute of Occupational epidemiological studies and surveillance of hazardous occupations
Health including air pollution, noise pollution, agricultural hazards, industrial
Meghaninagar, Ahmedabad hazards in organised sectors as well as small scale industries,
carcinogenesis, pesticide toxicology, etc
RO- Banglore, Calcutta WHO collaborative centre for occupational health for South East Asia
region and the lead institute for the international programme on
chemical safety under IPCS (WHO)
38. NRSA Data Centre Satellite data products (raw data, partially processed (radiometrically
Department of Space, Balanagar, corrected but geometrically uncorrected), standard data
(radiometrically and geometrically corrected), geocoded data(1:50,000
Hyderabad 500 037
and 1:25000 scale), special data products like mosaiced, merged and
Ph- 040-3078560 extracted) available on photographic (B?W and FCC in form of film of
3078664 240 mm X 240mm or enlargements/paper prints in scale varying
[email protected] between 1:1M and 1:12500 and size varying between 240mm and
1000mm) and digital media (CD-ROMs, 8 mm tapes)
39. Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Database for groundwater using remote sensing technology (Regional
Water Mission Remote Sensing Service Centre involved in generation of ground
water prospect maps at 1:50,000 scale for the State of Kerala,
Karnataka, AP, MP and Rajasthan for RGNDWM)
40. Space Application Centre National Natural Resource Information System
Value Added Services Cell (VASC) Landuse mapping for coastal regulation zone (construction setback
Remote Sensing Application Area line) upto 1:12500 scale
Ahmedabad 380 053 Inventory of coastal wetlands, coral reefs, mangroves, seaweeds
079-676 1188 Monitoring and condition assessment of protected coastal areas

Fax- 079-6762735 Wetland mapping and inventory
Mapping of potential hotspots and zoning of environmental hazards
General geological and geomorphological mapping in diverse terrain
Landslide risk zonation for Tehre area
41. State Pollution Control Board State Air Quality Monitoring Programme
Inventory of polluting industries
Identification and authorization of hazardous waste generating
industries
Inventory of biomedical waste generating industries
Water quality monitoring of water bodies receiving wastewater
discharges
Inventory of air polluting industries
Industrial air pollution monitoring
Air consent, water consent, authorization, environment monitoring
reports
42. State Ground Water Board
43. Survey of India Topographical surveys on 1:250,000 scales, 1:50,000 and 1:25,000
scales
Digital Cartographical Data Base of topographical maps on scales
1:250,000 and 1:50,000
Data generation and its processing for redefinition of Indian Geodetic
Datum
Maintenance of National Tidal Data Centre and receiving/ processing
of tidal data of various ports.
Coastal mapping along the Eastern coast line has been in progress to
study the effect of submergence due to rise in sea-level and other
natural phenomenon. Ground surveys have been completed for the
proposed coastal region and maps are under printing.
District planning maps containing thematic information (135 maps)
have been printed out of 249 maps covering half the districts of India.
Districts planning maps for remaining half of the area are being
processed by National Atlas and Thematic Mapping Organisation
(NATMO)
44. Town and Country Planning Urban mapping - Thematic maps and graphic database on towns
Organisation (under progress in association with NRSA and State town planning
department)
45. Wildlife Institute of India Post Bag Provide information and advice on specific wildlife management
No. 18, Chandrabani Dehradun - problems.
248 001, Uttaranchal National Wildlife Database
Tel#0135 640111 -15,
Fax#0135 640117
email : wii@wii .
46. Zoological Survey of India Red Book for listing of endemic species
Prani Vigyan Bhawan Survey of faunal resources
'M' Block, New Alipore
Calcutta - 700 053
Phone # 91-33-4786893, 4783383
Fax # 91-33-786893
RO - Shillong, Pune, Dehradun,
Jabalpur, Jodhpur, Chennai, Patna,
Hyderabad, Canning, Behrampur,
Kozikode, Itanagar, Digha, Port
Bliar, Solan

ANNEXURE XIII
Impact Prediction Tools
Table 1: Choice of Models for Impact Prediction: Air Environment
Model Application Remarks
ISCST 3 Appropriate for point, area and line sources Can take up to 99 sources
Application for flat or rolling terrain Computes concentration on 600
Transport distance up to 50 km valid receptors in Cartesian on polar
Computes for 1 hr to annual averaging coordinate system
periods Can take receptor elevation
Requires source data,
meteorological and receptor data
as input.
AERMOD with Settling and dry deposition of particles; Can take up to 99 sources
AERMET Building wake effects (excluding cavity Computes concentration on 600
region impacts); receptors in Cartesian on polar
Point, area, line, and volume sources; coordinate system
Plume rise as a function of downwind Can take receptor elevation
distance; Requires source data,
Multiple point, area, line, or volume meteorological and receptor data
sources; as input.
Limited terrain adjustment;
Long-term and short-term averaging modes;
Rural or urban modes;
Variable receptor grid density;
Actual hourly meteorology data
PTMAX Screening model applicable for a single Require source characteristics
point source No met data required
Computes maximum concentration and Used mainly for ambient air
distance of maximum concentration monitoring network design
occurrence as a function of wind speed and
stability class
PTDIS Screening model applicable for a single Require source characteristics
point source Average met data (wind speed,
Computes maximum pollutant concentration temperature, stability class etc.)
and its occurrences for the prevailing required
meteorological conditions Used mainly to see likely impact
of a single source
MPTER Appropriate for point, area and line sources Can take 250 sources
applicable for flat or rolling terrain Computes concentration at 180
Transport distance up to 50 km valid receptors up to 10 km
Computes for 1 hr to annual averaging Requires source data,
periods meteorological data and receptor
Terrain adjustment is possible coordinates
CTDM PLUS Point source steady state model, can Can take maximum 40 Stacks and
(Complex estimate hrly average concentration in computes concentration at
Terrain isolated hills/ array of hills maximum 400 receptors
Dispersion Does not simulate calm met
Model) conditions
Hill slopes are assumed not to
exceed 15 degrees
Requires sources, met and terrain
characteristics and receptor details
i
UAM (Urban 3-D grid type numerical simulation model

Airshed Model) Computes O3 concentration short term
episodic conditions lasting for 1 or 2 days
resulting from NOx and VOCs
Appropriate for single urban area having
significant O3 problems
RAM (Rural Steady state Gaussian plume model for Suitable for flat terrains
Airshed Model) computing concentration of relatively stable Transport distance less than 50
pollutants for 1 hr to 1 day averaging time km.
Application for point and area sources in
rural and urban setting
CRESTER Applicable for single point source either in Can take up to 19 Stacks
rural or urban setting simultaneously at a common site.
Computes highest and second highest Unsuitable for cool and high
concentration for 1hr, 3hr, 24hr and annual velocity emissions
averaging times Do not account for tall buildings or
Tabulates 50 highest concentration for topographic features
entire year for each averaging times Computes concentration at 180
receptor, circular wing at five
downwind ring distance 36 radials
Require sources, and met data
OCD (Offshore It determines the impact of offshore Requires source emission data
and coastal emissions from point sources on the air Require hrly met data at offshore
Dispersion quality of coastal regions and onshore locations like water
Model) It incorporates overwater plume transport surface temperature; overwater air
and dispersion as well as changes that occur temperature; relative humidity etc.
as the plume crosses the shore line
Most suitable for overwater sources shore
onshore receptors are below the lowest
shore height
FDM (Fugitive Suitable for emissions from fugitive dust Require dust source particle sizes
Dust Model) sources Source coordinates for area
Source may be point, area or line (up to 121 sources, source height and
source) geographic details
Require particle size classification max. up Can compute concentration at
to 20 sizes max. 1200 receptors
Computes concentrations for 1 hr, 3hr, 8hr, Require met data (wind direction,
24hr or annual average periods speed, Temperature, mixing height
and stability class)
Model do not include buoyant
point sources, hence no plume rise
algorithm
RTDM (Rough Estimates GLC is complex/rough (or flat) Can take up to 35 co-located point
Terrain terrain in the vicinity of one or more co- sources
Diffusion located point sources Require source data and hourly
Model) Transport distance max. up to 15 km to up met data
to 50 km Computes concentration at
Computes for 1 to 24 hr. or annual ave5rage maximum 400 receptors
concentrations Suitable only for non reactive
gases
Do not include gravitational
ii
effects or depletion mechanism
such as rain/ wash out, dry
deposition
CDM(Climatolo It is a climatologically steady state GPM for Suitable for point and area sources
gically determining long term (seasonal or annual) in urban region, flat terrain
Arithmetic average pollutant concentration Valid for transport distance less
Dispersion at any ground level receptor in an urban area than 50 km
Model) Long term averages: One month to
one year or longer
PLUVUE-II Applicable to assess visibility impairment Require source characteristics, met
(Plume due to pollutants emitted from well defined data and receptor coordinates &
Visibility point sources elevation
Model) It is used to calculate visual range reduction Require atmospheric aerosols
and atmospheric discoloration caused by (back ground & emitted)
plumes characteristics, like density,
It predicts transport, atmospheric diffusion, particle size
chemical, conversion, optical effects, and Require background pollutant
surface deposition of point source concentration of SO4, NO3, NOx,
emissions. NO2, O3, SO2 and deposition
velocities of SO2, NO2 and
aerosols
MESO-PUFF II It is a Gaussian, Variable trajectory, puff Can model five pollutants
(Meso scale superposition model designed to account fro simultaneously (SO2, SO4, NOx,
Puff Model) spatial and temporal variations in transport, HNO3 and NO3)
diffusion, chemical transformation and Require source characteristics
removal mechanism encountered on Can take 20 point sources or 5 area
regional scale. source
Plume is modeled as a series of discrete For area source – location,
puffs and each puff is transported effective height, initial puff size,
independently emission is required
Appropriate for point and area sources in Computes pollutant concentration
urban areas at max. 180 discrete receptors and
Regional scale model. 1600 (40 x 40) grided receptors
Require hourly surface data
including cloud cover and twice a
day upper air data (pressure, temp,
height, wind speed, direction)
Do not include gravitational
effects or depletion mechanism
such as rain/ wash out, dry
deposition
iii
Table 2: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Noise Environment
Model Application
FHWA (Federal Highway Noise Impact due to vehicular movement on highways

Administration)
Dhwani For predictions of impact due to group of noise sources in the
industrial complex (multiple sound sources)
Hemispherical sound wave propagation Fore predictive impact due to single noise source
Air Port For predictive impact of traffic on airport and rail road
Table 3: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Land Environment
Digital Analysis Techniques Provides land use / land cover

distribution
Ranking analysis for soil Provides suitability criteria Various parameters viz. depth, texture,
suitability criteria for developmental slope, erosion status, geomorphology,
conversation activities flooding hazards, GW potential, land
use etc., are used.
Table 4: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Water Environment

QUAL-II E Wind effect is insignificant, vertical dispersive effects Steady state or dynamic
insignificant applicable to streams model
Data required
Deoxygenation coefficients, re-aeration coefficients for
carbonaceous, nitrogenous and benthic substances,
dissolved oxygen deficit
The model is found excellent to generate water quality
parameters
Photosynthetic and respiration rate of suspended and
attached algae
Parameters measured up to 15 component can be
simulated in any combination, e.g. ammonia, nitrite,
nitrate, phosphorous, carbonaceous BOD, benthic
oxygen demand, DO, coliforms, conservative
substances and temperature
DOSAG-3, USEPA: Water quality simulation model for streams & canal Steady-state
(1-D) RECEIV – II, A general Water quality model
USEPA
Explore –I, USEPA A river basin water quality model Dynamic, Simple
hydrodynamics
iv
HSPE, USEPA Hydrologic simulation model Dynamic, Simple
hydrodynamics
RECEIVE-II, A general dynamic planning model for water quality
USEPA management
Stanford watershed This model simulates stream flows once historic
model precipitation data are supplied
The major components of the hydrologic cycle are
modeled including interception, surface detention,
overland inflow, groundwater, evapo-transpiration and
routing of channel flows, temperature, TDS, DO,
carbonaceous BOD coliforms, algae, zooplanktons,
nitrite, nitrate, ammonia, phosphate and conservative
substances can be simulated
Hydrocomp model Long-term meteorological and wastewater Time dependant
characterization data is used to simulate stream flows (Dynamic)
and stream water quality
Stormwater Runoff is modeled from overland flow, through surface Time Dependent
Management model channels, and through sewer network Both combined
(SWMM) and separate sewers can be modeled.
This model also enables to simulate water quality
effects to stormwater or combined sewer discharges.
This model simulates runoff resulting from individual
rainfall events.
Battelle Reservoir Water body is divided into segments along the Two Dimensional multi-
model direction of the flow and each segment is divided into segment model
number of horizontal layers. The model is found to
generate excellent simulation of temperature and good
prediction of water quality parameters.
The model simulates temperature, DO, total and
benthic BOD, phytoplankton, zooplankton, organic and
inorganic nitrogen, phosphorous, coliform bacteria,
toxic substances and hydrodynamic conditions.
TIDEP (Turbulent Horizontal temperature homogeneity Coefficient of Steady state model
diffusion vertical turbulent diffusion constant for charge of area
temperature model with depth negligible coefficient of thermal exchange
reservoirs) constant
Data required wind speed, air temperature, air
humidity, net incoming radiation, surface water
temperature, heat exchange coefficients and vertical
turbulent diffusion coefficients.
BIOLAKE Model estimates potential fish harvest from a take Steady state model
Estuary models/ It is simulates tides, currents, and discharge in shallow, Dynamic model
estuarial Dynamic vertically mixed estuaries excited by ocean tides,
model hydrologic influx, and wind action
Tides, currents in estuary are simulated
Dynamic Water It simulates the mass transport of either conservative or Dynamic model
Quality Model non-conservative quality constituents utilizing
v
information derived from the hydrodynamic model
Bay-Delta model is the programme generally used.
Up to 10 independent quality parameters of either
conservative or non-conservative type plus the BOD-
DO coupled relationship can be handled
HEC -2 To compute water surface profiles for stead7y,
gradually: varying flow in both prismatic & non-
prismatic channels
SMS Lake circulation, salt water intrusion, surface water Surface water Modeling
profile simulation model system Hydrodynamic
model
RMA2 To compute flow velocities and water surface Hydrodynamic analysis
elevations model
RMA4 Solves advective-diffusion equations to model up to six Constituent transport
non-interacting constituents model
SED2D-WES Model simulates transport of sediment Sediment transport
model
HIVEL2D Model supports subcritical and supercritical flow A 2-dimensional
analysis hydrodynamic model
MIKE-II, DHI Model supports, simulations of flows, water quality, Professional Engineering
and sediment transport in estuaries, rives, irrigation software package
systems, channels & other water bodies
Table 5: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Biological Environment
Name Relevance Applications Remarks
Flora
Sample Density and Average number of The quadrant sampling technique is
plot relative density individuals species per unit applicable in all types of plant
methods area communities and for the study of
submerged, sessile (attached at the
Density and
base) or sedentary plants
relative dominance Relative degree to which a
species predominates a
community by its sheer
numbers, size bulk or biomass
Frequency and Plant dispersion over an area Commonly accepted plot size:
relative frequency or within a community 0.1 m2- mosses, lichens & other mat-
importance value like plants
Average of relative density, 0.1 m2- herbaceous vegetation
relative dominance and including grasses
relative frequency
10.20 m2 – for shrubs and saplings up
to 3m tall, and
100 m2 – for tree communities
vi
Transects Cover Ratio of total amount of line This methods allows for rapid
& line intercepted by each species assessment of vegetation transition
intercepts and total length of the line zones, and requires minimum time or
methods intercept given its cover equipment of establish
Relative It is the ratio of total Two or more vegetation strata can be
dominance individuals of a species and sampled simultaneously
total individuals of all species
Plot-less Mean point plant Mean point – plant distance Vegetation measurements are
sampling Mean area per plant determined from points rather than
methods being determined in an area with
Mean area per
boundaries
plant
Density and Method is used in grass-land and open
relative density shrub and tree communities
Dominance and It allows more rapid and extensive
relative dominance sampling than the plot method
Importance value Point- quarter method is commonly
used in woods and forests.
Fauna
Species Animal species list List of animal communities Animal species lists present common
list observed directly and scientific names of the species
methods involved so that the faunal resources of
the area are catalogued
Direct Animal species List of animals communities This method involves collection, study
Contact list observed directly and release of animals
Methods
Count Drive counts Observation of animals Count indices provide estimates of
indices by driving them past trained animal populations and are obtained
methods observers from signs, calls or trailside counts or
Temporal counts
(Roadside roadside counts
and aerial
count
methods)
Call counts Count of all animals passing a These estimates, through they do not
fixed point during some stated provide absolute population numbers,
interval of time Provide an index of the various species
in an area
Such indices allow comparisons
through the seasons or between sites or
habitats
Removal Population size Number of species captured Removal methods are used to obtain
methods population estimates of small
mammals, such as, rodents through
baited snap traps
Market Population size Number of species originally It involves capturing a portion of the
population and at some later date
vii
capture estimate marked (T) sampling the ratio of marked to total
methods (M) Number of marked animals animals caught in the population
recaptured (t) and total
number of animals captured
during census (n)
N = nT/t
Table 6: Choice of Models for Impact Predictions: Socio-economic Aspects
Relevance
Name Application Remarks
Extrapolati A prediction is made that is consistent with past and

ve Methods present socio-economic data, e.g. a prediction based
on the linear extrapolation of current trends
Intuitive Delphi technique is used to determine environmental Conjecture Brainstorming Heuristic
Forecasting priorities and also to make intuitive predictions programming Delphi consensus
(Delphi through the process of achieving group consensus
techniques)
Trend Predictions may be obtained by extrapolating present Trend breakthrough precursor
extrapolatio trends Not an accurate method of making socio- events correlation and regression
n and economic forecasts, because a time series cannot be
correlation interpreted or extrapolated very far into the future
with out some knowledge of the underlying physical,
biological, and social factors
Metaphors The experience gained else where is used to predict Growth historical simulation
and the socio-economic impacts commonsense forecasts
analogies
Scenarios Scenarios are common-sense forecasts of data. Each Common-sense
scenario is logically constructed on model of a
potential future for which the degrees of
“confidence” as to progression and outcome remain
undefined
Dynamic Model predicts net economic gain to the society after
modeling considering all inputs required for conversion of raw
(Input- Out materials along with cost of finished product
model)
Normative Desired socio-economic goals are specified and an Morphological analysis technology
Methods attempt is made to project the social environment scanning contextual mapping
backward in time to the present to examine whether - functional array
existing or planned resources and environmental
- graphic method
programmes are adequate to meet the goals
Mission networks and functional
arrays decision trees & relevance
trees matrix methods scenarios
viii
ANNEXURE XIV
Form through which the State Governments/Administration of
the Union Territories Submit Nominations for SEIAA and SEAC
for the Consideration and Notification by the
Central Government
Form for Nomination of a professional/expert as Chairperson / Member / Secretary of the SEIAA / EAC /
SEAC
1 Name (in block letters)
2 Address for communication
3 Age & Date of Birth

(Shall be less than 67 years for the members
and 72 years for the Chairman)
4 Area of Expertise (As per
Appendix VI)
Professional Qualifications Qualification(s) University Year of Percentage of
(As per Appendix VI) passing marks
6 Work experience Position Years of association Nature of work. If

From to Period in required, attach
(High light relevant experience years separate sheets
as per Appendix VI)
Serving Central / State Government Office? Yes/No

Engaged in industry or their associations? Yes/No
Present position and nature of Associated with environmental activism? Yes/No
7
job
If no is the answer for above three, please
specify the present position and name of the
organization
Whether experienced in the Yes/No.
8 process of prior environmental If yes, please specify the experience in a separate sheet (Please restrict to
clearance? 500 words)
Yes/ No
Whether any out-standing
9 If yes, please provide details in a separate sheet (Please restrict to 500
expertise has been acquired?
words).
10 Any other relevant information? May like to attach separate sheets (Research projects, consultancy projects,
publications, memberships in associations, trainings undergone,
international exposure cum experience etc.)
The Government of……………………is pleased to forward the Nomination of Dr./Sh.

…………………...…. for the position of Chairperson / Member / Secretary of the SEIAA / SEAC / EAC
to the Ministry of Environment & Forests, the Government of India for the Notification.
(Authorized Signature with Seal)

REFERENCES
Reference Documents
Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI, “Environment Impact Assessment Notification”

S.O.1533 dated 14th September 2006
Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI, Environment Impact Assessment Notification

2006 - Amendment" S.O. 195 (E) dated 19th January 2009.Environmental Impact Assessment
Notification 2006.
Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI, Charter on Corporate Responsibility for

Environment Protection Action Points for 17 Categories of Industries, CPCB, March 2003.
Larry W Canter, Environmental Impact Assessment, Second Edition, McGrawHill,

University of Oklahoma, 1996.
ICS-UNIDO, Presentation on “Environmental Planning and Sustainable Development in

developing Countries: Progress towards the 7th Millennium Development Goal to ensure
Environmental Sustainability” by Mouni Ghribi.
UNIDO Industrial Estates: “Principles and Practice”, 1997.
International Association for Impact Assessment in Cooperation with Institute of

Environmental Assessment, UK – “Principles of Environmental Impact Assessment Best
Practice, 1996
International Labour Organization “Different forms of EPZs”
World Bank Group “Industrial Estates, Pollution Prevention Abatement Handbook”,

Effective July 1998.
Caj O. Falcke, “Industrial Park - Principles and Practice”, Journal of Economic Co-operation
among Islamic Countries, 1999.
Ministry of Chemicals, GoI, “Policy Resolution of Promotion of Petroleum, Chemicals and

Petrochemical Investment Regions (PCPIRs).
Ministry of Commerce and Industry, GoI, “Status of SEZs in India”, Department of

Commerce.
International Conference on Eco-Industrial Parks, Hyderabad, India, July 2009 – Study

Material
ICRIER, “Export Processing Zones in India: Analysis of the Export Performance”, Aradhana
Agarwal, Working Paper, , November 2004.
Erik Louw & Barrie Needham, “Spatial efficiency and the Planning of Industrial Estates”,
July 2003.

Central Pollution Control Board, “Monitoring of Human Exposure to Air Pollution in an
Industrial Area”, Programme Objective Series: PROBES/77/2000-01, Published by Dr. B.
Sengupta, Member Secretary, December 2000.
Central Board for the Prevention and Control of Water Pollution “Industrial Estate
Planning”, Report on Symposium on the Pollution Problem of Industrial Estate, Programme
Objective Series Probes/4/1979-1980.
APIIC, Presentation on “Infrastructure Development "Eco-Industrial Parks" by Dr.

S.S.Varaprasad, Advisor (EMP), APIIC & Member - APPCB, March 2009.
Shaleen Singhal and Amit Kapur, “Industrial Estate Planning and Management in India - An
Integrated approach towards Industrial Ecology”, Journal of Environmental management,
2002.
Seema Unnikrishnan, Neelima Naik and Gouri Deshmukh, “Eco-Industrial estate

management: a Case Study.”, Resources, Energy and Development, 2004.
General Review Study of Small & Medium Enterprise (SME) Clusters in India.
Final Report on "Infrastructure Development Action Plan for Chattisgarh".
Ecosmart India Ltd., - Report on Secondary Data Collection for Environmental Information
Centre, submitted to Ministry of Environment and Forests, 28th March 2003
Referred Websites
http://envfor.nic.in/divisions/iass/eia.htm
http://www.chemicals.nic.in
http://www.cpcb.nic.in
http://www.commerce.nic.in
http://www.sezindia.nic.in
http://www.cii.in
http://www.iaia.org
http://www.unido.org

IL&FS Ecosmart Limited
Flat # 408, Saptagiri Towers
Begumpet
Hyderabad – 500 016
Ph: + 91 40 40163016
Fax: + 91 40 40032220
For any queries or technical inputs kindly mail:
[email protected]
[email protected]

TGM - Industrial Estates For Civil

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TGM - Industrial Estates For Civil

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TGM - Industrial Estates For Civil

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUAL

The Ministry of Environment and Forests

Project Coordination Dr. (Mrs.) Nalini Bhat

Core Project Coordination Team Mr. Mahesh Babu

1. INTRODUCTION TO THE TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT 1-1

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

3.4 Summary of Applicable National Regulations.................................................................. 3-48

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

Table 3-2: Responsibilities of IE Administration ............................................................................. 3-41

Table 3-3: Tools to Explore for Conversion to EIPs......................................................................... 3-47

Table 3-4: Stage-wise Explorable Programmes................................................................................ 3-47

Table 3-6: General Emission Standards............................................................................................ 3-50

Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts ............................................................................................................ 4-12

Table 4-5: Mitigation Measures for Construction Phase .................................................................. 4-41

Table 4-6: Mitigation Measures for Operation Phase ....................................................................... 4-41

Table 4-7: Structure of EIA Report................................................................................................... 4-44

Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions........................................................................................ 5-2

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts ............................................................................................................ 2-14

Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact ......................................................................................................... 2-15

Figure 3-1: IE Planning Approach in India....................................................................................... 3-19

Figure 3-2: Various Types of IE ....................................................................................................... 3-23

Figure 3-3: Stages in IE Establishment and Management ................................................................ 3-26

Figure 3-4: Tools and Techniques for IE Planning........................................................................... 3-27

Figure 3-5: Site Suitability Approach for Candidate Sites................................................................ 3-28

Figure 3-6: Land Uses for Different Risk Levels.............................................................................. 3-33

Figure 3-7: Sustainable Management of Industrial Areas: Cycle of Change.................................... 3-39

Figure 3-8: Sustainable Development within IEs ............................................................................. 3-40

Figure 3-9: Eco- Industrial Development ......................................................................................... 3-46

Figure 3-10: Eco Industrial Networks............................................................................................... 3-46

Figure 4-3: Approach for EIA Study ................................................................................................ 4-22

Figure 4-4: Risk Assessment – Conceptual Framework ................................................................... 4-31

Figure 4-5: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance ............................................................ 4-32

Figure 4-6: Elements of Mitigation................................................................................................... 4-40

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

Types of Industrial Estates

Forms of Industrial Estates

Difference between Export Oriented Units and Special Economic Zones

Common Service Facilities

Identification of Suitable Sites and Industries

Site Establishment Factors

A Compilation of Legal Instruments

Form 1 (Application Form for Obtaining EIA Clearance)

Pre-feasibility Report: Additional Points for Possible Coverage

Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations

Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes

Sources of Secondary Data Collection

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

Impact Prediction Tools

Form through which the State Governments/Administration of the Union Territories

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

AAQ Ambient Air Quality

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

EMS Environmental Management System

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

POTW Publicly Owned Treatment Works

Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Industrial Estates October 2009

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is a process of identifying, predicting,

Ensuring level playing ground to avoid arbitrariness in the decision-making process

Conceptual facets of an EIA

Tools for assessment and analysis

Identification of costly resource inefficiencies

Goal must be continuous improvement of quality instead of acceptable quality

Type I: Multiple criteria base; third party (Govt. or non-commercial private

Mass: There is an opportunity to significantly reduce mass burdens (raw materials,

Target objectives (emission limit values/standards)